Contents

Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Non-Electric Connection Manual PDF

1 of 712
1 of 712

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi GOT2000 GT25 Non-Electric Connection Manual PDF

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) For GT Works3 Version1

-GT27 model -GT25 model -GT25 open frame model -GT25 wide model -GT25 rugged model -GT23 model -GT21 model -GT21 wide model

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

Note that failure to observe CAUTION may lead to a serious accident depending on the circumstances. Make sure to observe both warnings and cautions to ensure personal safety. Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.

Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch. An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident. An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.

When the GOT backlight has a failure, the GOT status will be as follows. Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), the display section dims, and inputs by a touch switch are disabled. [GT2105-Q] The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), and the display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. [GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P, GS21] The display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available. Even if the display section dims, inputs by a touch switch may still be available. This may cause an unintended operation of the touch switch. For example, if an operator assumes that the display section has dimmed because of the screen save function and touches the display section to cancel the screen save, a touch switch may be activated. The GOT backlight failure can be checked with a system signal of the GOT. (This system signal is not available on GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P, and GS21.)

WARNING

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

1

2

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING The display section of the GOT is an analog-resistive type touch panel.

When multiple points of the display section are touched simultaneously, an accident may occur due to incorrect output or malfunction. [GT27] Do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. [GT25, GT23, GT21, GS21] Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause a touch switch near the touched points to operate unexpectedly, or may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT, communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative. (1) For bus connection (GT27 and GT25 only): The GOT becomes inoperative. Power on the PLC CPU again to reestablish communication. (2) For other than bus connection: The GOT becomes inoperative. A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.

To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks. *1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.

Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart. Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.

Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver. Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.

When the GOT connects to an Ethernet network, the IP address setting is restricted according to the system configuration. [GT27, GT25, GT23] When a GOT2000 series model and a GOT1000 series model are on an Ethernet network, do not set the IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GOTs and the controllers on this network. Doing so can cause IP address duplication at the GOT startup, adversely affecting the communication of the device with the IP address 192.168.0.18. The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. [GT21, GS21] Setting the IP address (192.168.3.18) in the following system configurations can cause IP address duplication at GOT startup, adversely affecting communications of the device whose IP address is 192.168.3.18. The operation at IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system. When multiple GOTs connect to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network. When one GOT connects to the Ethernet network: Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the controllers other than the GOT in the network.

When using the Ethernet interfaces, set an IP address for each interface to access a different network.

Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT. Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.

When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration, or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT, the screen of the GOT might flicker.

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or

removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto/from the GOT. (GT27, GT25 Only)

3

4

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.

Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration. When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque

range with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. [GT27, GT25-W, GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT23, GT2107-W] Specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) [GT2505-V, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.30 Nm to 0.50 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.20 Nm to 0.25 Nm) Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT.

When mounting a unit on the GOT, tighten the mounting screws in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W)] When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 1. When the GOT is installed vertically, its side interface is positioned on the bottom. To prevent the falling of the wireless LAN communication unit from the side interface, install or remove the unit while holding it with hands. [GT25-W] When mounting the wireless LAN communication unit on the GOT, fit it to the wireless LAN communication unit interface and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1. [GT2103-P] When mounting the SD card unit on the GOT, fit it to the side of the GOT and tighten the tapping screws in the specified torque range (0.3 Nm to 0.6 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

When closing the USB environmental protection cover, note the following points to ensure the IP rating. [GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V)] Push the [PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W] Push the USB mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT. [GT2105-Q] Tighten the lower fixing screws of the cover in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) to fix the cover to the GOT.

[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Remove the protective film of the GOT.

When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed. In addition, for the models equipped with the human sensor function, using the GOT with the protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly.

For GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, and GT2508F-V, attach an environmental protection sheet dedicated to the open frame model (sold separately) to the display section. Or, attach a user-prepared environmental protection sheet. Not doing so may damage or soil the GOT or cause foreign matter to enter the GOT, resulting in a failure or malfunction.

When installing the supplied fittings on GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, or GT2508F-V, tighten screws in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 1.0 Nm). Meld studs on the control panel to fasten the fittings. The studs must have strength adequate to withstand a tightening torque of 0.9 Nm or more. Make sure that no foreign matter such as welding waste is at and around the bases of the studs. Tighten nuts on the studs in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 0.9 Nm) with a wrench for M4 nuts. Undertightening a screw or nut may cause the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening a screw or nut may damage it or the GOT, causing the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction.

Do not operate or store the GOT in the environment exposed to direct sunlight, rain, high temperature, dust, humidity, or vibrations.

Although GT2507T-W is ruggedized for environments such as UV rays, temperatures and vibrations, its operation is not guaranteed in all conditions and environments. Make sure to use or store the GOT in an appropriate environment.

When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil. Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.

Do not operate the GOT with its display section frozen. The water droplets on the display section may freeze at a low temperature. Touch switches and other input objects may malfunction if the display section is frozen.

WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.

Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.

5

6

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION When grounding the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section, note the following

points. Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GS21] Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section solely for the GOT (ground resistance: 100 or less, cross-sectional area of the ground cable: 2.0 mm2 or more). (GT2705-V, GT25-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, and GS21 do not have the LG terminal.) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Make sure to ground the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section with a ground resistance of 100 or less. (For GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS, grounding is unnecessary.)

When tightening the terminal screws, use the following screwdrivers. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GS21] Use a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] For the usable screwdrivers, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25, GT23] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm)

For a terminal processing of a wire to the GOT power supply section, use the following terminal. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q, GS21] Use applicable solderless terminals for terminal processing of a wire and tighten them with the specified torque. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction. [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Connect a stranded wire or a solid wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve.

Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.

Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range. [GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm) [GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P] Specified torque range (0.22 Nm to 0.25 Nm) [GS21] Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.6 Nm)

Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT. Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.

Some models have an ingress prevention label on their top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire offcuts, from entering the GOT during wiring. Do not peel this label during wiring. Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]

[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, and

tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller (A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it "clicks". After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly. Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.

WARNING Before testing the operation of a user-created screen (such as turning on or off a bit device, changing

the current value of a word device, changing the set value or current value of a timer or counter, and changing the current value of a buffer memory), thoroughly read the manual to fully understand the operating procedure. During the test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. Doing so may cause an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

WARNING When power is on, do not touch the terminals.

Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction. Correctly connect the battery connector.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.

Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all phases. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction. Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.

7

8

[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]

CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit.

Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.

Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure. The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.

Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion. Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.

Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock. A module damage may result. Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.

Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.

Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from human body, etc. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.

Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion.

Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children.Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip switch of the terminating resistor. Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity.

Before cleaning the GOT, be sure to turn off the power. Before cleaning, check the following items. Ensure that there are no problems with the installation condition of the GOT to the control panel. Ensure that there are no damages on the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable). If the environmental protection sheet peels or the cleaning solution enters between the sheet and the display section during cleaning, stop the cleaning immediately. In such a case, do not use the GOT.

CAUTION For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required.

However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, execute the touch panel calibration.

When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be activated. This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

WARNING Do not remove the SD card from drive A while the SD card is being accessed by the GOT, or the GOT

may stop processing for about 20 seconds. During this stop, you cannot operate the GOT, and the functions running in the background, including the screen refresh, alarm, logging, and script, also stop. This stop may affect the system operation, causing an accident. Before removing the SD card, check the following items. [GT27, GT25, GT23(Excluding GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] Before removing the SD card, check that the SD card access LED is off. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] Make sure to turn off the SD card access switch before removing the SD card.Not doing so may damage the SD card and files. [GT21, GS21] Disable the SD card access in the GOT utility, and then check that the SD card access LED is off before removing the SD card.

Do not remove the data storage from the file server (drive N) that is being accessed by the GOT, or the system operation may be affected. Before removing the data storage, check the relevant system signal to make sure that the data storage is not being accessed.

CAUTION Do not remove the data storage from the GOT while the data storage is being accessed by the GOT,

or the data storage and files may be damaged. Before removing the data storage, check the SD card access LED, relevant system signal, or others to make sure that the data storage is not being accessed.

Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files. When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.

[GT27, GT25, GT23(Excluding GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT2505-V, GT25HS-V] After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to turn on the SD card access switch. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written. [GT21, GS21] After inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the GOT utility. Otherwise, data cannot be read or written.

9

10

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR USE]

[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]

CAUTION When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop

out. Not doing so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly. Not doing so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break. (GT27, GT25, and GT2107-W)

Before removing the data storage from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT. After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the data storage by hand carefully. Not doing so may cause the data storage to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.

CAUTION Do not touch the edges of the touch panel (display section) repeatedly.

Doing so may result in a failure. Do not turn off the GOT while data is being written to the storage memory (ROM) or SD card.

Doing so may corrupt the data, rendering the GOT inoperative. The GOT rugged model uses the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable) with UV protection

function on the front surface. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the touch panel or the liquid crystal display panel that may be caused by ultraviolet rays. Note that if the rugged model is exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, the front surface may turn yellow. If the rugged model is likely to be exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, it is recommended to use a UV protective sheet (option).

WARNING Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including theSoftGOT-GOT

link function, the remote personal computer operation function, the VNC server function, and the GOT Mobile function. If you remotely operate control equipment using such functions, the field operator may not notice the remote operation, leading to an accident. In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network environment, and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases. Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site and ensure safety.

When operating the server (GOT) of the GOT Mobile function to disconnect a client, notify the operator of the client about the disconnection beforehand. Not doing so may cause an accident.

[PRECAUTIONS FOR EXCLUSIVE AUTHORIZATION CONTROL]

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING Before using the GOT network interaction function to prevent simultaneous operations from multiple

pieces of equipment, make sure you understand the function. You can enable or disable the exclusive authorization control of the GOT network interaction function for each screen. (For all screens, the exclusive authorization control is disabled by default.) Properly determine the screens for which the exclusive authorization control is required, and set the control by screen. A screen for which the exclusive authorization control is disabled is operable simultaneously from multiple pieces of equipment. Make sure to determine the operation period for each operator, fully grasp the circumstances of the field site, and ensure safety to perform operations.

CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. (Refer to the GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Hardware) for details of the battery directive in the EU member states.)

CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.

(Refer to the GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Hardware) for details of the regulated models.) Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be

exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual, as they are precision devices. Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail. Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.

When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when entering our products. Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method). Additionally, disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products.

11

12

CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Manuals for GT Works3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

PART 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

CHAPTER 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 32 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 GOT Ethernet Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 I/F communication setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

1.2 Writing the Project Data onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Option unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Conversion cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Field Network Adapter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Precautions when installing units on top of one another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 GOT connector specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Coaxial cableconnector connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Terminating resistors of GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Check on the GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

PART 2 CONNECTIONS TO NON-MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PRODUCTS

CHAPTER 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 80 2.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 2.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

System Configuration for connecting to X-SEL, SSEL, ASEL, PSEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 System Configuration for connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 System configuration for connecting to RCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

C O

N TE

N TS

2.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 RS-422/485 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

2.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Connecting to X-SEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Connecting to SSEL, ASEL, PSEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Connecting to RCON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Connecting to ERC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Station No.settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

2.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 2.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

CHAPTER 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 121 3.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 3.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Connecting to DMC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Connecting to DMC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Connecting to SDC20/21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Connecting to SDC30/31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Connecting to SDC45/46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Connecting to CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Connecting to CMF015, CMF050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Connecting to CML, PBC201-VN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Connecting to AUR350C, AUR450C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Connecting to CMC10B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Connecting to AHC2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Connecting to NX series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

3.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 RS-485 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

3.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Connecting to DMC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Connecting to SDC20/21, SDC30/31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Connecting to CMC10L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Connecting to DMC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Connecting to SDC45/46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Connecting to CMS, CMF015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Connecting to CML, CMF050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Connecting to MQV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

13

14

Connecting to MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Connecting to PBC201-VN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Connecting to MVF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Connecting to AUR350C, AUR450C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Connecting to RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Connecting to CMC10B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Connecting to AHC2001 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Connecting to AHC2001 SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Station number setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

3.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 3.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

CHAPTER 4 OMRON PLC 199 4.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 4.2 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Connecting to CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, or CQM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Connecting to CQM1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Connecting to CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H, or CJ2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Connecting to CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E-E, CP2E-S, or CP2E-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG, or C200HE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Connecting to CS1H, CS1G, or CS1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Connecting to C1000H, C2000H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Connecting to CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 GOT Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Connecting to CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Connecting to CJ1, CJ2, CS1, CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, or CP2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Connecting to CV500/CV1000/CV2000 or CVM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Connecting to connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Connecting to rack type host link unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Connecting to serial communication unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Connecting to communication board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Connecting to serial communication board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Connecting to RS-422A/485 Option board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Connecting to RS-422A converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Connecting to RS-232C&RS-485 Option Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

4.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Connecting to SYSMAC CJ1, CJ2, CS1, or CP2 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Connecting to NJ or NX series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 PLC side setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

4.4 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

CHAPTER 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 267 5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 5.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Connecting to the THERMAC NEO series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Connecting to the INPANEL NEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

C O

N TE

N TS

Connecting to the E5C series, E5D series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Connecting to the THERMAC R series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

5.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 RS-485 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

5.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Connecting E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Connecting to E5CN(-H,-HT), E5AN(-H,-HT), E5EN(-H,-HT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Connecting E5ZN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Connecting E5CC(-T,-B), E5DC, E5GC, E5EC(-T,-B), E5AC(-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Connecting E5CD(-B), E5ED(-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Connecting E5AR(-T), E5ER(-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Connection to interface converter (K3SC-10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Station No. settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

5.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 5.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

CHAPTER 6 KEYENCE PLC 301 6.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 6.2 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Connecting to KV-8000 or KV-7000 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Connecting to KV-5000 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Connecting to KV-3000 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Connecting to KV-1000 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Connecting to KV-700 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Connecting to KV Nano series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 GOT Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

6.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Ethernet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 PLC side setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

6.4 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

CHAPTER 7 KOYO EI PLC 341 7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 7.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Connecting to SU-5E or SU-6B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Connecting to SU-5M or SU-6M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 06 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Connecting to D2-240, D2-250-1 or D2-260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Connecting to PZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

7.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

15

16

RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 7.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

7.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Connecting to SU-5E/6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Connecting to SU-5M/6M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series or DirectLOGIC 06 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 205 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Connecting to PZ Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Connecting to U-01DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Connecting to D0-DCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Connecting to D2-DCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Station No. settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

7.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 7.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

CHAPTER 8 JTEKT PLC 375 8.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 8.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Connecting to PC3J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Connecting to PC2J (PC2J, PC2JS, or PC2JR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Connecting to PC2J (PC2JC, PC2J16P, or PC2J16PR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Connecting to PC10G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

8.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

8.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

8.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JD, PC2J (PC2J, PC2JS, or PC2JR), or PC10G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Connecting to PC3J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Connecting to PC2JC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Connecting to PC2J16P or PC2J16PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 RS-232/RS-422 interface converter setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 PC/CMP-LINK, 2PORT-LINK, or PC/CMP2-LINK settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 ML10 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Station number setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

8.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 8.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

CHAPTER 9 SHARP PLC 405 9.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 9.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Connecting to JW-21CU or JW-22CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Connecting to JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH or JW-33CUH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Connecting to JW-50CUH, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH, or JW-100CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Connecting to Z-512J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

C O

N TE

N TS

9.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

9.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

9.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Connecting to JW-22CU, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Connecting to JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH or Z-512J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Connecting to the link unit (JW-21CM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Connecting to the link unit (JW-10CM or ZW-10CM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

9.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 9.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

CHAPTER 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 423 10.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 10.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC-900, ACD-13A, ACR-13A, or BC2 . . . . . 425 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR-100, FCR-23A, FIR, PC-900, ACD-13A, or ACR-13A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 When connecting to DCL-33A Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

10.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 RS-485 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

10.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

10.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Connecting to indicating controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Connecting to communication converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Station No. settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

10.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 10.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

CHAPTER 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 443 11.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 11.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Connecting to LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830, DZ, DB series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Connecting to KP, AL3000, AH3000 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Connecting to SE3000, JU, KE3000, LE5000 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Connecting to GT120 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

11.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 RS-485 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

11.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

11.5 Controller Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Connecting to LT230, LT300 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Connecting to LT400, LT830 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

17

18

Connecting to DZ1000, DZ2000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Connecting to DB1000, DB2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Connecting to GT120 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Connecting to KP1000, KP2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Connecting to AL3000, AH3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Connecting to SE3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Connecting to JU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Connecting to KE3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Connecting to LE5000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Connecting to converter SC8-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Station number setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

11.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 11.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

CHAPTER 12 TOSHIBA PLC 483 12.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 12.2 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Connecting to PROSEC T series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Connecting to PROSEC V series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 GOT Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

12.3 Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Connecting to Unified Controller nv series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 PLC side setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

12.4 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

CHAPTER 13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC 501 13.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 13.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

Connecting to TC3, TC5, TC6, TC8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Connecting to TS2000, TS2100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

13.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 RS-485 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

13.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

13.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Connecting to TC3, TC8 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Connecting to TC5 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Connecting to TC6 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Connecting to TS2000, TS2100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

13.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

CHAPTER 14 PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER 515 14.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 14.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

C O

N TE

N TS

Connecting to MINAS A4, MINAS A4F, MINAS A4L series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Connecting to MINAS A5 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

14.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 RS-485 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 RS-232/RS-485 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

14.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

14.5 Servo Amplifier Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Connecting to MINAS A4/A4F/A4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Connecting to MINAS A5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Station number setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

14.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 14.7 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

CHAPTER 15 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC 529 15.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 15.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Connecting to FP0-C16CT, FP0-C32CT, or FP0R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Connecting to FP1-C24C or FP1-C40C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Connecting to FP2 or FP2SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 Connecting to FP3 or FP5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Connecting to FP10(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Connecting to FP10SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Connecting to FP-M(C20TC) or FP-M(C32TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Connecting to FP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Connecting to FP-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Connecting to FP7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Connecting to FP0H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 System configuration for connecting to FP-XH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

15.3 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 RS-232 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561 RS-422 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 RS-485 cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

15.4 GOT Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Communication detail settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

15.5 PLC Side Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Connecting to FP0/1/2/3/5, FP0H, FP-M, FP, FP-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Connecting to FP7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

15.6 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

APPENDIX 585 Appendix 1 Settable Device Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

IAI equipment ([IAI X-SEL Controller]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 IAI equipment ([IAI ROBO CYLINDER]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 AZBIL equipment ([Azbil SDC/DMC]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 AZBIL equipment ([Azbil DMC50]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 OMRON equipment ([OMRON SYSMAC]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

19

20

OMRON equipment ([OMRON NJ/NX]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 OMRON equipment ([OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 OMRON equipment ([OMRON Digital Temperature Controller]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 KEYENCE equipment ([KEYENCE KV-700/1000/3000/5000/7000/8000]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 KOYO EI equipment ([KOYO KOSTAC/DL]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 JTEKT equipment ([JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 SHARP equipment ([SHARP JW]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 SHINKO equipment ([Shinko Technos Controller]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 CHINO equipment ([CHINO MODBUS device]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 TOSHIBA equipment ([TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 TOSHIBA equipment ([TOSHIBA Unified Controller nv]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 SHIBAURA MACHINE equipment ([SHIBAURA MACHINE TCmini]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 PANASONIC equipment ([Panasonic MINAS A4]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 PANASONIC equipment ([Panasonic MINAS A5]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686 PANASONIC IDS equipment ([Panasonic MEWNET-FP]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 PANASONIC IDS equipment ([Panasonic FP7]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707 Intellectual Property Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .708

INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT). Before using the product, read this manual carefully and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT for correct use. Manuals for GT Works3 Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons

Manuals for GT Works3 The electronic manuals related to this product are installed together with the screen design software. If you need the printed manuals, consult your local sales office.

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual. Hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures. Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked. Sample programs can be copied to the engineering tool.

Screen design software-related manuals

Connection manuals

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Installation Instructions - PDF

GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual SH-081220ENG (1D7ML9)

PDF e-Manual

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 SH-080862ENG (1D7MB2)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 SH-081228ENG PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081197ENG (1D7MJ8)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081198ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081199ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) For GT Works3 Version1

SH-081200ENG PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081867ENG (1D7MS9)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3 Version1 JY997D52301 PDF e-Manual

21

22

GT SoftGOT2000 manuals

GOT2000 series user's manuals

GOT SIMPLE series user's manuals

Manuals related to GT Works3 add-on projects

Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Refer to the Help and manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000).

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual SH-081201ENG PDF e-Manual

MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client Operating Manual SH-082174ENG PDF

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) SH-081194ENG (1D7MJ5)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) SH-081195ENG (1D7MJ6)

PDF e-Manual

GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor) SH-081196ENG (1D7MJ7)

PDF e-Manual

Manual name Manual number Format GOT SIMPLE Series User's Manual JY997D52901 PDF

e-Manual

Manual name Manual number (Model code)

Format

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Fundamentals)

SH-082072ENG (1D7MV1)

PDF e-Manual

GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual (Screen Details)

SH-082074ENG (1D7MV3)

PDF e-Manual

Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons The following shows the abbreviations, generic terms, and model icons used in this manual.

GOT GOT2000 series Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GT27 GT27-X GT2715-X GT2715-XTBA

GT2715-XTBD -

GT27-S GT2712-S GT2712-STBA GT2712-STWA GT2712-STBD GT2712-STWD

GT2710-S GT2710-STBA GT2710-STBD

GT2708-S GT2708-STBA GT2708-STBD

GT27-V GT2710-V GT2710-VTBA GT2710-VTWA GT2710-VTBD GT2710-VTWD

GT2708-V GT2708-VTBA GT2708-VTBD

GT2705-V GT2705-VTBD

GT25 All GT25 models -

GT25-W GT2512-WX GT2512-WXTBD GT2512-WXTSD

-

GT2510-WX GT2510-WXTBD GT2510-WXTSD

GT2507-W GT2507-WTBD GT2507-WTSD

GT2507T-W GT2507T-WTSD

GT25-S GT2512-S GT2512-STBA GT2512-STBD

GT2512F-S GT2512F-STNA GT2512F-STND

GT25-V GT2510-V GT2510-VTBA GT2510-VTWA GT2510-VTBD GT2510-VTWD

GT2510F-V GT2510F-VTNA GT2510F-VTND

GT2508-V GT2508-VTBA GT2508-VTWA GT2508-VTBD GT2508-VTWD

GT2508F-V GT2508F-VTNA GT2508F-VTND

GT2505-V GT2505-VTBD

GT25HS-V Handy GOT

GT2506HS-V GT2506HS-VTBD -

GT2505HS-V GT2505HS-VTBD -

GT23 GT23-V GT2310-V GT2310-VTBA GT2310-VTBD

-

GT2308-V GT2308-VTBA GT2308-VTBD

23

24

GOT SIMPLE series

GOT1000 series, GOT900 series, and GOT800 series

GT21 All GT21 models -

GT21-W GT2107-W GT2107-WTBD GT2107-WTSD

-

GT21-Q GT2105-Q GT2105-QTBDS GT2105-QMBDS

-

GT21-R GT2104-R GT2104-RTBD -

GT21-P GT2104-P GT2104-PMBD -

GT2104-PMBDS -

GT2104-PMBDS2 -

GT2104-PMBLS -

GT2103-P GT2103-PMBD -

GT2103-PMBDS -

GT2103-PMBDS2 -

GT2103-PMBLS -

GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 -

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GS21 GS21-W-N GS2110-WTBD-N

GS2107-WTBD-N -

GS21-W GS2110-WTBD GS2107-WTBD

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series -

GOT900 Series GOT-A900 Series GOT-F900 Series

-

GOT800 Series GOT-800 Series -

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon

Available Unavailable

Communication unit

Option unit

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS

GT15-QBUS2 GT15-ABUS GT15-ABUS2 GT15-75QBUSL GT15-75QBUS2L GT15-75ABUSL GT15-75ABUS2L

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P GT15-RS4-9S GT15-RS4-TE

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Wireless LAN communication unit GT25-WLAN

Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M

Connection conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P

Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15-PRN

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB input unit GT27-R2 GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z (A set of GT16M-V4R1-Z and GT27-IF1000)

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)

Video signal conversion unit GT27-IF1000

External I/O unit GT15-DIO GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

SD card unit GT21-03SDCD

25

26

Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD

NZ1MEM-4GBSD NZ1MEM-8GBSD NZ1MEM-16GBSD L1MEM-2GBSD L1MEM-4GBSD

Battery GT11-50BAT GT15-BAT

Protective sheet GT27-15PSGC GT25-12WPSGC GT25-12PSGC GT25-10WPSGC GT25-10PSGC GT25-08PSGC GT21-07WPSGC GT25T-07WPSVC GT25-05PSGC GT25-05PSGC-2 GT21-05PSGC GT21-04RPSGC-UC GT21-03PSGC-UC GT21-04PSGC-UC GT27-15PSCC GT25-12WPSCC GT25-12PSCC GT25-10WPSCC GT25-10PSCC GT25-08PSCC GT25-05PSCC GT25-05PSCC-2 GT25-12PSCC-UC GT25-10PSCC-UC GT25-08PSCC-UC GT21-07WPSCC GT21-05PSCC GT21-04RPSCC-UC GT21-04PSCC-UC GT21-03PSCC-UC GT16H-60PSC GT14H-50PSC

Antibacterial/antiviral protective sheet GT25-12PSAC GT25-10PSAC GT25-08PSAC

Environmental protection sheet GT25F-12ESGS GT25F-10ESGS GT25F-08ESGS

Protective cover for oil GT20-15PCO GT20-12PCO GT20-10PCO GT20-08PCO GT21-12WPCO GT21-10WPCO GT21-07WPCO GT25T-07WPCO GT25-05PCO GT25-05PCO-2 GT05-50PCO GT21-04RPCO GT10-30PCO GT10-20PCO

USB environmental protection cover GT25-UCOV GT25-05UCOV GT21-WUCOV

Software Software related to GOT

Software related to iQ Works

Stand GT15-90STAND GT15-80STAND GT15-70STAND GT05-50STAND GT25-10WSTAND GT21-07WSTAND GT25T-07WSTAND

Attachment GT15-70ATT-98 GT15-70ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-97 GT15-60ATT-96 GT15-60ATT-87 GT15-60ATT-77 GT21-04RATT-40

Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S GT10-C10EXUSB-5S

Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S GT16H-CNB-37S GT11H-CNB-37S

Emergency stop switch guard cover GT16H-60ESCOV GT14H-50ESCOV

Wall-mounting attachment GT14H-50ATT

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3-J, SW1DND-GTWK3-E, SW1DND-GTWK3-C

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen design software GT Designer3 for GOT2000 and GOT1000 series

GT Designer3 Screen design software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3

GT Designer3 (GOT2000)

GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Screen design software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3

Speech synthesis license GT Works Text to Speech License (SW1DND-GTVO-M)

Add-on license GT Works3 add-on license for GOT2000 enhanced drive control (servo) project data (SW1DND-GTSV-MZ)

GENESIS64 Advanced GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-APP)

GENESIS64 Basic SCADA GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-BASIC)

GENESIS64 Generic term of GENESIS64 Advanced and GENESIS64 Basic SCADA

GOT Mobile function license for GT SoftGOT2000 License required to use the GOT Mobile function with GT SoftGOT2000 (SGT2K- WEBSKEY-)

GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000, GOT1000, and GOT900 series

GT SoftGOT2000 GOT2000 compatible HMI software GT SoftGOT2000

GT OPC UA Client MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client (SW1DNN-GTOUC-MD)

GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Classic Screen design software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Screen design software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series

DU/WIN Screen design software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series

Abbreviations and generic terms Description iQ Works iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

MELSOFT Navigator Integrated development environment software included in SWDND-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works) ( represents a version.)

MELSOFT iQ AppPortal SWDND-IQAPL-M type integrated application management software ( represents a version.)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description

27

28

Other software

License key (for GT SoftGOT2000)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description GX Works3 SWDND-GXW3-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software

( represents a version.)

GX Works2 SWDNC-GXW2-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software ( represents a version.)

Controller simulator GX Simulator3 Simulation function of GX Works3

GX Simulator2 Simulation function of GX Works2

GX Simulator SWD5C-LLT-E (-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software package (SW5D5C-LLT (-V) or later versions) ( represents a version.)

GX Developer SWD5C-GPPW-E (-EV)/SWD5F-GPPW (-V) type software package ( represents a version.)

GX LogViewer SWDNN-VIEWER-E type software package ( represents a version.)

MI Configurator Configuration and monitor tool for Mitsubishi Electric industrial computers (SWDNNMICONF-M) ( represents a version.)

PX Developer SWD5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control ( represents a version.)

MT Works2 Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SWDND-MTW2- E) ( represents a version.)

MT Developer SWRNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series ( represents a version.)

CW Configurator Setting/monitoring tools for the C Controller module and MELSECWinCPU (SWDND-RCCPU-E) ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator2 SWDNC-MRC2-E type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

MR Configurator MRZJW-SETUP type servo configuration software ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator2 Inverter setup software (SWDND-FRC2-E) ( represents a version.)

FR Configurator Inverter setup software (FR-SW-SETUP-WE) ( represents a version.)

NC Configurator2 CNC parameter setting support tool (FCSB1221)

NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool

FX Configurator-FP Parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software package for FX3U-20SSC-H (SWD5CFXSSCE) ( represents a version.)

FX Configurator-EN-L FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)

FX Configurator-EN FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E)

RT ToolBox2 Robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

RT ToolBox3 Robot program creation software (3F-14C-WINE)

MX Component MX Component Version (SWD5C-ACT-E, SWD5C-ACT-EA) ( represents a version.)

MX Sheet MX Sheet Version (SWD5C-SHEET-E, SWD5C-SHEET-EA) ( represents a version.)

CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool CPU module logging configuration tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)

Abbreviations and generic terms Description License key GT27-SGTKEY-U

Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI IAI Corporation

AZBIL Azbil Corporation

OMRON OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO EI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

JTEKT JTEKT CORPORATION

SHARP Sharp Corporation

SHINKO Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION

SHIBAURA MACHINE SHIBAURA MACHINE CO., LTD.

PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation

PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.

HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

HITACHI Hitachi, Ltd.

HIRATA Hirata Corporation

FUJI FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

MURATEC Muratec products manufactured by Murata Machinery, Ltd.

YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation

YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation

RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

ALLEN-BRADLEY Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

CLPA CC-Link Partner Association

GE GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.

HMS HMS Industrial Networks

LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.

ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.

SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA

SICK SICK AG

SIEMENS Siemens AG

SCHNEIDER EJH Schneider Electric Japan Holdings Ltd.

PLC Programmable controller manufactured by its respective company

Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by its respective company

Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by its respective company

Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by its respective company

Controller Controller manufactured by its respective company

TSN Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class B (Synchronized Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

General-purpose Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class A (Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association

CC-Link IE TSN-equipped module Generic term for the following CC-Link IE TSN master/local modules and CC-Link IE TSN Plus master/local module RJ71GN11-T2 RJ71GN11-EIP FX5-CCLGN-MS

29

30

MEMO

PART 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

31

32

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

Page 33 Setting the Communication Interface Page 51 Writing the Project Data onto the GOT Page 53 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Page 58 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection Page 68 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Page 70 Checking for Normal Monitoring The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections.

1. Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, and perform the communication setting. Page 33 Setting the Communication Interface Each chapter GOT Side Settings

2. Writing the package data Write the project data, system application onto the GOT. Page 51 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT

3. Verifying the package data Verify the project data, system application are properly written onto the GOT. Page 52 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT

4. Attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Mount the optional equipment and prepare/connect the connection cable according to the connection type. Page 53 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Page 58 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection Each chapter System Configuration Each chapter Connection Diagram

5. Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility. Page 68 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment

6. Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility, Developer, etc. Page 70 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING

1

1.1 Setting the Communication Interface Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment. When using the GOT at the first time, make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT. Set the communication interface of the GOT at [Controller Setting] and [I/F Communication Setting] in GT Designer3.

Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT.

Setting

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Refer to the following explanations for the setting.

Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 33

34

Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer, Controller Type, Driver and I/F. When using the channel No.2 to No.4, put a check mark at [Use CH*].

Setting [Driver] The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct. For the settings, refer to the following. [Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter

Item Description Use CH* Select this item when setting the channel No.2 to No.4.

Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

Type Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. Page 35 Setting [Controller Type]

I/F Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected. For the settings, refer to the following. Page 43 Setting [I/F]

Driver Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT. For the settings, refer to the following. Page 34 Setting [Driver] When multiple communication drivers can be selected, this item is displayed. When only one communication driver can be selected, the driver name is displayed under [Detail Setting].

Detail Setting Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting [Controller Type] The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used. For the settings, refer to the following.

Type Model name [IAI X-SEL Controller] XSEL-J

XSEL-K

XSEL-KE

XSEL-KT

XSEL-KET

XSEL-P

XSEL-Q

XSEL-JX

XSEL-KX

XSEL-KTX

XSEL-PX

XSEL-QX

SSEL

ASEL

PSEL

[IAI ROBO CYLINDER] PCON-C

PCON-CG

PCON-CF

PCON-CY

PCON-SE

PCON-PL

PCON-PO

PCON-CA

PCON-CFA

PCON-CB

PCON-CFB

ACON-C

ACON-CG

ACON-CY

ACON-SE

ACON-PL

ACON-PO

ACON-CB

SCON-C

SCON-CA

SCON-CB

ERC2------NP--

ERC2------PN--

ERC2------SE--

RCON-GW(GWG)-CC

RCON-GW(GWG)-CIE

RCON-GW(GWG)-DV

RCON-GW(GWG)-EP

RCON-GW(GWG)-PR

RCON-GW(GWG)-PRT

EC-S3

EC-S4

EC-S6

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 35

36

[IAI ROBO CYLINDER] EC-S7

EC-S6R

EC-S7R

EC-S6AH

EC-S7AH

EC-S6AHR

EC-S7AHR

EC-R6

EC-R7

EC-RP4

EC-GS4

EC-GD4

EC-RR3

EC-RR4

EC-RR6

EC-RR7

EC-RR6R

EC-RR7R

EC-RR6AH

EC-RR7AH

EC-RR6AHR

EC-RR7AHR

EC-TC4

EC-TW4

EC-R6W

EC-R7W

EC-RR6W

EC-RR7W

EC-B6

EC-B7

EC-B6U

EC-B7U

EC-S3R

EC-S4R

EC-RR3R

EC-RR4R

EC-ST15

EC-RTC9

EC-RTC12

EC-S13

EC-S13X

EC-S15

EC-S15X

EC-RR6XAH

EC-RR7XAH

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[IAI ROBO CYLINDER] EC-WS10

EC-WS12

EC-GD5

EC-RP5

EC-TC5

EC-TW5

EC-S6CR

EC-S7CR

EC-S6AHCR

EC-S7AHCR

EC-S3CR

EC-S4CR

EC-GRB8M

EC-GRB10M

EC-GRB13M

EC-GRB13L

EC-S10

EC-S10X

[Azbil SDC/DMC] DMC10

SDC15

SDC25

SDC26

SDC35

SDC36

SDC20

SDC21

SDC30

SDC31

SDC40A

SDC40B

SDC40G

SDC45

SDC46

CMS

CMF015

CMF050

CML

MQV

MPC

MVF

PBC201-VN2

AUR350C

AUR450C

RX

CMC10B

[Azbil DMC50] DMC50

AHC2001

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 37

38

[OMRON SYSMAC] CPM1

CPM1A

CPM2A

CPM2C

CQM1

CQM1H

CJ1H

CJ1G

CJ1M

CJ2H

CJ2M

CP1H

CP1L

CP1E

C200HS

C200H

C200HX

C200HG

C200HE

CS1H

CS1G

CS1D

CP2E-E

CP2E-S

CP2E-N

C1000H

C2000H

CV500

CV1000

CV2000

CVM1

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[OMRON NJ/NX] NJ501-1500

NJ501-1400

NJ501-1300

NJ501-1520

NJ501-1420

NJ501-1320

NJ501-1340

NJ301-1200

NJ301-1100

NJ101-1000

NJ101-9000

NJ101-1020

NJ101-9020

NX1P2-1140DT

NX1P2-1140DT1

NX1P2-1040DT

NX1P2-1040DT1

NX1P2-9024DT

NX1P2-9024DT1

NX701-1700

NX701-1600

NX102-1200

NX102-1100

NX102-1000

NX102-9000

[OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO] E5AN

E5EN

E5CN

E5GN

E5ZN

[OMRON Digital Temperature Controller] E5AN

E5EN

E5CN

E5GN

E5AN-H

E5CN-H

E5EN-H

E5AN-HT

E5CN-HT

E5EN-HT

E5ZN

E5CC(-T,-B)

E5DC

E5GC

E5EC(-T,-B)

E5AC(-T)

E5CD(-B)

E5ED(-B)

E5AR(-T)

E5ER(-T)

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 39

40

[KEYENCE KV-700/1000/3000/5000/7000/8000] KV-700

KV-1000

KV-3000

KV-5000

KV-5500

KV-7300

KV-7500

KV-8000

KV-N14

KV-N24

KV-N40

KV-N60

KV-NC32T

[KOYO KOSTAC/DL] SU-5E

SU-6B

SU-5M

SU-6M

PZ3

D2-240

D2-250-1

D2-260

D0-05AA

D0-05AD

D0-05AR

D0-05DA

D0-05DD

D0-05DD-D

D0-05DR

D0-05DR-D

D0-06DD1

D0-06DD2

D0-06DR

D0-06DA

D0-06AR

D0-06AA

D0-06DD1-D

D0-06DD2-D

D0-06DR-D

[JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC] PC3JG-P-CPU

PC3JG-CPU

PC3JD-CPU

PC3JD-C-CPU

PC3J-CPU

PC3JL-CPU

PC2JC-CPU

PC2J16P-CPU

PC2J16PR-CPU

PC2J-CPU

PC2JS-CPU

PC2JR-CPU

PC10G-CPU

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[SHARP JW] JW-21CU

JW-31CUH

JW-50CUH

JW-22CU

JW-32CUH

JW-33CUH

JW-70CUH

JW-100CUH

JW-100CU

Z-512J

[Shinko Technos Controller] ACS-13A/,,C5

JCS-33A-/,C5

JCR-33A-/,C5

JCD-33A-/,C5

JCM-33A/,C5

JIR-301-M,C5

PCD-33A-/M,C5

PC935-/M,C5

PC955-/M,C5

PC935-/M,C

PC955-/M,C

FCD-13A-/M,C

FCD-15A-/M,C

FCR-13A-/M,C

FCR-15A-/M,C

FCR-23A-/M,C

FIR-201-M,C

DCL-33A-/M,,C5

ACD-13A-/M,C

ACD-13A-/M,C5

ACR-13A-/M,C

ACR-13A-/M,C5

BCD2-

BCR2-

BCS2-

[CHINO MODBUS device] LT350

LT370

LT450

LT470

DZ1000

DZ2000

LT230

LT830

DB1000

DB2000

GT120

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 41

42

[TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V] T2 (PU224)

T3

T3H

T2E

T2N

model 2000(S2)

model 2000(S2T)

model 2000(S2E)

model 3000 (S3)

[TOSHIBA Unified Controller nv] PU811

PUM11

PUM12

PUM14

[SHIBAURA MACHINE TCmini] TC3-01

TC3-02

TC5-02

TC5-03

TC6-00

TC8-00

TS2000

TS2100

[Panasonic MINAS A4] MINAS A4

MINAS A4F

MINAS A4L

[Panasonic MINAS A5] MINAS A5

[Panasonic MEWNET-FP] FP0-C16CT

FP0-C32CT

FP0R

FP0H

FP1-C24C

FP1-C40C

FP2

FP2SH

FP3

FP5

FP10(S)

FP10SH

FP-M(C20TC)

FP-M(C32TC)

FP

FP-X

[Panasonic FP7] FP7

Type Model name

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting [I/F] The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used. Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT.

3rd stage

Extension interface

Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the GOT)

2nd stage

1st stage

Standard interface 2 (USB interface built in the GOT)

(Example: In the case of the GT27)

Standard interface 4 (Ethernet interface built in the GOT)

Standard interface 3 (RS-422/485 interface built in the GOT)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 43

44

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by using the following network. 1) GOT IP Address Setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Set [GOT IP Address] and [Subnet Mask] in the standard port with a built-in GOT, or port 1. Extension port (When using GT25-W, port 2) Set [GOT IP Address] and [Subnet Mask] in the extension port (the Ethernet interface for the Ethernet communication module), or port 2 with a built-in GOT. When using the GOT other than GT25-W, BootOS Version Z or later is required to use the extension port. For details on writing the BootOS, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Wireless LAN Set [GOT IP Address], [Subnet Mask], [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.], and [Transparent Port No.] for the wireless LAN interface. 2) GOT Ethernet Common Setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extension port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.] 3) IP Filter Setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off.

GOT IP Address Setting Set the GOT IP address.

[Standard Port] or [Port 1] The following shows an example for [Standard Port].

1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT IP Address Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window.

2. On the [Standard Port] tab, configure the following settings.

Item Description Range Update GOT Ethernet standard port setting The GOT Ethernet standard port settings are applied on GOT. -

GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT IP Address. (Default:192.168.3.18)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Select from GOT Setting List Select the GOT set in [GOT Setting List] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

[Extended Port], or [Port 2] The following shows an example for [Extended Port].

1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT IP Address Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window.

2. On the [Extended Port] tab, configure the following settings.

Item Description Range Update GOT Ethernet extended port setting The GOT Ethernet extended port settings are applied on GOT. -

Enable Ethernet extended port Enable the ethernet extended port. -

GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT IP Address. (Default:192.168.5.22)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Select from GOT Setting List Select the GOT set in [GOT Setting List] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 45

46

[Wireless LAN] 1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT IP Address Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet

Setting] window.

2. On the [Wireless LAN] tab, configure the following settings.

GOT IP address For GOT IP address of each Ethernet setting, set a value that network system is different from each other. (When the subnet mask is [255.255.255.0])

Item Description Range Update GOT Wireless LAN I/F setting The wireless LAN interface settings are applied on GOT. -

Enable Wireless LAN I/F Enable the wireless LAN. -

GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the wireless LAN I/F. (Default:192.168.4.20)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Select from GOT Setting List Select the GOT set in [GOT Setting List] dialog. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

Specify port No. for Wireless LAN Enable the port number setting for the wireless LAN separately from GOT Ethernet common setting.

-

Peripheral S/W Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the communication with the peripheral S/W. (Default: 5015)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Transparent Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the transparent function. (Default: 5014)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Driver setting Display [Detail Settings] dialog, GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

-

192.168.4.20

Set a value that network system is different from each other.

GOT wireless LAN I/F setting

192.168.3.18

GOT standard Ethernet setting

192.168.5.22

GOT extension Ethernet setting

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

GOT Ethernet Common Setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extension port, or port 1 and port 2.

1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [GOT Ethernet Common Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting] window.

2. Configure the following settings.

IP Filter Setting 1. Select [Common] [GOT Ethernet Setting] [IP Filter Setting] from the menu to display the [GOT Ethernet Setting]

window.

2. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Range Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is

connected. (Only for connection via router) (Default: 0.0.0.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Peripheral S/W Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the communication with the peripheral S/W. (Default: 5015)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

Transparent Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the transparent function. (Default: 5014)

1024 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013, 49153 to 49170)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 47

48

I/F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces. Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used.

Setting

1. Select [Common] [I/F Communication Setting] from the menu.

2. The I/F Communication Setting dialog box appears. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

Setting item The following describes the setting items for the standard I/F setting and extension I/F setting. For the detailed explanations, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Item Description Standard I/F Setting Set channel No. and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces.

CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 5 to 8: Used for barcode function, RFID function, remote personal computer operation function (serial) A: Used for the report function (with a serial printer), hard copy function (with a serial printer).

Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected. Each communication driver suitable to the channel numbers Each communication driver for connected devices

Detail Setting Set the detailed settings for the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

I/F-1,I/F-2,I/F-3 The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed.

RS232 Setting To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232, mark the [Enable the 5V power supply] checkbox. The RS232 setting is invalid when the CH No. of [I/F-1: RS232] is [9]. Not applicable to GT21 and GS21.

Ethernet Connection Setting Set the channel number and the communication driver to the Ethernet interface with a built-in GOT.

CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for connecting a controller of channel No. 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) 9: Used for connecting Host (PC) or Ethernet download A: Used for the remote personal computer operation function (Ethernet), VNC server function, gateway function, and MES interface function. Multi: Used for multi-channel Ethernet connection

Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected. Each communication driver suitable to the channel numbers Each communication driver for connected devices

Detail Setting Set the detailed settings for the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

When GT2104-P or GT2103-P is selected in the GOT type setting

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface 49

50

Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting] Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Multi-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1 Drivers The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F]. When the driver to be set is not displayed, confirm if [Manufacturer], [Controller Type] and [I/F] are correct. [Setting the communication interface] section in each chapter

Precautions

Precautions for changing model When devices that cannot be converted are included. When setting of [Manufacturer] or [Controller Type] is changed, GT Designer3 displays the device that cannot be converted (no corresponding device type, or excessive setting ranges) as [??]. In this case, set the device again.

When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network. The network will be set to the host station.

When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to [None] The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No. as [??]. In this case, set the device again. Since the channel No. is retained, the objects can be reused in other channel No. in a batch by using the [Device Bach Edit], [CH No. Batch Edit] or [Device List].

Extend I/F Setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT. Not applicable to GT21 and GS21.

CH No. Set the CH No. according to the intended purpose. The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used. 0: Not used 1 to 4: Used for the controllers of channel numbers 1 to 4 set in controller setting (channel setting). 5 to 8: Used for the barcode function, the RFID function, and the remote personal computer operation function (Serial). A: Used for the video/RGB display function, multimedia function, external I/O function, operation panel function, video output function, report function, hard copy function (with a printer), and sound output function.

Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected. Each communication driver suitable to the channel numbers Each communication driver for connected devices

Detail Setting Set the detailed settings for the communication driver. Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

Item Description

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Interface

1

1.2 Writing the Project Data onto the GOT Write the package data onto the GOT. For details on writing to GOT, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT

1. Select [Package Data] for [Write Data]. The capacity of the transfer data is displayed in [Data Size]. Check that the destination drive has the sufficient available space.

2. Select [Destination Drive].

3. When the system application or the special data is required to be added to the package data or deleted, click the [Write Option] button and configure the setting in the [Write Option] dialog.

4. Click the [GOT Write] button.

5. The package data is written to the GOT.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Data onto the GOT 51

52

Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT Confirm if the package data is properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3. For reading from the GOT, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

1. Set [GOT Side] as follows. Select [Project Data] or [Package Data] for [Read Data]. Select the drive where the project data or the package data is stored for [Source Drive].

2. Set [PC Side]. Set the reading destination of the project for [Destination]. To read the project data to GT Designer3, select [GT Designer3]. (When [Read Data] is [Package Data], the project data cannot be read to GT Designer3.) To read the project data as a file, click the [...] button to set the saving format and the saving destination of the file.

3. Click the [GOT Read] button.

4. The project is read.

5. Confirm that the project data is written correctly onto the GOT.

1.

2.

3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Data onto the GOT

1

1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type. For the specifications, usage and connecting procedure on option devices, refer to the respective device manual.

Communication module Product name Model Specifications Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series)

Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

GT15-QBUS2 For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series) Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model

GT15-ABUS For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model

GT15-ABUS2 For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model

GT15-75QBUSL For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-75QBUS2L For QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series) Bus connection (2ch) unit slim model

GT15-75ABUSL For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

GT15-75ABUS2L For A/QnACPU, Motion CPU (A series) Bus connection (1ch) unit slim model

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male))

GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female))

GT15-RS4-TE RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block)

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit

GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit

MELSECNET/10 communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit (MELSECNET/H communication unit used in the MNET/10 mode)

GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit (MELSECNET/H communication unit used in the MNET/10 mode)

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2 Local station (device station)

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network (1000BASE-T) unit

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC-LINK Ver. 2 compatible

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX) unit

Wireless LAN communication unit*1*2 GT25-WLAN Used for the connection to the IEEE802.11b/g/n compliant, built-in antenna, access point (master unit), station (slave unit), personal computers, tablets, and smartphones.

Compliance with Japan Radio Law*3, FCC*4, RE*6 (R&TTE*4), SRRC*5, KC*5, Radio Equipment Regulations (UKCA)*7

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 53

54

*1 Data transfer in wireless LAN communication may not be as stable as that in cable communication. A packet loss may occur depending on the surrounding environment and the installation location. Be sure to perform a confirmation of operation before using this product.

*2 When [Operation Mode] is set to [Access Point] in [Wireless LAN Setting] of GT Designer3, up to five stations are connectable to the wireless LAN access point (base station).

*3 The product with hardware version A or later (manufactured in December 2013) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version A can be used only in Japan. For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*4 The product with hardware version B or later (manufactured from October 2014) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version B or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein. For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*5 The product with hardware version D or later (manufactured from May 2016) complies with the regulation. The product with hardware version D or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein, China (excluding Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan), and South Korea. For information on how to check the hardware version, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

*6 The product complies with the RE Directive from March 31, 2017. *7 The product with hardware version G or later (manufactured from October 2021) complies with the regulation.

The product with hardware version G or later can be used in Japan, the United States, the EU member states, the UK, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein, China (excluding Hong Kong, Macao, and Taiwan), and South Korea.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection

1

Option unit

Conversion cables

Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit

Field Network Adapter Unit

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

Product name Model Specifications Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 1 ch, playing movie

Video input unit GT27-V4-Z For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch

RGB input unit GT27-R2 GT27-R2-Z

For analog RGB input signal 2 ch

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z For video input signal (NTSC/PAL) 4 ch, for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT GT27-ROUT-Z

For analog RGB output signal 1 ch

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT For digital video output, 1 channel

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT For sound output

External I/O unit GT15-DIOR For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Negative Common Input/Source Type Output)

GT15-DIO For the connection to external I/O device or operation panel (Positive Common Input/Sink Type Output)

Product name Model Specifications RS-485 terminal block conversion modules

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 RS-422/485 (Connector) RS-485 (Terminal block) Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unitFA-LTBGT2R4CBL10

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20

Product name Model Specifications Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M GOT multi-drop connection module

GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

Product name Model Specifications Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP The field network adapter unit can be used with the following field networks by

using the Anybus CompactCom M40 network communication module manufactured by HMS (hereinafter referred to as the communication module). Field networks: PROFIBUS DP-V1 DeviceNet How to incorporate the communication module to the field network adapter unit, and the details of the product name of the communication module, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series Field Network Adapter Unit User's Manual

Product name Model Specifications RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter

GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232 signal (D-Sub 9-pin connector) RS-485 signal (Terminal block)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 55

56

Precautions when installing units on top of one another When units are mounted on another unit, the mounting position is restricted depending on the combination of the units.

Mounting method of a communication unit and option unit For the mounting method of a communication unit and option unit, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) When the multi-channel function is used When the multi-channel function is used, the combination of connection types is restricted. For the combination of connection types, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1

*1 Only one of the units can be mounted on the GOT. *2 Mounting the unit requires two stages. *3 A slim model bus connection unit (GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L, GT15-75ABUSL, or GT15-75ABUS2L) cannot be mounted on

another unit. *4 The unit cannot be mounted on a unit in group B.

Product name Model Number of occupied slots

Mounting position

Group A *1 Video input unit GT27-V4-Z *2 2 1st stage

RGB input unit GT27-R2

GT27-R2-Z *2

Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z *2

RGB output unit GT27-ROUT

GT27-ROUT-Z *2

Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z *2

Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT

Group B *1 Bus connection unit (2 channels) *3 GT15-QBUS2 2 When a unit in group A is mounted: Upper stage of the group A unit

When no unit in group A is mounted: 1st stage When any units in group C are mounted: Lower

stage of the group C units

GT15-ABUS2

MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25

GT15-J71BR13

CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2

CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit

GT15-J71GF13-T2

CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13

Group C Bus connection unit (1 channel) *3*4 GT15-QBUS 1 When a unit in group A is mounted: Upper stage of the group A unit

When a unit in group B is mounted: Upper stage of the group B unit

GT15-ABUS

Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100

Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P

GT15-RS4-9S

GT15-RS4-TE

Sound output unit GT15-SOUT

External I/O unit GT15-DIOR

GT15-DIO

Printer unit GT15-PRN

Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP 1 Uppermost stage

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection

1

Example) When mounting a video/RGB input unit, MELSECNET/H communication unit, and serial communication unit

Video/RGB input unit

Serial communication unit

Serial communication unit MELSECNET/H communication unit

MELSECNET/H communication unit

Video/RGB input unit

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 57

58

1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type, connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary. For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter for connection. For the dimensions of connection cables and connector shapes, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)

GOT connector specifications The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side. Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user.

RS-232 interface The following connector or equivalent connector is used for the RS-232 interface of the GOT and the RS-232 communication unit. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.

Connector specifications

*1 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT2104-RTBD, GT2103- PMBDS2.

*2 The applicable solderless terminal of the terminal block is AI 0.25-6BU (AWG24) (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.). When fabricating a connection cable, use CRIMPFOX 6 (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.) for crimping tool.

Connector pin arrangement

GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105- QMBDS, GS21

9-pin D-sub (male) #4-40UNC inch screw thread

17LE-23090-27(D3CH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT15-RS2-9P 9-pin D-sub (male) #4-40UNC inch screw thread

17LE-23090-27(D3CH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT01-RS4-M JES-9P-2A3A J.S.T.MFG.CO.,LTD. (JST)

GT2104-RTBD GT2104-PMBDS2 GT2103-PMBDS2

9-pin terminal block*1*2 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc

GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GS21, GT15-RS2-9P, GT01-RS4-M

GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS2, GT2103-PMBDS2

9-pin D-sub (male)

GOT main part connector see from the front

1 5

6 9

See from the back of a GOT main part

9-pin terminal block

S D

R D

E R

D R

S G

C S

R S

N C

N C

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

RS-422/485 interface The following connector or equivalent connector is used for the RS-422/485 interface of the GOT and the RS-422/485 communication unit. For the GOT side of the connection cable, use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector.

Connector model

*1 The terminal block (MC1.5/5-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT2103-PMBD. *2 The terminal block (MC1.5/9-ST-3.5 or corresponding product) of the cable side is packed together with the GT2104-RTBD, GT2103-

PMBDS, GT2103-PMBLS. *3 The applicable solderless terminal of the terminal block is AI 0.25-6BU (AWG24) (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.).

When fabricating a connection cable, use CRIMPFOX 6 (PHOENIX CONTACT Inc.) for crimping tool.

Connector pin arrangement

GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GS21

9-pin D-Sub (female) M2.6 metric screw thread

17LE-13090-27(D3AH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT2104-PMBD GT2103-PMBD

5-pin terminal block*1*3 MC1.5/5-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc

GT2104-RTBD GT2104-PMBDS GT2104-PMBLS GT2103-PMBDS GT2103-PMBLS

9-pin terminal block*2*3 MC1.5/9-G-3.5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc

GT15-RS4-9S 9-pin D-Sub (female) M2.6 metric screw thread

17LE-13090-27(D3AH)-FA DDK Ltd.

GT01-RS4-M JES-9S-2A3B14 J.S.T.MFG.CO.,LTD. (JST)

GT15-RS4-TE - SL-SMT3.5/10/90F BOX Weidmller Interface GmbH & Co. KG

GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105- QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS, GS21, GT15- RS4-9P, GT01-RS4-M

GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD GT2104-RTBD, GT2104-PMBDS, GT2104- PMBLS, GT2103-PMBDS, GT2103-PMBLS

9-pin D-sub (female)

GOT main part connector see from the front

5 1

9 6

5-pin terminal block

S D

A S

D B

R D

A R

D B

S G

See from the back of a GOT main part

See from the back of a GOT main part

9-pin terminal block

S D

A S

D B

R D

A R

D B

S G

R S

B R

S A

C S

A C

S B

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 59

60

Coaxial cableconnector connection method The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector (connector plug for coaxial cable) and the cable.

1. Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with dimensions as shown below.

2. Pass the nut, washer, gasket, and clamp through the coaxial cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor.

3. Cut the external conductor, insulting material, and internal conductor with the dimensions as shown below. Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed down to the clamp.

4. Solder the contact to the internal conductor.

Cable in use A 3C-2V 15 mm

5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 10 mm

Cable in use B C 3C-2V 6 mm 3 mm

5C-2V, 5C-2V-CCY 7 mm 5 mm

CAUTION

Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly. Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions.

Nut Washer Gasket

Clamp Contact

Components of the BNC connector

Plug shell

Outer sheath External conductor

Insulating material

Internal conductor

Structure of the coaxial cable

A

Cut this portion of the outer sheath

Clamp

Gasket Washer

Nut

Internal conductor Insulating material

C B Clamp and external

conductor

Solder here

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

5. Insert the contact assembly shown in step 4 into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell.

Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact. Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section. Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other. Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 61

62

Terminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side. When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type, refer to the following.

RS-422/485 communication unit Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For RS422/485 communication unit

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

SW 1O N

1 2

O N SW1

ON 1

2

Rear view of RS-422/485 communication unit.

Terminating resistor setting switch

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

GT27 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For GT2710-V

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

ON

1 2

Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 63

64

GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V) Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For GT2510-V

GT25-W Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector. For GT2510-WX

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

ON

1 2

Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

Terminating resistor selector switch (inside the cover)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector.

GT23 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.

*1 The default setting is "Disable". For GT2310-V

Terminating resistor*1 Switch No.

1 2 100 OHM ON ON

Disable OFF OFF

Terminating resistor selector switch

ON

1 2

Terminating resistor setting switch (inside the cover)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 65

66

GT21 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. For GT2103-PMBD

GS21-W-N Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. For GS2110-WTBD-N

Terminating resistor selector switch position The position of the terminating resistor selector switch depends on the GOT type. For the details, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) Terminating resistor of GS21-W The terminating resistor of GS21-W is fixed to 330 . For the details, refer to the following. GOT SIMPLE Series User's Manual

USB

Terminating resistor selector switch

Terminating resistor selector switch

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection

1

Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type.

Enable the 5V power supply Make sure to validate "Enable the 5V power supply" in the [RS232 Setting] to operate the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor. Page 48 I/F communication setting When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Setting the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter For details on the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter, refer to the following manual. GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232/485 Signal Conversion Adapter User's Manual

Setting item Set value Switch No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 2-wire/4-wire 2-wire (1Pair) ON ON - - - OFF

4-wire (2Pair) OFF OFF - - - OFF

Terminating resistor 110 - - ON OFF OFF OFF

OPEN - - OFF OFF OFF OFF

330 - - OFF ON ON OFF

2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch

1 O

2 N

3 4 5 6

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 67

68

1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility. Channel number of communication interface, communication drivers allocation status Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

1. After powering up the GOT, touch [GOT basic set] [Controller] from the Utility.

2. The [Communication Settings] appears.

3. Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the communication interface box to be used.

4. When the communication driver name is not displayed normally, carry out the following procedure again. Page 33 Setting the Communication Interface

1.

2. 3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment

1

Utility How to display Utility (at default)

Utility call When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key, press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sounds. For the setting of the utility call key, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Controller Setting] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Utility call key 1-point press on GOT screen upper-left corner Utility display

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 69

70

1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Check on the GOT

Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT, PLC CPU, servo amplifier and communications. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

Alarm popup display With the alarm popup display function, alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not (regardless of the display screen). Since comments can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all. For details of the alarm popup display, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Error code Communication Channel No.

Error message Time of occurrence (Displayed only for errors)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O check screen by Main Menu. Display the I/O check screen by [Main menu] [Self check] [I/O check]. For details on the I/O check, refer to the following manual: GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

1. Touch [CPU] on the I/O check screen. Touching [CPU] executes the communication check with the connected PLC.

2. When the communication screen ends successfully, the screen on the left is displayed.

1.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 71

72

Communication monitoring function The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT. If this check ends successfully, it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the communication monitoring function screen by [Main Menu] [Comm. Setting] [Comm. Monitor]. For details on the communication monitoring function, refer to the following manual: GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) (Operation of communication monitoring function screen)

Comm. SettingMain Menu

Comm. Monitor

Touch [Comm. Setting].

Touch [Comm. Monitor].

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Confirming the communication state on the GOT side (For Ethernet connection)

Confirming the communication state on Windows, GT Designer3 When using the Windows Command Prompt Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows. At normal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.18 Reply from 192.168.3.18: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=64 At abnormal communication C:\>Ping 192.168.3.18 Request timed out.

When using the [Connection Test] of GT Designer3 Select [Communication] [Communication settings] from the menu to display [TEST].

1. Set the [PC side I/F] to the [Ethernet].

2. Specify the [GOT IP Address] of the [Communication Configuration] and click the [Test] button.

3. Check if GT Designer3 has been connected to the GOT.

At abnormal communication At abnormal communication, check the followings and execute the Ping command or [Connection Test] again. Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of [Communication Settings] IP address of GOT specified by Ping command

2.

1.

3.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 73

74

Confirming the communication state on the GOT [PING Test] can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT. For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

Confirming the communication state to each station (Station monitoring function) The station monitoring function detects the faults (communication timeout) of the stations monitored by the GOT. When detecting the abnormal state, it allocates the data for the faulty station to the GOT special register (GS).

No. of faulty stations Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) Total No. of the faulty CPU is stored.

Ethernet multiple connection Total No. of the faulty connected equipment is stored.

When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display, check [mask processing] with data operation tab as the following. For the data operation, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Numerical Display (Data Operation tab)

Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 GS230 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Ch1 GS280 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Ch2 GS300 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Ch3 GS320 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Ch4 GS340 (00H fixed) No. of faulty stations

Set [mask processing] to the upper eight bits (b8 to b15) of GS230 on Numerical Display.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 75

76

Faulty station information The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set. (0: Normal, 1: Abnormal) The bit is reset after the fault is recovered.

Ethernet connection

The following shows the Ethernet setting numbers for each device in the Ethernet multiple connection.

Device Ethernet setting No.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

Device Ethernet setting No.

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

GS231 bit 0 GS231 bit 1 GS231 bit 2 GS231 bit 3

Ethernet setting No.

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

1

CC-Link IE TSN connection

Connection with the temperature controller (AZBIL temperature controller (DMC50))

Connection types other than the above The supported device differs depending on the communication driver to be used. Communication drivers supported by the host station only

The host station uses the 0th bit at the top. Ch1: GS281.b0 Ch2: GS301.b0 Ch3: GS321.b0 Ch4: GS341.b0

Device Station number

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS1281 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

GS1282 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

GS1283 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

GS1284 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

GS1285 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64

GS1286 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80

GS1287 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96

GS1288 - - - - - - - 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112

Device Station number-Sub Station

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 1-15 1-14 1-13 1-12 1-11 1-10 1-9 1-8 1-7 1-6 1-5 1-4 1-3 1-2 1-1 1-0

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 2-15 2-14 2-13 2-12 2-11 2-10 2-9 2-8 2-7 2-6 2-5 2-4 2-3 2-2 2-1 2-0

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 3-15 3-14 3-13 3-12 3-11 3-10 3-9 3-8 3-7 3-6 3-5 3-4 3-3 3-2 3-1 3-0

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 4-15 4-14 4-13 4-12 4-11 4-10 4-9 4-8 4-7 4-6 4-5 4-4 4-3 4-2 4-1 4-0

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 5-15 5-14 5-13 5-12 5-11 5-10 5-9 5-8 5-7 5-6 5-5 5-4 5-3 5-2 5-1 5-0

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 6-15 6-14 6-13 6-12 6-11 6-10 6-9 6-8 6-7 6-6 6-5 6-4 6-3 6-2 6-1 6-0

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 7-15 7-14 7-13 7-12 7-11 7-10 7-9 7-8 7-7 7-6 7-5 7-4 7-3 7-2 7-1 7-0

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 8-15 8-14 8-13 8-12 8-11 8-10 8-9 8-8 8-7 8-6 8-5 8-4 8-3 8-2 8-1 8-0

Communication driver list Bus Q Bus A/QnA Serial(MELSEC)

AJ71QC24, MELDAS C6* AJ71C24/UC24 CC-Link(G4)

MELSEC-FX MELSEC-WS OMRON SYSMAC

YASKAWA GL YASKAWA CP9200 (H) YASKAWA CP9300MS (MC compatible)

YASKAWA MP2000/MP900/CP9200SH AB Control/CompactLogix SHARP JW

TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V HITACHI IES HIDIC H HITACHI IES HIDIC H(Protocol2)

PANASONIC MEWNET-FP PANASONIC MEWTOCOL-7 SIEMENS S7-200

YOKOGAWA FA500/FA-M3/STARDOM Serial(KEYENCE) HITACHI S10mini/S10V

FUJI MICREX-SX SPH SHIBAURA MACHINE TCmini SICK Flexi Soft

IAI X-SEL PROFIBUS DP DeviceNet

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 77

78

Communication drivers supported by the other stations

The following shows the supported devices.

*1 When CC-Link IE controller network connection is not used. *2 When CC-Link IE field network connection is not used.

For details on the GS Device, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

Network No., station No. notification The network No. and station No. of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup. If connected by other than Ethernet, 0 is stored.

When using the station monitoring function in the CC-Link IE Field Network connection When a submaster station is on the network, use the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit (GT15-J71GF13-T2) with the software version C or later. The software version is the 10th digit of the serial number described on the rating plate of the unit.

Communication driver list CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Field Network MEI Nexgenie

AB SLC500 AB 1:N connection AB MicroLogix AB MicroLogix(Extended)

SIEMENS S7-300/400 JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC FUJI MICREX-F

GE(SNP-X) KOYO KOSTAC/DL LS Industrial Systems MASTER-K

Hirata HNC IAI robocylinder Panasonic MINAS A4

Panasonic MINAS A5 Muratec MPC MELSERVO-J4,J3,J2S/M,JE

FREQROL 500/700/800,SENSORLESS SERVO FREQROL 800 FREQROL(Batch monitor)

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO OMRON Digital Temperature Controller AZBIL SDC/DMC

AZBIL DMC50 RKC SR Mini HG (MODBUS) FUJI Temperature Controller/Digital Controller

YOKOGAWA GREEN/UT100/UT2000/ UTAdvanced

SHINKO TECHNOS CONTROLLER CHINO MODBUS device

MODBUS/RTU Master

Device Station number

Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0*1

GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64

GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80

GS287 GS307 GS327 GS347 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96

GS288 GS308 GS328 GS348 127 *1*2

126 *1*2

125 *1*2

124 *1*2

123 *1*2

122 *1*2

121 *1*2

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112

Device Description

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No. (1 to 239)

GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No. (1 to 64)

1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring

PART 2 CONNECTIONS TO NON- MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PRODUCTS

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

4 OMRON PLC

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER

6 KEYENCE PLC

7 KOYO EI PLC

8 JTEKT PLC

9 SHARP PLC

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER

11 CHINO CONTROLLER

12 TOSHIBA PLC

13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC

14 PANASONIC SERVO AMPLIFIER

15 PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX PLC

79

80

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER Page 80 Connectable Model List Page 83 System Configuration Page 102 Connection Diagram Page 111 GOT Side Settings Page 113 Robot Controller Side Setting Page 119 Settable Device Range Page 119 Precautions

2.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

X-SEL XSEL-J RS-232 Page 83 System Configuration for connecting to X-SEL, SSEL, ASEL, PSEL

XSEL-K

XSEL-KE

XSEL-KT

XSEL-KET

XSEL-P

XSEL-Q

XSEL-JX

XSEL-KX

XSEL-KTX

XSEL-PX

XSEL-QX

SSEL SSEL

ASEL ASEL

PSEL PSEL

PCON PCON-C RS-232 RS-422

*1

Page 85 System Configuration for connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2

PCON-CG

PCON-CF

PCON-CY

PCON-SE

PCON-PL

PCON-PO

PCON-CA

PCON-CFA

PCON-CB

PCON-CFB

ACON ACON-C

ACON-CG

ACON-CY

ACON-SE

ACON-PL

ACON-PO

ACON-CB

SCON SCON-C

SCON-CA

SCON-CB

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.1 Connectable Model List

2

ERC2 ERC2------NP-- RS-232 RS-422

*1

Page 85 System Configuration for connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2

ERC2------PN--

ERC2------SE--

RCON RCON-GW(GWG)-CC RS-232 RS-422

*1

Page 99 System configuration for connecting to RCON

RCON-GW(GWG)-CIE

RCON-GW(GWG)-DV

RCON-GW(GWG)-EP

RCON-GW(GWG)-PR

RCON-GW(GWG)-PRT

EC EC-S3 RS-232 RS-422

*2 *3EC-S4

EC-S6

EC-S7

EC-S6R

EC-S7R

EC-S6AH

EC-S7AH

EC-S6AHR

EC-S7AHR

EC-R6

EC-R7

EC-RP4

EC-GS4

EC-GD4

EC-RR3

EC-RR4

EC-RR6

EC-RR7

EC-RR6R

EC-RR7R

EC-RR6AH

EC-RR7AH

EC-RR6AHR

EC-RR7AHR

EC-TC4

EC-TW4

EC-R6W

EC-R7W

EC-RR6W

EC-RR7W

EC-B6

EC-B7

EC-B6U

EC-B7U

EC-S3R

EC-S4R

EC-RR3R

EC-RR4R

Series Model name Clock Communication Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.1 Connectable Model List 81

82

*1 For GS21, only GS21-W-N supports the RS-422 connection. *2 Sample screen data are required for connection with EC series.

To obtain sample screen data, contact your local sales office. *3 EC series with an ACR option is designed to be connected with RCON-EC.

The series cannot be directly connected with the GOT.

EC EC-ST15 RS-232 RS-422

*2 *3EC-RTC9

EC-RTC12

EC-S13

EC-S13X

EC-S15

EC-S15X

EC-RR6XAH

EC-RR7XAH

EC-WS10

EC-WS12

EC-GD5

EC-RP5

EC-TC5

EC-TW5

EC-S6CR

EC-S7CR

EC-S6AHCR

EC-S7AHCR

EC-S3CR

EC-S4CR

EC-GRB8M

EC-GRB10M

EC-GRB13M

EC-GRB13L

EC-S10

EC-S10X

Series Model name Clock Communication Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.1 Connectable Model List

2

2.2 System Configuration System Configuration for connecting to X-SEL, SSEL, ASEL, PSEL

Controller Connection cable Max. distance

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Series RS-232C adapter

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*3 Model

X-SEL (Teaching connector)

- RS-232 CB-ST-E1MW050*1

or Page 102 RS-

232 connection diagram 1)

10m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Controller

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

CB-ST-E1MW050*1

+ Page 103 RS-

232 connection diagram 4) or

Page 103 RS- 232 connection diagram 5)

10m - (Built into GOT)

X-SEL (General RS232C port connector)

- RS-232 Page 102 RS- 232 connection diagram 2)

10m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Page 103 RS- 232 connection diagram 6)

10m - (Built into GOT)

IAI X-SEL

Communication driver

Connector conversion cable

X-SEL SSEL GOT

Connection Cable

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 83

84

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

SSEL ASEL PSEL

CB-SEL-SJ002*1 RS-232 CB-ST-E1MW050*1 10m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Controller

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

CB-ST-E1MW050*1

+ Page 103 RS-

232 connection diagram 4) or

Page 103 RS- 232 connection diagram 5)

10m - (Built into GOT)

Controller Connection cable Max. distance

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Series RS-232C adapter

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*3 Model

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration

2

System Configuration for connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2

When connecting to one controller When using the RS-232 connection PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)

Controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Series Communication cable

RS232C conversion unit

Commu nication Type

Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*5 Model

PCON ACON SCON ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)*3

CB-RCA-SIO050*1

(5m) RCB-CV-MW*1 (0.3m)

RS-232 - - - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Controller

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*4

Page 104 RS- 232 connection diagram 7)

10m - (Built into GOT)

ERC2 (SIO specifications)*2

CB-ERC2-SIO020*1

+ CB-ERC2-PWBIO *1

or CB-ERC2-PWBIO -RB*1

RCB-CV-MW*1 (0.3m)

RS-232 - - - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Controller

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*4

Page 104 RS- 232 connection diagram 7)

10m - (Built into GOT)

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

RS232C conversion unit

Communication cable

PCON ACON SCON ERC2

GOT

Connection cable

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 85

86

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 Use ERC2------SE--. *3 Use ERC2------NP-- or ERC2------PN--. *4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration

2

ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 Use ERC2------NP-- or ERC2------PN--. *3 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Contro ller

Connectio n cable 1)*1

Termina l block

Connectio n cable 2)

Max. dist ance

SIO converter*1 Connection cable 3) GOT Number of connectable equipmentSeries Cable

model Connectio n diagram number

Model name

Commu nicatio n Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dist ance

Option device*4

Mode l

ERC2 (NP/PN specific ations)*2

CB-ERC- PWBIO or CB-ERC- PWBIO- RB

Terminal block (User preparing)

Page 107 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 7) or

Page 107 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 8)

100m RCB-TU- SIO-

RS-232 RCB-CV- MW*1(0.3m) + CB-RCA- SIO050*1(5m) or

Page 102 RS- 232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

1 GOT for 16 Controller

RC -TU- PIO*1

Page 107 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 9)

GT15- RS2-9P

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*3

Page 104 RS-232 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

GOT SIO converter

Terminal block

Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3)

Connection cable 1)

ERC2

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 87

88

When using the RS-422/485 cable PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)

Controller Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)*1

Junction box 4D*2

Connection cable 2)

GOT Max. dista nce

Number of connectable equipmentSeries Connection

diagram number

Cable model Model name

Connection diagram number

Option device*6*7 Model

PCON ACON SCON ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)*5

Page 105 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 1)

CB-RCB-CTL002 (0.2m)

5-1473574-4 Page 105 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 3)

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m)*3

100m 16 Controllers for 1 GOT

Page 106 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 4)

- (Built into GOT)

*8

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 106 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 5)

GT15-RS4-TE

Page 109 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 14)

- (Built into GOT)

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

GOTJunction box 4D

Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

PCON ACON SCON ERC2

Terminal cable

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration

2

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics. *3 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *4 Use ERC2------SE--. *5 Use ERC2------NP-- or ERC2------PN--. *6 GT25-W is not compatible to the option devices other than FA-LTBGT2R4CBL. *7 GT2505-V does not support the option device. *8 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

ERC2 (SIO specifications)*4

Page 105 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 1)

CB-ERC2-CTL001 + CB-ERC2-PWBIO or CB-ERC2-PWBIO - RB

5-1473574-4 Page 105 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 3)

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m)*3

100m 16 Controllers for 1 GOT

Page 106 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 4)

- (Built into GOT)

*8

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 106 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 5)

GT15-RS4-TE

Page 109 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 14)

- (Built into GOT)

Controller Terminal cable

Connection cable 1)*1

Junction box 4D*2

Connection cable 2)

GOT Max. dista nce

Number of connectable equipmentSeries Connection

diagram number

Cable model Model name

Connection diagram number

Option device*6*7 Model

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 89

90

ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Use ERC2------NP-- or ERC2------PN--. *4 GT25-W is not compatible to the option devices other than FA-LTBGT2R4CBL. *5 GT2505-V does not support the option device. *6 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Controller Connection cable 1)*1

Terminal block

Connection cable 2)

GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipmentSeries Cable model Connection

diagram number Option device*4*5 Model

ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)*3

CB-ERC-PWBIO or CB-ERC-PWBIO -RB

Terminal block (User preparing)

Page 108 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 10)

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m)*2

100m 16 Controllers for 1 GOT

Page 108 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 11)

- (Built into GOT)

*6

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 109 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 12)

GT15-RS4-TE

Page 110 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 15)

- (Built into GOT)

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

GOTTerminal block

Connection cable 1)

ERC2

Connection cable 2)

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration

2

When connecting to multiple controllers PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)

Controller Terminal cable

Connecti on cable 1)*1

Junction box 4D*2

Connecti on cable 2)

Connecti on cable 3)

GOT Max. dista nce

Number of connectable equipment

Series Connecti on diagram number

Cable model

Model name

Connecti on diagram number

Connecti on diagram number

Option device*6*7 Model

PCON ACON SCON ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)*5

Page 105 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 1)

CB-RCB- CTL002 (0.2m)

5-1473574-4 Page 105 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 2)

Page 105 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 3)

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m)*3

100m 16 Controllers for 1 GOT

Page 106 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 4)

- (Built into GOT)

*8

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 106 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 5)

GT15-RS4-TE

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

GOTJunction box 4D

Connection cable 3)Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1)

Terminal cable

Junction box 4D

PCON ACON SCON ERC2

PCON ACON SCON ERC2

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 91

92

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics. *3 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *4 Use ERC2------SE--. *5 Use ERC2------NP-- or ERC2------PN--. *6 GT25-W is not compatible to the option devices other than FA-LTBGT2R4CBL. *7 GT2505-V does not support the option device. *8 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

PCON ACON SCON ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)*5

Page 105 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 1)

CB-RCB- CTL002 (0.2m)

5-1473574-4 Page 105 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 2)

Page 109 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 14)

- (Built into GOT) 100m 16 Controllers for 1 GOT

ERC2 (SIO specifications)*4

Page 105 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 1)

CB-ERC2- CTL001 + CB-ERC2- PWBIO or CB-ERC2- PWBIO -RB

Page 105 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 2)

Page 105 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 3)

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m)*3

Page 106 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 4)

- (Built into GOT)

*8

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 106 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 5)

GT15-RS4-TE

Page 109 RS- 422/485 connection diagram 14)

- (Built into GOT)

Controller Terminal cable

Connecti on cable 1)*1

Junction box 4D*2

Connecti on cable 2)

Connecti on cable 3)

GOT Max. dista nce

Number of connectable equipment

Series Connecti on diagram number

Cable model

Model name

Connecti on diagram number

Connecti on diagram number

Option device*6*7 Model

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration

2

ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only

Controller Connection cable 1)*1

Terminal block

Connection cable 2)

GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipmentSeries Cable model Connection

diagram number Option device*4*5 Model

ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)*3

CB-ERC-PWBIO or CB-ERC-PWBIO -RB

Terminal block (User preparing)

Page 108 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 10)

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

100m 16 Controllers for 1 GOT

Page 108 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 11)

- (Built into GOT)

*6

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 109 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 12)

GT15-RS4-TE

Page 110 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 15)

- (Built into GOT)

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

GOTTerminal block

Connection cable 1)

ERC2

Connection cable 2)

Terminal block

Connection cable 1)

ERC2

Terminal block

Connection cable 1)

ERC2

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 93

94

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Use ERC2------NP-- or ERC2------PN--. *4 GT25-W is not compatible to the option devices other than FA-LTBGT2R4CBL. *5 GT2505-V does not support the option device. *6 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration

2

When connecting to multiple controllers (via SIO converter) PCON, ACON, SCON, ERC2 (SIO specifications), ERC2 (NP/PN specifications)

Contr oller

Termina l cable

Conn ection cable 1)*1

Junct ion box 4D*2

Connec tion cable 2)

Connec tion cable 3)

Max . dist anc e

SIO converter*1

Connection cable 4)

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Series Connect ion diagram number

Cable model

Model name

Connec tion diagra m number

Connec tion diagra m number

Mod el nam e

Com munic ation Type

Cable model Connectio n diagram number

Max . dist anc e

Option device *7

Mode l

PCON ACON SCON

Pag e 105 RS- 422/485 connectio n diagram 1)

CB- RCB- CTL00 2 (0.2m)

5- 147357 4-4

Pag e 105 RS-422/ 485 connectio n diagram 2)

Pag e 105 RS-422/ 485 connectio n diagram 2) or

Pag e 106 RS-422/ 485 connectio n diagram 6)

100m RCB- TU- SIO-

RS- 232

RCB-CV- MW*1 (0.3m) + CB-RCA- SIO050*1(5 m) or

Page 102 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

16 Controllers for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*

6

Page 104 RS-232 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

GOTSIO converter

Junction box 4D

Connection cable 2) Connection cable 3) Connection cable 4)

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 1)

Terminal cable

Junction box 4D

PCON ACON SCON ERC2

PCON ACON SCON ERC2

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 95

96

PCON ACON SCON

- CB- RCB- CTL00 2*3 (0.2m)

- - - 100m RCB- TU- SIO-

RS- 232

RCB-CV- MW*1 (0.3m) + CB-RCA- SIO050*1(5 m) or

Page 102 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

2 Controllers for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*

6

Page 104 RS-232 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

ERC2 (SIO specific ations)* 4

Pag e 105 RS- 422/485 connectio n diagram 1)

CB- ERC2- CTL00 1 + CB- ERC2- PWBIO or CB- ERC2- PWBIO - RB

5- 147357 4-4

Pag e 105 RS-422/ 485 connectio n diagram 2)

Pag e 105 RS-422/ 485 connectio n diagram 2) or

Pag e 106 RS-422/ 485 connectio n diagram 6)

100m RCB- TU- SIO-

RS- 232

RCB-CV- MW*1(0.3m) + CB-RCA- SIO050*1 (5m) or

Page 102 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

16 Controllers for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*

6

Page 104 RS-232 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

ERC2 (SIO specific ations)* 4

- CB- ERC2- CTL00 1 + CB- ERC2- PWBIO or CB- ERC2- PWBIO - RB

- - - 100m RCB- TU- SIO-

RS- 232

RCB-CV- MW*1(0.3m) + CB-RCA- SIO050*1 (5m) or

Page 102 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

2 Controllers for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*

6

Page 104 RS-232 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

Contr oller

Termina l cable

Conn ection cable 1)*1

Junct ion box 4D*2

Connec tion cable 2)

Connec tion cable 3)

Max . dist anc e

SIO converter*1

Connection cable 4)

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Series Connect ion diagram number

Cable model

Model name

Connec tion diagra m number

Connec tion diagra m number

Mod el nam e

Com munic ation Type

Cable model Connectio n diagram number

Max . dist anc e

Option device *7

Mode l

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration

2

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics. *3 When not using junction box 4D, connection cable 2) or connection cable 3), connect the controller to the SIO converter directly by the

cable CR-RCB-CTL002. *4 Use ERC2------SE--. *5 Use ERC2------NP-- or ERC2------PN--. *6 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *7 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

ERC2 (NP/PN specific ations)* 5

Pag e 105 RS- 422/485 connectio n diagram 1)

CB- ERC- PWBIO or CB- ERC- PWBIO - RB + Termin al block (User prepari ng) +

P age 109 RS- 422/ 485 connec tion diagra m 13)

5- 147357 4-4

Pag e 105 RS-422/ 485 connectio n diagram 2)

Pag e 105 RS-422/ 485 connectio n diagram 2) or

Pag e 106 RS-422/ 485 connectio n diagram 6)

100m RCB- TU- SIO-

RS- 232

RCB-CV- MW*1(0.3m) + CB-RCA- SIO050*1 (5m) or

Page 102 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

16 Controllers for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*

6

Page 104 RS-232 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

Contr oller

Termina l cable

Conn ection cable 1)*1

Junct ion box 4D*2

Connec tion cable 2)

Connec tion cable 3)

Max . dist anc e

SIO converter*1

Connection cable 4)

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Series Connect ion diagram number

Cable model

Model name

Connec tion diagra m number

Connec tion diagra m number

Mod el nam e

Com munic ation Type

Cable model Connectio n diagram number

Max . dist anc e

Option device *7

Mode l

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 97

98

ERC2 (NP/PN specifications) only

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155. *3 Use ERC2------NP-- or ERC2------PN--. *4 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Contro ller

Connectio n cable 1)*1

Termina l block

Connectio n cable 2)

Max. dist ance

SIO converter*1 Connection cable 3) GOT Number of connectable equipmentSeries Cable

model Connectio n diagram number

Model name

Connec tion diagra m number

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dist ance

Option device*5

Mode l*3

ERC2 (NP/PN specific ations)*3

CB-ERC- PWBIO or CB-ERC- PWBIO - RB

Terminal block (User preparing)

Page 109 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 13) or

Page 107 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 8)

100m RCB-TU- SIO-

RS-232 RCB-CV- MW*1(0.3m) + CB-RCA-SIO050*1 (5m) or

Page 102 RS- 232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

16 Controllers for 1 GOT

RC -TU- PIO*1

Page 107 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 9)

GT15- RS2-9P*2

GT10- C02H- 6PT9P*4

Page 104 RS- 232 connection diagram 8)

- (Built into GOT)

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

Terminal block

Connection cable 1)

ERC2

Terminal block

Connection cable 1)

ERC2

Terminal block

Connection cable 1)

ERC2

GOTSIO converter

Connection cable 3)

Connection cable 2)

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration

2

System configuration for connecting to RCON

When using the RS-232 connection

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Series Communication cable

RS232C conversion unit

Communication Type

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device *3 Model

RCON CB-RCA-SIO050 *1

(5m) RCB-CV-MW *1 (0.3m)

RS-232 - - - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 Controller

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *2

Page 104 RS-232 connection diagram 7)

10m - (Built into GOT)

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

RS232C conversion unit

Communication cableRCON GOT

Connection cable

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 99

10

When using the RS-422/485 connection

Controller Terminal cable

Connection cable 1) *1

Junction box 4D *2

Connection cable 2)

GOT Max. distance

Number of connectable equipmentSeries Connection

diagram number

Cable model Model name

Connection diagram number

Option device *4*5 Model

RCON Page 105 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 1)

CB-RCB-CTL002 (0.2m)

5-1473574-4 Page 105 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 3)

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m) *3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m) *3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m) *3

100m 16 Controllers for 1 GOT

Page 106 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 4)

- (Built into GOT)

*8

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 106 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 5)

GT15-RS4-TE

Page 109 RS-422/ 485 connection diagram 14)

- (Built into GOT)

IAI ROBO CYLINDER

Communication driver

GOTJunction box 4D

Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

RCON

Terminal cable

0 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration

2

*1 Product manufactured by IAI Corporation. For details of the product, contact IAI Corporation. *2 Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics. *3 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *4 GT25-W is not compatible to the option devices other than FA-LTBGT2R4CBL. *5 GT2505-V does not support the option device. *6 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.2 System Configuration 101

10

2.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the controller.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

GOT side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

IAI robot controller side

1

2

3

4

7

5

6

12

13

18

19

20

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

TXD

RXD

RTS

SG

CTS

DSR

EMGOUT

EMGIN

VCC

ENBTBX

DTR

GOT side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

IAI robot controller side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

NC

SD(TXD)

RD(RXD)

DR(DSR)

SG

ER(DTR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CD

RD (RXD)

SD (TXD)

ER (DTR)

SG

DR (DSR)

RS (RTS)

CS (CTS)

-

-

RD

SD

SG

ER

DR

RS

CS

-

SIO converter side

1

2

3

5

4

6

7

8

9

2 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.3 Connection Diagram

2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

GOT side IAI robot controller side

3

2

1

4

5

6

7

8

9

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

GOT side IAI robot controller side

3

2

4

5

7

6

12

13

18

19

20

RXD

TXD

RTS

CTS

SG

DSR

EMGOUT

EMGIN

VCC

ENBTBX

DTR

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

GOT side IAI robot controller side

3

2

1

4

5

6

7

8

9

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

NC

DR(DSR)

SG

ER(DTR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.3 Connection Diagram 103

10

RS-232 connection diagram 7)

RS-232 connection diagram 8)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 10cm or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

IAI Robot Controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the IAI Robot Controller. For details, refer to the IAI Robot Controller user's manual.

GOT side

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RS-232C conversion modules side (RCB-CV-MW)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

-

RD

SD

SG

ER

DR

RS

CS

-

SIO converter sideGOT side

1

2

3

5

4

6

7

8

9

4 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.3 Connection Diagram

2

RS-422/485 cable

Connection diagram RS-422/485 connection diagram 1)

RS-422/485 connection diagram 2)

RS-422/485 connection diagram 3)

1

2

3

4

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4 Terminating resistor 220 1/4W

1

2

3

4

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4

1

2

3

4

6

8

2

10

12

5

7

14

16

18

20

1

3

4

9

11

13

15

17

19

GOT side

SDA1 (TXD1+)

SDB1 (TXD1-)

SG

RDA1 (RXD1+)

RDB1 (RXD1-)

SDA2 (TXD2+)

SDB2 (TXD2-)

RSA (RTS+)

RSB (RTS-)

CSA (CTS+)

CSB (CTS-)

NC

NC

NC

RDA2 (RXD2+)

RDB2 (RXD2-)

NC

NC

NC

NC

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4

1

2

3

4

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.3 Connection Diagram 105

10

RS-422/485 connection diagram 4)

RS-422/485 connection diagram 5)

RS-422/485 connection diagram 6)

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

GOT side

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4

1

2

3

4

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

1

2

9

3

4

5

6

7

8

10

GOT side

SDA1

SDB1

SG

RDA1

RDB1

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

FG

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4

1

2

3

4

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

SGA

SGB

SIO converter side (TB1) link connection terminal block

SIO converter side (TB2) power, Emergency stop

terminal block

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4

1

2

3

40V

FG

6 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.3 Connection Diagram

2

RS-422/485 connection diagram 7)

RS-422/485 connection diagram 8)

RS-422/485 connection diagram 9)

*1 Turn the terminator switch of a terminal block which will be a terminal to "RTON".

1

2

3

4

Terminal block (User preparing)

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1)

GND

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug) Model name : -1473562-4

SGA

SGB

SIO converter side (TB1) Link connection Terminal block

SIO converter side (TB2) power supply or

Emergency stop Terminal block

0V

Terminal block (User preparing)

Terminal block (User preparing)

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1)

GND

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1)

GND

SGA

SGB

SIO converter side (TB1) Link connection Terminal block

SIO converter side (TB2) power supply or

Emergency stop Terminal block

Terminal block (RC -Tu-PIO : IAI robot controller)

Terminal block*1

(RC -Tu-PIO : IAI robot controller)

Signal name

A

B

Signal name

A

B

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.3 Connection Diagram 107

10

RS-422/485 connection diagram 10)

RS-422/485 connection diagram 11)

6

8

2

10

12

5

7

14

16

18

20

1

3

4

9

11

13

15

17

19

GOT side

SDA1 (TXD1+)

SDB1 (TXD1-)

SG

RDA1 (RXD1+)

RDB1 (RXD1-)

SDA2 (TXD2+)

SDB2 (TXD2-)

RSA (RTS+)

RSB (RTS-)

CSA (CTS+)

CSB (CTS-)

NC

NC

NC

RDA2 (RXD2+)

RDB2 (RXD2-)

NC

NC

NC

NC

Terminal block (User preparing)

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1)

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

Terminal block (User preparing)

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1)

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

GOT side

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W Terminal block

(User preparing)

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1) Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

Terminal block (User preparing)

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1)

8 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.3 Connection Diagram

2

RS-422/485 connection diagram 12)

RS-422/485 connection diagram 13)

RS-422/485 connection diagram 14)

1

2

9

3

4

5

6

7

8

10

GOT side

SDA1

SDB1

SG

RDA1

RDB1

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

FG

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W Terminal block

(User preparing)

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1) Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

Terminal block (User preparing)

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1)

1

2

3

4

Terminal block (User preparing)

Signal name

SGA(Orange : Red1)

SGB(Orange : Black1)

GND

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4GOT side

1

2

3

4

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.3 Connection Diagram 109

11

RS-422/485 connection diagram 15)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The maximum length of the RS-422/485 cable must be 100m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

E-CON connector (plug) (Type name: -1473562-4) Product manufactured by Tyco Electronics. For details of the product, contact Tyco Electronics.

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side When connecting the GOT and a controller, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to disable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N Set the terminating resistor selector to OPEN. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

Junction box 4D side E-CON Connector (Plug)

Model name : -1473562-4GOT side

1

2

3

4

Terminating resistor 220 1/2W

0 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.3 Connection Diagram

2

2.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [IAI] [Controller Type] When connecting to X-SEL, SSEL, ASEL, or PSEL: [IAI X-SEL Controller] When connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON, RCON, or ERC2: [IAI ROBO CYLINDER] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 112 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.4 GOT Side Settings 111

11

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 When connecting to RCON, set the axis number of the driver unit to be monitored.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication

with the connected equipment. (Default: 38400bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bits)

7bit, 8bit

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bits)

1bit, 2bit

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: None)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 3timse)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Host Address Make the settings according to the station number (station code) of the controller to be monitored. (Default: 0)

0 to 255 0 to 15 *1

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

2 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.4 GOT Side Settings

2

2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting

IAI Robot Controller For details of IAI Robot Controller, refer to the following manuals. IAI Robot Controller user's Manual

Connecting to X-SEL

Parameter setting Enter the following parameters using peripheral software. When setting parameters, set the mode switch of the controller to "MANU".

*1 For X-SEL(P/Q/PX/QX), the parameter becomes the SIO channel 0 opened to user. *2 Indicates only the transmission that can be specified on the GOT side.

Specify the transmission speed to match the baud rate of the GOT. *3 Set it only when a wait time is required before the response and transmission to the GOT request. Normally, the communication is

available using default values. *4 When using the "MANU" mode, the set value is fixed to the value with *. Adjust the settings of the GOT side to the * settings.

However, the communication setting of the PC software becomes the setting of X-SEL after the PC software for X-SEL is connected. In this case, adjust the communication setting of the GOT to the setting of the PC software.

Parameter Parameter Name Set Value*4

I/O parameter 90 Usage of SIO channel 1*1opened to user When used in "MANU" Set either of the following. 0: SEL opened program 2: IAI protocol B When used in "AUTO"

2: IAI protocol B

I/O parameter 91 Station code of SIO channel 1*1opened to user 0 to 255 153*

I/O parameter 92*2 Baud rate type of SIO channel 1*1 opened to user 0: 9600bps* 1: 19200bps 2: 38400bps 3: 57600bps 5: 115200bps

I/O parameter 93 Data length of SIO channel 1*1 opened to user 7bit, 8bit*

I/O parameter 94 Stop bit length of SIO channel 1*1 opened to user 1bit*, 2bit

I/O parameter 95 Parity type of SIO channel 1 *1 opened to user 0: None* 1: Odd 2: Even

I/O parameter 97 *3 IAI-protocol minimum response delay for SIO channel 1*1 opened to user

0 to 999(ms)

Other parameter 46 Other setting bit pattern 1 bit0 to 3 = 1 (fixed)

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting 113

11

Mode switch X-SEL K type When setting the mode switch to "MANU" Connect the GOT to the following teaching connector. When setting the mode switch to "AUTO" Connect the GOT to the following general RS232C port connector.

*1 The teaching connector and general RS232C port connector cannot be used at the same time.

Other than X-SEL K type Set the mode switch to "MANU" or "AUTO" and connect the GOT to the following teaching connector.

CONTROLLER RB

POWER

FUSE

PG1

BK1

PG3

BK3

PG4

BK4

I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4

CODE

HOST

TP

MODE

Mode switch

Teaching connector*1

General RS232C port connector*1

Mode switch

Teaching connector

4 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting

2

Connecting to SSEL, ASEL, PSEL

Parameter setting Enter the following parameters using peripheral software. When setting parameters, set the mode switch of the controller to "MANU".

*1 Indicates only the transmission that can be specified on the GOT side. Specify the transmission speed to match the baud rate of the GOT.

*2 Set it only when a wait time is required before the response and transmission to the GOT request. Normally, the communication is available using default values.

Mode switch Set the mode switch to "AUTO" and connect the GOT to the following teaching connector.

Parameter Parameter Name Set Value I/O parameter 90 Usage of SIO channel 0 opened to user 2: IAI protocol B (fixed)

I/O parameter 91 Station code of SIO channel 0 opened to user 0 to 255

I/O parameter 92*1 Baud rate type of SIO channel 0 opened to user 0: 9600bps 1: 19200bps 2: 38400bps 3: 57600bps 5: 115200bps

I/O parameter 93 Data length of SIO channel 0 opened to user 7bit, 8bit

I/O parameter 94 Stop bit length of SIO channel 0 opened to user 1bit, 2bit

I/O parameter 95 Parity type of SIO channel 0 opened to user 0: None 1: Odd 2: Even

I/O parameter 97 *2 IAI-protocol minimum response delay for SIO channel 0 opened to user 0 to 999(ms)

Other parameter 46 Other setting bit pattern 1 bit0 to 3 = 1 (fixed)

Mode switch

Teaching connector

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting 115

11

Connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON

Axis number setting, Mode select For controllers without the following switches, set from the setting tool (PC software).

Transmission speed setting Set the transmission speed from the setting tool (PC software).

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

Connecting to RCON

Communication setting The communication setting is fixed. The following shows each setting value.

Axis number setting Configure the axis number setting using the engineering tool for RCON. For the setting details, refer to the following. Manual of the IAI robot controller

Switch Setting details Axis number setting rotary switch 0 to 15

Mode selector switch AUTO MANU

Item Range SIO transmission speed*1 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200bps

Default: 38400bps

Item Set value Baud rate 115200bps

Data length 8bit

Stop bit 1bit

Parity None

MANU AUTO

Mode selector switch

Axis number setting rotary switch

6 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting

2

Connecting to ERC2

Axis number setting, Mode select Set from the setting tool (PC software).

Transmission speed setting Set the transmission speed from the setting tool (PC software).

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

Item Range SIO transmission speed*1 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200bps

Default: 38400bps

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting 117

11

Station No.settings Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Direct specification When setting the device, specify the station number of the controller of which data is to be changed.

Indirect specification When setting the device, indirectly specify the station number of the controller of which data is to be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No. specification will be the station No. of the controller.

Model name Specification range Refer to PCON, ACON, SCON 0 to 15 Page 116 Connecting to PCON, ACON, SCON

ERC2 0 to 15 Page 117 Connecting to ERC2

Specification station No. Compatible device Setting range 100 GD10 0 to 15

(If setting a value out of the range above, a timeout error occurs.)101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

GOT

Station No.3

Station No.7

Station No.1

Station No.15

Station No.6

Examples of station number setting

8 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.5 Robot Controller Side Setting

2

2.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 586 IAI equipment ([IAI X-SEL Controller]) Page 611 IAI equipment ([IAI ROBO CYLINDER])

2.7 Precautions

Program control device When Program Execution Command (0), Program Exit Command (2), or Program Restart Command (4) is written to the

program control device (PRG 0), it will be a request for all programs running in the controllers. When unsupported write data is input to the program control device, the following error is displayed in the system alarm. 315: Device writing error. Correct device.

Variable devices The variable number 99 of Integer device and variable number 199 of Real device are special devices used for operations by the X-SEL controller system. Do not use these variables for general purpose.

Command trigger compatible device For the device whose obtained data No.0 is a command trigger, communication with the controller is performed when the

Write(1)/Read(2) is set to the command trigger. When the command trigger and setting value are written in a batch, the communication is performed based on the value set with batch write. When Clear(4) is set to the command trigger, the communication with the controller is not performed and the set value is

initialized. When an unsupported set value is input to the command trigger, the following error is displayed in the system alarm. 315: Device writing error. Correct device.

Device reserved for system use Devices of "Reserved for system use" are devices with indefinite values. Do not write to these devices.

Write to the flash ROM The point data can be written to the flash ROM of the X-SEL controller. When the point data is written to the flash ROM, it is

not cleared even when power supply to the controller is turned off. However, there are limits in the number of writing. For details, refer to the user's manual of X-SEL controller used.

Never turn off the main power supply during the flash ROM write. Doing so may cause the loss of data and malfunction of controllers. For details, refer to the user's manual of X-SEL controller used.

Communication disconnection Writing to the flash ROM disconnects the communication with controllers until the writing is completed. Resetting software restarts the controllers. During this time, the communication with controllers is disconnected.

Station number setting of the IAI robot controller system The robot controller with the station number set with the host address must be included. Page 112 Communication detail settings

2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.6 Settable Device Range 119

12

Connection of the IAI X-SEL K type Note the following precaution when using the controller with the mode switch set to MANU. After powering up the X-SEL, connecting the GOT before the PC software causes the program startup disabled (A1D

alarm) on the X-SEL side.

System area for status (S) devices Access to the system area for status (S) devices Do not access the system area for status (S) devices. If access is attempted to an area that contains the system area, the response from the accessed robot controller differs depending on the model of the controller or the accessed area. For the details, refer to the following. IAI Robot Controller user's Manual

When monitoring multiple status (S) devices The GOT requests for data in 16-bit chunks. If the requested data contains the system area, monitoring may not be performed properly. To monitor multiple status (S) devices, use multiples of 16 to specify the lowest device number. Example) Monitoring S01A1 and S01AF simultaneously When S01A1 is specified as the start device, an error occurs as the specified 16-bit data contains the system area.

When S01A0 is specified as the start device, the target devices can be monitored properly as the specified 16-bit data does not contain the system area.

Status Area name S01A1 (monitoring target) Press program judgement status register (Servo Press) (PPJD)

S01A2

S01A3

S01A4

:

S01AE

S01AF (monitoring target)

S01B0 Reserved for system

Status Area name S01A0 Press program judgement status register (Servo Press) (PPJD)

S01A1 (monitoring target)

S01A2

S01A3

:

S01AD

S01AE

S01AF (monitoring target)

0 2 IAI ROBOT CONTROLLER 2.7 Precautions

3

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT Page 121 Connectable Model List Page 123 System Configuration Page 159 Connection Diagram Page 183 GOT Side Settings Page 186 Control Equipment Side Setting Page 198 Settable Device Range Page 198 Precautions

3.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication Type

Connectable model Refer to

DMC DMC10 RS-232 RS-485

*1

Page 123 Connecting to DMC10

DMC50 RS-485

*2

Page 125 Connecting to DMC50

SDC SDC15 SDC25 SDC26 SDC35 SDC36

RS-232 RS-485

*1

Page 127 Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36

SDC20 SDC21

RS-232 RS-485

*2

Page 129 Connecting to SDC20/21

SDC30 SDC31

RS-232 RS-485

*2

Page 133 Connecting to SDC30/31

SDC40A SDC40B SDC40G

RS-232 RS-485

*2

Page 135 Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G

SDC45 SDC46

RS-232 RS-485

*1

Page 139 Connecting to SDC45/46

CMS CMS RS-232 RS-485

*1

Page 141 Connecting to CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX

CMF CMF015 CMF050

RS-232 RS-485

*2

Page 143 Connecting to CMF015, CMF050

CML CML RS-232 RS-485

*2

Page 147 Connecting to CML, PBC201-VN2

MQV MQV RS-232 RS-485

*1

Page 141 Connecting to CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX

MPC MPC RS-232 RS-485

*1

Page 141 Connecting to CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.1 Connectable Model List 121

12

*1 For GS21, only GS21-W-N supports the RS-485 connection. *2 For the RS-485 connection of GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface.

MVF MVF RS-232 RS-485

*1

Page 141 Connecting to CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX

PBZ PBC201-VN2 RS-232 RS-485

*2

Page 147 Connecting to CML, PBC201-VN2

AUR AUR350C AUR450C

RS-232 RS-485

*1

Page 150 Connecting to AUR350C, AUR450C

RX RX RS-232 RS-485

*1

Page 141 Connecting to CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX

CMC CMC10B RS-232 RS-485

*2

Page 152 Connecting to CMC10B

AHC2001 AHC2001 RS-232 RS-485

*2

Page 154 Connecting to AHC2001

NX NX-D15 NX-D25 NX-D35 NX-DX1 NX-DX2 NX-DY NX-S01 NX-S11 NX-S12 NX-S21

RS-232 RS-485 (MODBUS) *1

Page 158 Connecting to NX series

NX-D15 NX-D25 NX-D35 NX-DX1 NX-DX2 NX-DY NX-S01 NX-S11 NX-S12 NX-S21

Ethernet (MODBUS)

*1

Page 158 Connecting to NX series

Series Model name Clock Communication Type

Connectable model Refer to

2 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.1 Connectable Model List

3

3.2 System Configuration Connecting to DMC10

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperat ure controlle r

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Commun ication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

DMC10 Page 161 RS485 connection diagram 1)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) Up to 15 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

DMC10 DMC10

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 123

12

When connecting directly

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

DMC10 RS-485 Page 169 RS485 connection diagram 12)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

Up to 15 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 162 RS485 connection diagram 3)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Page 164 RS485 connection diagram 5)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 178 RS485 connection diagram 27)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6

Page 175 RS485 connection diagram 21)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

DMC10 DMC10

4 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to DMC50

When using the COM module

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *3 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *4 Not available to GT25-W. *5 Not available to GT2505-V. *6 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *7 Only available to GT2505-V. *8 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection.

Temperature controller

Connection cable COM module*1 GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Connection

diagram number Max. distance

Model name Communication Type

Option device Model

DMC50CX Page 167 RS485 connection diagram 8)

500m*2 DMC50M20X RS-485 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*3

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*5

Up to 8 COM module for 1 GOT. Up to 120 temperature controllers for 1 COM module.

Page 167 RS485 connection diagram 9)

500m DMC50M20X RS-485 - (Built into GOT)

*8

GT15-RS4-9S

*4*5

GT15-RS4-TE

*4*5

Page 179 RS485 connection diagram 28)

500m DMC50M20X RS-485 GT14-RS2T4-9P *6

*7

Page 175 RS485 connection diagram 22)

500m DMC50M20X RS-485 - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL DMC50

Communication driver

COM module

Temperature controller GOT

Connection cable

COM module

Temperature controller

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 125

12

When connecting directly to one temperature controller

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Temperature controller

Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Connection diagram

number Max. distance

Communication Type

Option device Model

DMC50CX Page 168 RS485 connection diagram 10)

500m*1 RS-485 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT

Page 169 RS485 connection diagram 13)

500m RS-485 - (Built into GOT)

*7

Page 168 RS485 connection diagram 11)

500m RS-485 GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 179 RS485 connection diagram 29)

500m RS-485 GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6

Page 175 RS485 connection diagram 23)

500m RS-485 - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL DMC50

Communication driver

Temperature controller

GOT

Connection cable

6 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable

model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

SDC15 SDC25/26 SDC35/36

Page 161 RS485 connection diagram 1)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2- 9P

RS-232 Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOT Interface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36

SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 127

12

When connecting directly

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

SDC15 SDC25/26 SDC35/36

RS-485 Page 162 RS485 connection diagram 3)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 169 RS485 connection diagram 12)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

Page 164 RS485 connection diagram 5)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 178 RS485 connection diagram 27)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6

Page 175 RS485 connection diagram 21)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36

SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36

8 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to SDC20/21

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable model

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

SDC20/21 Page 161 RS485 connection diagram 2)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

SDC20/21 SDC20/21

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 129

13

When connecting directly to one temperature controller

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*1 Model

SDC20/21 RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) Up to 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

SDC20/21 GOT

Connection cable

0 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

When connecting directly to multiple temperature controllers

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in).

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

SDC20/21 RS-485 Page 163 RS485 connection diagram 4)(4-wire)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 170 RS485 connection diagram 14)(2-wire)

Page 165 RS485 connection diagram 6)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

GT15-RS4-9S

*3*4

Page 171 RS485 connection diagram 15)(2-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*8

Page 166 RS485 connection diagram 7)(4-wire)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 172 RS485 connection diagram 16)(2-wire)

Page 180 RS485 connection diagram 30)(4-wire)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6 Page 181 RS485 connection

diagram 31)(2-wire)

Page 176 RS485 connection diagram 24)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

Page 177 RS485 connection diagram 25)(2-wire)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

SDC20/21 SDC20/21 GOT

Connection cable

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 131

13

*6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *8 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

2 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to SDC30/31

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable

model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

SDC30/31 Page 161 RS485 connection diagram 2)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2- 9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

SDC30/31 SDC30/31

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 133

13

When connecting directly

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

SDC30/31 RS-485 Page 163 RS485 connection diagram 4)(4-wire)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOTPage 170 RS485 connection

diagram 14)(2-wire)

Page 165 RS485 connection diagram 6)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

GT15-RS4-9S

*3*4

Page 166 RS485 connection diagram 7)(4-wire)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 172 RS485 connection diagram 16)(2-wire)

Page 180 RS485 connection diagram 30)(4-wire)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6 Page 181 RS485 connection

diagram 31)(2-wire)

Page 176 RS485 connection diagram 24)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

SDC30/31 SDC30/31 GOT

Connection cable

4 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable model

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

SDC40A/40B/40G Page 161 RS485 connection diagram 2)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

SDC40A/ 40B/40G

SDC40A/ 40B/40G

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 135

13

When connecting directly to one temperature controller

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*1 Model

SDC40A/40B/40G RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) Up to 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

SDC40A/ 40B/40G GOT

Connection cable

6 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

When connecting directly to multiple temperature controllers

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in).

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

SDC40A/40B/40G RS-485 Page 163 RS485 connection diagram 4)(4-wire)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 170 RS485 connection diagram 14)(2-wire)

Page 165 RS485 connection diagram 6)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

GT15-RS4-9S

*3*4

Page 171 RS485 connection diagram 15)(2-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*8

Page 166 RS485 connection diagram 7)(4-wire)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 172 RS485 connection diagram 16)(2-wire)

Page 180 RS485 connection diagram 30)(4-wire)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6 Page 181 RS485 connection

diagram 31)(2-wire)

Page 176 RS485 connection diagram 24)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

Page 177 RS485 connection diagram 25)(2-wire)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

SDC40A/ 40B/40G

SDC40A/ 40B/40G

GOT

Connection cable

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 137

13

*6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *8 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

8 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to SDC45/46

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable model

Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Commun ication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

SDC45/46 Page 173 RS485 connection diagram 17)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 139

14

When connecting directly to multiple temperature controllers

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

SDC45/46 RS-485 Page 173 RS485 connection diagram 18)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 31 temperature controller for 1 GOT

Page 174 RS485 connection diagram 19)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 174 RS485 connection diagram 20)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

Page 182 RS485 connection diagram 32)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6

Page 178 RS485 connection diagram 26)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

0 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to CMS, MQV, MPC, MVF, RX

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Control equipment

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable

model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

CMS MQV MPC MVF RX

Page 173 RS485 connection diagram 17)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Up to 31 control equipment for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2- 9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Control equipment

Control equipment

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 141

14

When connecting directly to multiple control equipments

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

CMS MQV MPC MVF RX

RS-485 Page 173 RS485 connection diagram 18)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 1 control equipment for 1 GOT

Page 174 RS485 connection diagram 19)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 174 RS485 connection diagram 20)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

Page 182 RS485 connection diagram 32)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6

Page 178 RS485 connection diagram 26)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

Control equipment

Control equipment GOT

Connection cable

2 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to CMF015, CMF050

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Control equipment

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

CMF015 Page 173 RS485 connection diagram 17)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Up to 31 control equipment for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2- 9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CMF050 Page 161 RS485 connection diagram 2)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Up to 31 control equipment for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2- 9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Control equipment

Control equipment

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 143

14

When connecting directly Connecting to CMF015

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

CMF015 RS-485 Page 173 RS485 connection diagram 18)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 1 control equipment for 1 GOT

Page 174 RS485 connection diagram 19)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 174 RS485 connection diagram 20)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

Page 182 RS485 connection diagram 32)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6

Page 178 RS485 connection diagram 26)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

Control equipment

Control equipment GOT

Connection cable

4 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to CMF050

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V.

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

CMF050 RS-485 Page 163 RS485 connection diagram 4)(4-wire)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 1 control equipment for 1 GOTPage 170 RS485 connection

diagram 14)(2-wire)

Page 165 RS485 connection diagram 6)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

GT15-RS4-9S

*3*4

Page 171 RS485 connection diagram 15)(2-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*8

Page 166 RS485 connection diagram 7)(4-wire)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 172 RS485 connection diagram 16)(2-wire)

Page 180 RS485 connection diagram 30)(4-wire)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6 Page 181 RS485 connection

diagram 31)(2-wire)

Page 176 RS485 connection diagram 24)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

Page 177 RS485 connection diagram 25)(2-wire)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

Control equipment

Control equipment GOT

Connection cable

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 145

14

*7 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *8 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

6 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

Connecting to CML, PBC201-VN2

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Control equipment

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

CML PBC201-VN2

Page 161 RS485 connection diagram 2)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Up to 31 control equipment for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2- 9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Control equipment

Control equipment

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 147

14

When connecting directly

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in).

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

CML PBC201-VN2

RS-485 Page 163 RS485 connection diagram 4)(4-wire)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 1 control equipment for 1 GOTPage 170 RS485 connection

diagram 14)(2-wire)

Page 165 RS485 connection diagram 6)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

GT15-RS4-9S

*3*4

Page 171 RS485 connection diagram 15)(2-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*8

Page 166 RS485 connection diagram 7)(4-wire)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 172 RS485 connection diagram 16)(2-wire)

Page 180 RS485 connection diagram 30)(4-wire)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6 Page 181 RS485 connection

diagram 31)(2-wire)

Page 176 RS485 connection diagram 24)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

Page 177 RS485 connection diagram 25)(2-wire)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

Control equipment

Control equipment GOT

Connection cable

8 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

*6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *8 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 149

15

Connecting to AUR350C, AUR450C

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Control equipment

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

AUR350C AUR450C

Page 161 RS485 connection diagram 1)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) Up to 31 control equipment for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Control equipment

Control equipment

0 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

When connecting directly

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

AUR350C AUR450C

RS-485 Page 162 RS485 connection diagram 3)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 1 control equipment for 1 GOT

Page 164 RS485 connection diagram 5)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 169 RS485 connection diagram 12)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

Page 178 RS485 connection diagram 27)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6

Page 175 RS485 connection diagram 21)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

Control equipment

Control equipment GOT

Connection cable

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 151

15

Connecting to CMC10B

When using the Interface converter

*1 Product manufactured by Azbil Corporation. For details on the product, contact Azbil Corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Control equipment

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

CMC10B Page 161 RS485 connection diagram 2)

500m CMC10L RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Up to 31 control equipment for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2- 9P

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Control equipment

Control equipment

2 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

When connecting directly to multiple control equipments

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection.

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

CMC10B RS-485 Page 163 RS485 connection diagram 4)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2

*4

Up to 1 control equipment for 1 GOT

Page 165 RS485 connection diagram 6)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

GT15-RS4-9S

*3*4

Page 166 RS485 connection diagram 7)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 180 RS485 connection diagram 30)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6

Page 176 RS485 connection diagram 24)

500m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL SDC/DMC

Communication driver

Control equipment

Control equipment GOT

Connection cable

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 153

15

Connecting to AHC2001

When connecting to one temperature controller

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication unit

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

AHC2001 - RS-232 Page 159 RS232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) Up to 1 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

SCU GT15-RS2-9P

*3*4

Page 160 RS232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

AZBIL DMC50

Communication driver

AHC2001 GOT

Connection cable

Communication unit

4 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *8 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

AHC2001 SCU RS-485 Page 163 RS485 connection diagram 4)(4-wire)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2 *4

Up to 1 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 170 RS485 connection diagram 14)(2-wire)

Page 165 RS485 connection diagram 6)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

GT15-RS4-9S

*3*4

Page 171 RS485 connection diagram 15)(2-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*8

Page 166 RS485 connection diagram 7)(4-wire)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 172 RS485 connection diagram 16)(2-wire)

Page 180 RS485 connection diagram 30)(4-wire)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6 Page 181 RS485

connection diagram 31)(2-wire)

Page 176 RS485 connection diagram 24)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

Page 177 RS485 connection diagram 25)(2-wire)

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication unit

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 155

15

When connecting to multiple temperature controllers

*1 Including the cable length of the option devices. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED.For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 Not available to GT25-W. *4 Not available to GT2505-V. *5 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in).

Control equipment Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication unit

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

AHC2001 SCU RS-485 Page 163 RS485 connection diagram 4)(4-wire)

500m*1 FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)*2 *4

Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 170 RS485 connection diagram 14)(2-wire)

Page 165 RS485 connection diagram 6)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*7

GT15-RS4-9S

*3*4

Page 171 RS485 connection diagram 15)(2-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*8

Page 166 RS485 connection diagram 7)(4-wire)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*3*4

Page 172 RS485 connection diagram 16)(2-wire)

Page 180 RS485 connection diagram 30)(4-wire)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *5

*6 Page 181 RS485 connection

diagram 31)(2-wire)

Page 176 RS485 connection diagram 24)(4-wire)

500m - (Built into GOT)

Page 177 RS485 connection diagram 25)(2-wire)

AZBIL DMC50

Communication driver

Communication unit

Connection cable

AHC2001 Communication unitAHC2001 GOT

6 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

*6 Only available to GT2505-V. *7 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection. *8 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration 157

15

Connecting to NX series

Use a MODBUS/RTU or MODBUS/TCP communication driver to connect the GOT to NX series. For the MODBUS/RTU or MODBUS/TCP connection, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer/MODBUS/Peripheral Connection) 5. MODBUS/RTU MASTER CONNECTION 6. MODBUS/TCP MASTER CONNECTION For the valid devices, refer to the following Technical News. List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT2000 Series MODBUS Connection for Overseas (GOT-A-0170)

Communication driver

MODBUS/RTU MODBUS/TCP

8 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.2 System Configuration

3

3.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the control equipment.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1)

*1 For details on the setting method of the TERMINAL mode, refer to the following. Page 188 Connecting to CMC10L

RS232 connection diagram 2)

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on model and optional function model. Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

Signal name Model of temperature controller

SDC20 SDC21 SDC40A, SDC40B, SDC40G AHC2001

(03, 05) (10) (04, 07, 09) CPU SCU

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. SG 5 18 29 61 5 5

SD 17 16 27 60 3 3

RD 18 17 28 59 2 2

GOT side Interface converter(CMC10L)*1

-

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

FG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

8

3

2

7

5

CS

SD

RD

RS

SG

GOT side Temperature controller side

-

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

FG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

SG

SD

RD

*1

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 159

16

RS232 connection diagram 3)

*1 For details on the setting method of the TERMINAL mode, refer to the following. Page 188 Connecting to CMC10L

RS232 connection diagram 4)

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on model and optional function model. Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

AZBIL control equipment side connector Use the connector compatible with the AZBIL control equipment side module. For details, refer to the user's manual of the AZBIL control equipment

Signal name Model of temperature controller

SDC20 SDC21 SDC40A, SDC40B, SDC40G AHC2001

(03, 05) (10) (04, 07, 09) CPU SCU

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. SG 5 18 29 61 5 5

SD 17 16 27 60 3 3

RD 18 17 28 59 2 2

GOT side (terminal block)

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

Interface converter (CMC10L)*1

8

3

2

7

5

CS

SD

RD

RS

SG

Temperature controller side*1

SG

SD

RD

GOT side (terminal block)

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

0 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS-485 cable

Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.

*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *3 Set the terminal resistor to "Disable".

For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following. Page 188 Connecting to CMC10L

RS485 connection diagram 2)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model and optional function model. Refer to the following table.The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals. *3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *4 Since the Interface converter has a built-in terminating resistor, set the terminating resistor of GOT to "Enable".

For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following. Page 188 Connecting to CMC10L

Signal name Model of control equipment

DMC10 SDC15 SDC25/26 SDC35/36

AUR350C AUR450C

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA 4 16 22 DA

DB 5 17 23 DB

SG 6 18 24 SG

Signal name

Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A/ 40B/40G

CMF050 CML

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59 7 14 13

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60 8 15 14

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57 9 12 11

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58 10 13 12

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61 12 16 15

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3 19 3 -

Control equipment side

Control equipment side

Interface converter side*3

(CMC10L)

11

12

13

DA

DB

SG

DA

DB

SG

*2

*1*1

*2

DA

DB

SG

Interface converter side*4

(CMC10L)

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

11

12

13

Control equipment side

Control equipment side

*3*3

*1 *1

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2

DA

DB

SG

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 161

16

RS485 connection diagram 3)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.

*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows. Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

DMC10 SDC15 SDC25/26 SDC35/36

AUR350C AUR450C

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA 4 16 22 DA

DB 5 17 23 DB

SG 6 18 24 SG

GOT side*2 Control equipment

side Control equipment

side

SDA1(TXD1+) SDB1(TXD1-) SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA1(RXD1+) RDB1(RXD1-) RSA(RTS+) RSB(RTS-) CSA(CTS+) CSB(CTS-)

NC SG NC NC

RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-)

NC NC NC NC

DA

DB

SG

1

2

3

6

8

5

7

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

2

3

4

9

11

13

15

17

19

*3 *3

*1 *1

DA DB SG

2 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 4)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model or optional function model. Refer to the following table.The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipmentr

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

GOT side*3 Control equipment

side Control equipment

side

SDA1(TXD1+) SDB1(TXD1-) RDA1(RXD1+) RDB1(RXD1-)

SG RSA(RTS+) RSB(RTS-) CSA(CTS+) CSB(CTS-)

NC NC NC

SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-)

NC NC NC NC

RDA RDB SDA SDB

SG FG

6 8

10 12 2

14 16 18 20 1 3 4 5 7 9

11 13 15 17 19

*4 *4

*1 *1

RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 163

16

RS485 connection diagram 5)

*1 Pin No. of Model of control equipment differs depending on the model.Refer to the following table.

*2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows. Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

DMC10 SDC15 SDC25/26 SDC35/36

AUR350C AUR450C

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA 4 16 22 DA

DB 5 17 23 DB

SG 6 18 24 SG

GOT side*2 Control equipment side

Control equipment side

SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2

SG FG

DA

DB

SG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

*3 *3

*1 *1

DA DB SG

4 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 6)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model or optional function model. Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

For GT27 and GT25 except GT2505-V, set the terminating resistor to Enable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

GOT side*3 Control equipment

side

Control equipment

side

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA CSA RSB CSB FG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

FG

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

-

RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG

*4 *4

*1 *1

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 165

16

RS485 connection diagram 7)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model or optional function model. Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

GOT side*3 Control equipment side

Control equipment

side

SDA SDB RDA CSA SG

RDA RDB RSB CSB FG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

FG

1

6

3

4

5

2

7

8

9

10

RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG

*4 *4

*1 *1

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2

6 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 8)

*1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal. *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

RS485 connection diagram 9)

*1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal. *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

For GT27 and GT25 (except for GT2505-V), set the terminating resistor to enable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

GOT side*2 Temperature controller side terminal for RS-485 port1

Temperature controller side terminal for RS-485 port1

RDA1

RDB1

SDA1

SDB1

SG1

6

8

10

12

2

5

7

14

16

18

20

1

3

4

9

11

13

15

17

19

SDA1(TXD1+)

SDB1(TXD1-)

RDA1(RXD1+)

RDB1(RXD1-)

SG

SDA2(TXD2+)

SDB2(TXD2-)

RSA(RTS+)

RSB(RTS-)

CSA(CTS+)

CSB(CTS-)

NC

NC

NC

RDA2(RXD2+)

RDB2(RXD2-)

NC

NC

NC

NC

6

7

4

5

8

6

7

4

5

8

*3 *3

RDA1

RDB1

SDA1

SDB1

SG1

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W)*1

GOT side*2 Temperature controller side terminal for RS-485 port1

Temperature controller side terminal for RS-485 port1

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA CSA RSB CSB

RDA1 RDB1 SDA1 SDB1

SG1

1 6 2 7 5 3 4 8 9

6 7 4 5 8

6 7 4 5 8

*3 *3

RDA1 RDB1 SDA1 SDB1 SG1

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W)*1

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 167

16

RS485 connection diagram 10)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows. Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

RS485 connection diagram 11)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows. Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

GOT side*1

*2

SG DB DA (Recognition pin)

DMC50

SDA1 (TXD1+) SDB1 (TXD1-)

SG RDA1 (RXD1+) RDB1 (RXD1-) SDA2 (TXD2+) SDB2 (TXD2-) RSA (RTS+) RSB (RTS-) CSA (CTS+) CSB (CTS-)

NC NC NC

RDA2 (RXD2+) RDB2 (RXD2-)

NC NC NC NC

6

8

2

10

12

5

7

14

16

18

20

1

3

4

9

11

13

15

17

19

DA

DB

SG

Recognition pin

Temperature controller side plug RJ-11 for 4-pin modular jack

Fixed side socket pin assign

GOT side*1

*2

Fixed side socket pin assign

SG DB DA (Recognition pin)

DMC50

SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2

SG FG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

DA

DB

SG

Recognition pin

Temperature controller side plug RJ-11 for 4-pin modular jack

8 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 12)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For GT27 and GT25 except GT2505-V, set the terminating resistor to disable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to OPEN. Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

RS485 connection diagram 13)

*1 For GT27 and GT25 (except for GT2505-V), set the terminating resistor to enable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 110 . Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

DMC10 SDC15 SDC25/26 SDC35/36

AUR350C AUR450C

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA 4 16 22 DA

DB 5 17 23 DB

SG 6 18 24 SG

GOT side*2 Control equipment

side Control equipment

side

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA CSA RSB CSB

DA

DB

SG

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

*3 *3

*1 *1

DA DB SG

GOT side*1

*2

Temperature controller side plug RJ-11 for 4-pin modular jack

Fixed side socket pin assign

SG DB DA (Recognition pin)

DMC50

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA CSA RSB CSB

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

DA

DB

SG

Recognition pin

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 169

17

RS485 connection diagram 14)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

Control equipment

side

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

Control equipment side

*4*4

*1 *1

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2

6 8 2 5 7 10 12 14 16 18 20 1 3 4 9 11 13 15 17 19

SDA1(TXD1+) SDB1(TXD1-)

SG SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-)

RDA1(RXD1+) RDB1(RXD1-)

RSA(RTS+) RSB(RTS-) CSA(CTS+) CSB(CTS-)

NC NC NC

RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-)

NC NC NC NC

GOT side*3

0 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 15)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 For GT27 and GT25 (except for GT2505-V), set the terminating resistor to enable.

For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 110 . Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

Control equipment

sideGOT side*3

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

1

2

6

7

5

3

4

8

9

Control equipment side

*4*4

*1 *1

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2

SDA

RDA

SDB

RDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 171

17

RS485 connection diagram 16)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

GOT side*3

SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2

SG FG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Control equipment

side

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

Control equipment side

*4*4

*1 *1

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2

2 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 17)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals. *3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *4 Since the Interface converter has a built-in terminating resistor, set the terminating resistor of GOT to "Enable".

For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following. Page 188 Connecting to CMC10L

RS485 connection diagram 18)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals. *3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC45/46 CMS CMF015

MQV MPC

MVF RX

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC45/46 CMS CMF015

MQV MPC

MVF RX

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

Control equipment sideControl equipment side

Interface converter side*4

(CMC10L)

11

12

13

DA

DB

SG

DA

DB

SG

*3

*1*1

*3

DA

DB

SG

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2

GOT side*4 Control equipment side

SDA1(TXD1+) SDB1(TXD1-) SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA1(RXD1+) RDB1(RXD1-) RSA(RTS+) RSB(RTS-) CSA(CTS+) CSB(CTS-)

NC SG NC NC

RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-)

NC NC NC NC

DA

DB

SG

1

2

3

6

8

5

7

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

2

3

4

9

11

13

15

17

19

*3 *3

*1 *1

DA DB SG

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2 Control equipment side

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 173

17

RS485 connection diagram 19)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals. *3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

RS485 connection diagram 20)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table

*2 For GT27 and GT25 (except for GT2505-V), terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals.

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

For GT27 and GT25 (except for GT2505-V), set the terminating resistor to disable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 110 . Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC45/46 CMS CMF015

MQV MPC

MVF RX

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC45/46 CMS CMF015

MQV MPC

MVF RX

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

GOT side*4 Control equipment side

Control equipment

side

SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2

SG FG

DA

DB

SG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

*3 *3

*1 *1

DA DB SG

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA CSA RSB CSB

DA

DB

SG

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

*3 *3

*1 *1

DA DB SG

GOT side*4 Control equipment side

Terminating resistor(150 1/2W)*2 Control equipment side

4 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 21)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Set the terminating resistor setting switch to OPEN. Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *4 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS485 connection diagram 22)

*1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal. *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "330". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *4 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS485 connection diagram 23)

*1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "110". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *3 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

Signal name Model of control equipment

DMC10 SDC15 SDC25/26 SDC35/36

AUR350C AUR450C

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA 4 16 22 DA

DB 5 17 23 DB

SG 6 18 24 SG

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA RSB CSA CSB*4

*4

*4

*4

GOT side*2 Control equipment side Control equipment side

DA

DB

SG

*3 *3

*1 *1

DA DB SG

GOT side*2

Temperature controller side terminal for RS-485 port1

Temperature controller side terminal for RS-485 port1

RDA1 RDB1 SDA1 SDB1

SG1

6 7 4 5 8

6 7 4 5 8

*3 *3

RDA1 RDB1 SDA1 SDB1 SG1

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W)*1

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA RSB CSA CSB *4

*4 *4 *4

GOT side*1

*2

Temperature controller sideplug RJ-11 for 4-pin

modular jack

Fixed side socket pin assign DMC50

DA

DB

SG

Recognition pin

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA RSB CSA CSB*3

*3

*3

*3

SG DB DA (Recognition pin)

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 175

17

RS485 connection diagram 24)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model and optional function model. Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "330". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *5 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

GOT side*3 Control equipment side Control equipment side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

FG

RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG

*4 *4

*1 *1

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W)*2

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA RSB CSA CSB*5

*5

*5

*5

6 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 25)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "110".

Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors *4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *5 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB*5

*5

*5

*5

Control equipment sideGOT side*3

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

Control equipment side

*4*4

*1 *1

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W)*2

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 177

17

RS485 connection diagram 26)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals. *3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows.

Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "110". Page 182 Connecting terminating resistors

*5 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

RS485 connection diagram 27)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below. 2-wire/4-wire: 2-wire (1Pair) Terminating resistor: OPEN Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC45/46 CMS CMF015

MQV MPC

MVF RX

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

DMC10 SDC15 SDC25/26 SDC35/36

AUR350C AUR450C

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA 4 16 22 DA

DB 5 17 23 DB

SG 6 18 24 SG

GOT side*4 Control equipment side

DA

DB

SG

*3 *3

*1 Control equipment side*1

DA DB SG

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W)*2

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

RSA RSB CSA CSB

*5

*5

*5

*5

GOT side *2 Control equipment side *1 Control equipment side *1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

DA

DB

SG

*3 *3

DA DB SG

8 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 28)

*1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal. *2 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below.

2-wire/4-wire: 4-wire (2Pair) Terminating resistor: 330 Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

*3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

RS485 connection diagram 29)

*1 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below. 2-wire/4-wire: 2-wire (1Pair) Terminating resistor: 110 Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

*2 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

GOT side *2 Temperature controller side

terminal for RS-485 port1 Temperature controller side

terminal for RS-485 port1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RDA1

RDB1

SDA1

SDB1

SG1

RDA1

RDB1

SDA1

SDB1

SG1

*3 *3

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W) *1

6

7

4

5

8

6

7

4

5

8

GOT side *1

*2

Temperature controller side plug RJ-11 for 4-pin modular jack

Fixed side socket pin assign

SG DB DA (Recognition pin)

DMC50

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

DA

DB

SG

Recognition pin

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 179

18

RS485 connection diagram 30)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model and optional function model. Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below.

2-wire/4-wire: 4-wire (2Pair) Terminating resistor: 330 Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

GOT side *3 Control equipment side *1 Control equipment side *1

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

FG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

FG

*4 *4

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W)*2

0 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

RS485 connection diagram 31)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on model and optional function model. Refer to the following table. The numbers in ( ) of the following table correspond to optional function models.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a control equipment which will be a terminal. *3 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below.

2-wire/4-wire: 2-wire (1Pair) Terminating resistor: 110 Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

*4 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line.

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A/40B/40G

(02, 04) (09) (03, 06, 08) (040, 041) (045) (446, 546)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 17 18 27 18 18 27 59

RDB 18 19 28 19 19 28 60

SDA 15 16 25 16 16 25 57

SDB 16 17 26 17 17 26 58

SG 5 5 29 5 5 29 61

FG 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3

Signal name Model of control equipment

CMF050 CML

PBC201-VN2 CMC10B AHC2001

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. RDA 7 14 13 3

RDB 8 15 14 2

SDA 9 12 11 5

SDB 10 13 12 4

SG 12 16 15 1

FG 19 3 - -

Control equipment side *1GOT side *3

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

RDA

SDA

RDB

SDB

SG

FG

Control equipment side *1

*4*4

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W) *2

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram 181

18

RS485 connection diagram 32)

*1 Pin No. of control equipment differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for an Interface converter and a control equipment which will be terminals. *3 Connect FG grounding to the single-sided end of a cable shield line. *4 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below.

2-wire/4-wire: 2-wire (1Pair) Terminating resistor: OPEN Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-485 cable must be 500m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

AZBIL control equipment side connector Use the connector compatible with the AZBIL control equipment side module. For details, refer to the user's manual of the AZBIL control equipment.

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side Set the terminating resistor by operating the terminating resistor setting switch. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

AZBIL control equipment side When connecting a AZBIL control equipment to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected. Page 186 Control Equipment Side Setting

Signal name Model of control equipment

SDC45/46 CMS CMF015

MQV MPC

MVF RX

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. DA C10 5 7 1 1

DB C11 6 8 2 2

SG C12 10 9 7 3

Terminating resistor (150 1/2W) *2

GOT side *4 Control equipment side *1 Control equipment side *1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

DA

DB

SG

*3 *3

DA DB SG

2 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.3 Connection Diagram

3

3.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [Azbil] [Controller Type] When connecting to DMC50 or AHC2001: [Azbil DMC50] When connecting to models other than the above: [Azbil SDC/DMC] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 184 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.4 GOT Side Settings 183

18

Communication detail settings

*1 Do not specify "0". *2 Format is ignored when connecting to DMC50. *3 Host Address is ignored when connecting to DMC10 or SDC. *4 Host Address is valid when connecting to DMC50.

Devices to be the target of Host Address setting differ depending on the system configuration. Specify the station No. of the COM module. Specify the station No. of the temperature controller.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with

the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bits)

7bits/8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit)

1bit/2bits

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Host Address*3*4 Specify the host address (station No. of the GOT to which the temperature controller is connected) in the connected network. (Default: 1)

1 to 15

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT.*1

(Default: 10ms)

0 to 300ms

Format*2 Select the communication format. (Default: 1) format 1: only continuous access format 2: continuous and random access

1/2

4 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.4 GOT Side Settings

3

Format setting The compatible format of control equipment differs depending on model.

For the continuous access and random access of the control equipment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the AZBIL control equipment Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Model name Compatible format

SDC20/21, SDC30/31, SDC40A/40B/40G, CMS, CMF, CML, MQV, MPC, MVF, PBC201-VN2, RX

Format 1 only

DMC10, SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36, SDC45/46, AUR350C, AUR450C, CMC10B

Format 1 or Format 2

.dilavni si gnittes tamrof ehT1002CHA ,05CMD

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.4 GOT Side Settings 185

18

3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting

AZBIL control equipment For details of AZBIL control equipment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the AZBIL control equipment

Connecting to DMC10

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package (SLP-D10) of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Set to CPL. *3 Do not set to "0". *4 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Model name Refer to Control equipment DMC10 Page 186 Connecting to DMC10

SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36 Page 187 Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36

SDC20/21 Page 188 Connecting to SDC20/21, SDC30/31

SDC30/31 Page 188 Connecting to SDC20/21, SDC30/31

SDC40A/40B/40G Page 187 Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G

DMC50 Page 190 Connecting to DMC50

SDC45/46 Page 190 Connecting to SDC45/46

CMS, CMF015 Page 191 Connecting to CMS, CMF015

CML, CMF050 Page 191 Connecting to CML, CMF050

MQV Page 191 Connecting to MQV

MPC Page 192 Connecting to MPC

PBC201-VN2 Page 192 Connecting to PBC201-VN2

MVF Page 192 Connecting to MVF

AUR350C, AUR450C Page 194 Connecting to AUR350C, AUR450C

RX Page 195 Connecting to RX

CMC10B Page 195 Connecting to CMC10B

AHC2001 CPU Page 196 Connecting to AHC2001 CPU

AHC2001 SCU Page 196 Connecting to AHC2001 SCU

Interface converter CMC10L Page 188 Connecting to CMC10L

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Communication mode*2 CPL

Data bit 8bits

Parity bit*1 Even, none

Stop bit 2bits

Communication minimum response time 1ms, 10ms, 100ms, 200ms

Station address*3*4 0 to F

6 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting

3

Station address setting Set the station address using the rotary switch for the station address.

Connecting to SDC40A/40B/40G

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller.

*1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Connecting to SDC15, SDC25/26 or SDC35/36

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key or Smart Loader Package (SLP-C35) of the temperature controller.

*1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. *2 Set to CPL. *3 Do not set to "0". *4 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps

Data Bit 8bits

Parity bit*1 Even, none

Stop bit 1bit, 2bits

Station address*2*3 0 to 127

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Communication mode*2 CPL

Data bit*1 7bits, 8bits

Parity bit*1 Odd, even, none

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Communication minimum response time 1 to 250ms

Station address*3*4 0 to 127

Rotary switch for the station address

Front of the temperature controller body

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting 187

18

Connecting to SDC20/21, SDC30/31

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller.

*1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Connecting to CMC10L

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the DIP switch of the Interface converter

*1 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side. *2 The sum of data length, parity bit and stop bit

Settings by switch

Setting DIP switches Transmission speed settings

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps

Data bit 8bits

Parity bit Disable

Stop bit 2bits

Station address*2*3 0 to 127

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Frame length*2 9 to 15bits

Transmission speed (bps) Switch No.

1 2 3 9600 ON OFF ON

19200 OFF ON ON

38400 ON ON ON

DIP switch

Mode selector switch

Front view of CMC10L body Rear view of CMC10L body

Set these switches

8 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting

3

Frame length settings

Connecting terminating resistors

Mode selector switch settings Set the switch to TERMINAL.

Frame length Switch No.

4 5 6 8bits OFF OFF OFF

9bits ON OFF OFF

10bits OFF ON OFF

11bits ON ON OFF

12bits OFF OFF ON

13bits ON OFF ON

14bits OFF ON ON

15bits ON ON ON

Terminating resistor Switch No.

8 Enable ON

Disable OFF

Set these switches

Set these switches

TE R

M IN

A L

(C R

O S

S )

M O

D E

M (S

TR A

IG H

T)

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting 189

19

Connecting to DMC50

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package (SLP-D50/SLP-H21)of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Set the module address using the rotary switch for module address. *3 Do not set to "0". *4 Select the module address without overlapping with that of other units.

Module address setting Set the module address using the rotary switch for module address.

Connecting to SDC45/46

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package (SLP-C45) of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Set to CPL. *3 Do not set to "0". *4 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units. *5 When using the interface converter CMC10L, set the communication minimum response time to 3ms or more.

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Communication mode CPL

Data bit 8bits (fixed)

Parity bit Even (fixed)

Stop bit 1bit (fixed)

Module address*2*3*4 0 to F

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Communication mode*2 CPL

Data bit 7bits, 8bits

Parity bit*1 Odd, even, none

Stop bit 1bit, 2bits

Communication minimum response time*5 1 to 250ms

Station address*3*4 0 to 120

Rotary switch for the module address

012345678 9A

BCDEF

0 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting

3

Connecting to CMS, CMF015

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the control equipment.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Connecting to CML, CMF050

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the control equipment.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Connecting to MQV

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the control equipment.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps

Communication condition selection 0: 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

1: 8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2

Station address*2*3 0 to 99

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps

Communication condition selection*1 00: 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

01: 8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2

Station address*2*3 0 to 7F

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Communication condition selection*1 00: 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

01: 8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2

Station address*2*3 0 to 127

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting 191

19

Connecting to MPC

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the control equipment.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Connecting to PBC201-VN2

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the control equipment.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Connecting to MVF

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the switch of the control equipment.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Communication condition selection*1 0: 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

1: 8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2

Station address*2*3 0 to 127

Item Set value Communication protocol CPL

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bps

Communication condition selection*1

(Fixed 8-bit data length) 0:Even parity, Stop bit 1

1:Odd parity, Stop bit 1

2:Non parity, Stop bit 2

Station address*2*3 0 to 126

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Communication condition selection*1 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2

Station address*2*3 0 to F

2 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting

3

Settings by switch

Transmission speed settings Set the communication condition switch.

Communication condition selection Set the communication condition switch.

Station address setting Set the station address switch.

Transmission speed (bps) Switch No.

1 2 3 9600 ON ON OFF

19200 ON OFF OFF

Communication condition Switch No.

4 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1 OFF

8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2 ON

Communication condition switch

Display section

Station No. setting switch

Station No. setting switch

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting 193

19

Connecting to AUR350C, AUR450C

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package (SLP-A35, SLP-A45) of the control equipment.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Station address setting Set the station address switch.

For AUR350C

For AUR450C

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Communication condition selection*1 8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2

Station address*2*3 0 to F

Station No. setting switch

Station No. setting switch

4 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting

3

Connecting to RX

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package (SLP-RX) of the control equipment.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Connecting to CMC10B

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package (SLP-CM1) of the control equipment.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Do not set to "0". *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units.

Station address setting Set the station address switch.

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps ,38400bps

Communication condition selection*1 Even parity stop 1 (8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1)

Even parity stop 2 (8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 2)

Odd parity stop 1 (8-bit data length, Odd parity, Stop bit 1)

Odd parity stop 2 (8-bit data length, Odd parity, Stop bit 2)

Station address*2*3 1 to 32

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Communication format*1 0:8-bit data length, Even parity, Stop bit 1

1:8-bit data length, Non parity, Stop bit 2

Station address*2*3 0 to 99

Station No. setting switch

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting 195

19

Connecting to AHC2001 CPU

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package (SLP-D50/SLP-H21)of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Set this item to 1: CPL. *3 Select the station address without overlapping with that of other units. *4 The station address for AHC2001 ranges from 1 to 127. However, use station address from 1 to 15, which are the range for DMC50.

Connecting to AHC2001 SCU

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the Smart Loader Package (SLP-D50/SLP-H21)of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Set this item to 0: Half duplex. *3 Set this item to 2: CPL.

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps

Communication mode*2 0: MODBUS 1: CPL

Data bit 8bits (fixed)

Parity bit Even (fixed)

Stop bit 1bit (fixed)

Station address*3 1 to 15*4

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Data bit*1 7bits, 8bits

Parity bit*1 0: None, 1:Even, 2: Odd

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Half duplex/Full duplex*2 0: Half duplex, 1: Full duplex

Space sending 0 (fixed)

Protocol setup*3 1 to 30

6 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting

3

Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Direct specification When setting the device, specify the station number of the control equipment of which data is to be changed.

*1 The station number for AHC2001 ranges from 1 to 127. However, use station numbers from 1 to 15, which are the range for DMC50.

Indirect specification When setting the device, indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from the following table on GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No. specification will be the station No. of the control equipment.

*1 The station number for AHC2001 ranges from 1 to 127. However, use station numbers from 1 to 15, which are the range for DMC50.

Model name Specification range SDC40A/40B/40G, SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36, SDC20/21, SDC30/31, CML, CMF050, MQV, MPC 1 to 127

PBC201-VN2 1 to 126

SDC45/46 1 to 120

CMS, CMF015, CMC10B 1 to 99

RX 1 to 32

DMC10, DMC50, MVF, AUR350C, AUR450C, AHC2001*1 1 to 15

Specification station No. Compatible device

Setting range

DMC50 AHC2001

Other than DMC50

100 200 GD10 1 to 127: For SDC40A/40B/40G, SDC15, SDC25/26, SDC35/36, SDC20/21, SDC30/31, CML, CMF050, MQV, MPC 1 to 126: PBC201-VN2 1 to 120: SDC45/46 1 to 99: CMS, CMF015, CMC10B 1 to 32: RX 1 to 15: DMC10, DMC50, MVF, AUR350C, AUR450C, AHC2001*1

For the setting other than the above, error (dedicated device is out of range) will occur.

101 201 GD11

102 202 GD12

103 203 GD13

104 204 GD14

105 205 GD15

106 206 GD16

107 207 GD17

108 208 GD18

109 209 GD19

110 210 GD20

111 211 GD21

112 212 GD22

113 213 GD23

114 214 GD24

115 215 GD25

Station No.3

GOT

Station No.10

Station No.1

Station No.15

Station No.6

Examples of station number setting

3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.5 Control Equipment Side Setting 197

19

3.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 621 AZBIL equipment ([Azbil SDC/DMC]) Page 623 AZBIL equipment ([Azbil DMC50])

3.7 Precautions

Station number setting of the temperature controller system When connecting to DMC10 or SDC Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No.1 station. When connecting to DMC50 or AHC2001 A COM module or temperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included. Page 184 Communication detail settings

GOT clock control Since the control equipment does not have a clock function, the settings of "time adjusting" or "time broad cast" by GOT clock control will be disabled.

Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device. For example, the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment. For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

When DMC50/AHC2001 and DMC10/SDC are mixed GOT does not support connections with DMC50/AHC2001 and DMC10/SDC mixed.

Station number range for AHC2001 The station number for AHC2001 ranges from 1 to 127. However, use station numbers from 1 to 15, which are the range for DMC50.

Device range for AHC2001 The GOT only supports some devices for the AHC2001. Use the devices within the device range for the DMC50.

8 3 AZBIL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 3.6 Settable Device Range

4

4 OMRON PLC Page 199 Connectable Model List Page 202 Serial Connection Page 252 Ethernet Connection Page 265 Settable Device Range

4.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 The CQM1-CPU11 is unable to communicate with GOT since the CQM1-CPU11 has no RS-232C interface. *2 The C200HE-CPU11 does not support communication board.

Use a host Link unit. *3 Some models do not have a clock function. *4 The memory cassette equipped with a clock is required. *5 The EM device of the CQM-CPU61 cannot be monitored. *6 To use the C200H-CPU21/CPU22/CPU23, the memory cassette equipped with a clock is required.

The C200H-CPU01/CPU02/CPU03 does not support the clock function.

Series Model name Clock Communicati on Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

SYSMAC CPM CPM1 RS-232 Page 202 Connecting to CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, or CQM1CPM1A

CPM2A

CPM2C *3

SYSMAC CQM1 CQM1*1 *4 RS-232 Page 202 Connecting to CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, or CQM1

SYSMAC CQM1H CQM1H *4*5 RS-232 RS-422

Page 205 Connecting to CQM1H

SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1H RS-232 RS-422

Page 208 Connecting to CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H, or CJ2MCJ1G

CJ1M

SYSMAC CJ2 CJ2H RS-232 RS-422

Page 208 Connecting to CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H, or CJ2MCJ2M*9

SYSMAC CP1 CP1H RS-232 RS-422

Page 213 Connecting to CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E-E, CP2E-S, or CP2E-NCP1L

CP1E(N type)*8

SYSMAC C200HS C200HS RS-232 RS-422

Page 218 Connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG, or C200HESYSMAC C200H C200H *6

SYSMAC C200HX RS-232 RS-422

Page 218 Connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG, or C200HEC200HG

C200HE*2 *7

SYSMAC CS1 CS1H RS-232 RS-422

Page 221 Connecting to CS1H, CS1G, or CS1D

CS1G

CS1D

SYSMAC CP2 CP2E-E RS-232 Page 213 Connecting to CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E-E, CP2E-S, or CP2E-NCP2E-S

CP2E-N RS-232 RS-422

SYSMAC C1000H C1000H RS-232 RS-422

Page 224 Connecting to C1000H, C2000H

SYSMAC C2000H C2000H

SYSMAC CVM1/CV CV500*10 RS-232 RS-422

Page 225 Connecting to CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1CV1000*10

CV2000*10

CVM1*10 *3

4 OMRON PLC 4.1 Connectable Model List 199

20

*7 The C200HE-CPU11 does not support the clock function. *8 Only the direct CPU connection (serial) is available for CP1E (N type) CPU module with 20 or less I/O points. *9 The direct CPU connection (serial) is available for CJ2M-CPU1 only. *10 Use the CPU module Ver. V1 or later.

0 4 OMRON PLC 4.1 Connectable Model List

4

*1 Not compatible with the redundant Ethernet. *2 The time setting function of the GOT is supported.

Series Model name Clock Communicati on Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1H Ethernet

*1

Page 252 Connecting to SYSMAC CJ1, CJ2, CS1, or CP2 seriesCJ1G

CJ1M

SYSMAC CJ2 CJ2H

CJ2M

SYSMAC CS1 CS1H

CS1G

CS1D

SYSMAC CP2 CP2E-N Ethernet

NJ NJ501-1500 NJ501-1400 NJ501-1300 NJ501-1520 NJ501-1420 NJ501-1320 NJ501-1340

*2 Ethernet Page 254 Connecting to NJ or NX series

NJ301-1200 NJ301-1100

NJ101-1000 NJ101-9000 NJ101-1020 NJ101-9020

NX NX1P2-1140DT NX1P2-1140DT1 NX1P2-1040DT NX1P2-1040DT1 NX1P2-9024DT NX1P2-9024DT1

NX701-1700 NX701-1600

NX102-1200 NX102-1100 NX102-1000 NX102-9000

4 OMRON PLC 4.1 Connectable Model List 201

20

4.2 Serial Connection Connecting to CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, or CQM1

When connecting to PLC or RS-232C

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

RS-232C adapter*1 Communicat ion Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

CPM2A CQM1

- RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m -(Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m -(Built into GOT)

CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C

CPM1-CIF01 RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m -(Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 232C adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m -(Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

RS232C adapter

CPM1,CPM1A CPM2A,CPM2C CQM1

GOT

Connection cable

2 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

CPM2C CPM2C-CIF01-V1 RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m -(Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 232C adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m -(Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

RS-232C adapter*1 Communicat ion Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 203

20

When connecting to OMRON connection cable

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

OMRON connection cable*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

CPM1A CQM1-CIF01 RS-232 GT09-C30R20102-25S(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CPM2C CPM2C-CN111 RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

OMRON connection cableCPM1A GOT

Connection cable

4 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Connecting to CQM1H

When connecting to PLC or serial communication board

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication board*1

Communicatio n Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

CQM 1H - RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CQM1H-SCB41 RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

Serial communication board

CQM1H GOT

Connection cable

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 205

20

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

CQM 1H CQM1H-SCB41 RS-422 GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 serial communication board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

200m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication board*1

Communicatio n Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

6 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

When connecting to OMRON connection cable

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

OMRON connection cable*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

CQM 1H CQM1-CIF02 RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

OMRON connection cableCQM1H GOT

Connection cable

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 207

20

Connecting to CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M, CJ2H, or CJ2M

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication module*1, RS-422A converter*1, option board*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CJ2H

- RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1

RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

CJ1H, CJ1G CJ1M, CJ2H CJ2M

GOT

Connection cable

Serial communication module,RS-422A converter, option board

8 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M CJ2H

CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1

RS-422 GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

200m - (Built into GOT)

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m) GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m) GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

50m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 422A converter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

50m - (Built into GOT)

CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M

CJ1W-SCU21 CJ1W-SCU41

RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for each port of a serial communication module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication module*1, RS-422A converter*1, option board*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 209

21

CJ1H CJ1G CJ1M

CJ1W-SCU41 RS-422 GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for each port of a serial communication module

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

200m - (Built into GOT)

CJ2M-CPU1 - RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m) GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m) GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

50m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 422A converter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

50m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication module*1, RS-422A converter*1, option board*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

0 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

CJ2M-CPU1 CJ2M-CPU3

CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1

RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for each port of a serial communication module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CJ2M-CPU1 CJ2M-CPU3

CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1

RS-422 GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for each port of a serial communication module

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

200m - (Built into GOT)

CJ2M-CPU3 CP1W-CIF01 RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 232C option board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication module*1, RS-422A converter*1, option board*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 211

21

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

CJ2M-CPU3 CP1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m) GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m) GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

50m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 422A/ 485 option board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

50m - (Built into GOT)

CJ2M-CPU3 CP1W-CIF12 CP1W-CIF12-V1

RS-422 GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m) GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m) GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 422A/ 485 option board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

200m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication module*1, RS-422A converter*1, option board*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

2 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Connecting to CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E-E, CP2E-S, or CP2E-N

When connecting a PLC or option board

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Option board*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

CP1E - RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CP2E-E CP2E-S

- RS-232 RS-232 connection diagram 7)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 8)

15m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

Option board GOT

Connection cable

CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E-E, CP2E-S, CP2E-N

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 213

21

CP1H CP1L CP1E

CP1W-CIF01 RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C option board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CP1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT09-C100R40103- 5T(10m) GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m GT09-C300R40103- 5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

50m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 422A/485 option board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

50m - (Built into GOT)

CP1W-CIF12 CP1W-CIF12-V1

RS-422 GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT09-C100R40103- 5T(10m) GT09-C200R40103- 5T(20m) GT09-C300R40103- 5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

50m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 422A/485 option board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

50m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Option board*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

4 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

CP2E-N CP1W-CIF01 RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS-232C option board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CP2W-CIFD1 RS-232 RS-232 connection diagram 9)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 232C&RS-232C option board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *2

RS-232 connection diagram 10)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CP2W-CIFD2 RS-232 RS-232 connection diagram 9)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 232C&RS-485 option board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *2

RS-232 connection diagram 10)

15m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Option board*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 215

21

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

CP2E-N CP1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT09-C100R40103- 5T(10m) GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m GT09-C300R40103- 5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

50m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 422A/485 option board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

50m - (Built into GOT)

CP1W-CIF12-V1 RS-422 GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT09-C100R40103- 5T(10m) GT09-C200R40103- 5T(20m) GT09-C300R40103- 5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

50m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 422A/485 option board

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

50m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Option board*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

6 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

When connecting to serial communication module

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

CJ unit adapter*1

Serial communication module*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

CP1H CP1W- EXT01

CJ1W-SCU21 CJ1W-SCU41 CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1

RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for each port of a serial communication module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CJ1W-SCU41 CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1

RS-422 GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

200m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

CJ Unit Adapter

Serial communication module

CP1H GOT

Connection cable

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 217

21

Connecting to C200HS, C200H, C200HX, C200HG, or C200HE

When connecting to PLC or rack type host link unit

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Rack type host link unit*1

Communicat ion Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

C200HX C200HG C200HE

- RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

C200HS C200H C200HX C200HG C200HE

C200H-LK201-V1 RS-232 GT09-C30R20103-25P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 rack type host link unit

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

Rack type host link unit

C200HS,C200H, C200HX,C200HG, C200HE

GOT

Connection cable

8 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

C200HS C200H C200HX C200HG C200HE

C200H-LK202-V1 RS-422 GT09-C30R40102-9P(3m) GT09-C100R40102-9P(10m) GT09-C200R40102-9P(20m) GT09-C300R40102-9P(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

200m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 rack type host link unit

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

200m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Rack type host link unit*1

Communicat ion Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 219

22

When connecting to a communication board

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 The communication board cannot be mounted to the C2000HE-CPU11.

Use a host Link unit. *3 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication board*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*4 Model

C200HX C200HG C200HE*2

C200HW-COM02(-V1) C200HW-COM05(-V1) C200HW-COM06(-V1)

RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for each port of a communication board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*3

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

C200HW-COM03(-V1) C200HW-COM06(-V1)

RS-422 GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

200m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

Communication board

C200HX C200HG C200HE

GOT

Connection cable

0 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Connecting to CS1H, CS1G, or CS1D

When connecting to a PLC or a serial communication module

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication module*1

/RS-422A converter

Communicat ion Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

CS1H CS1G CS1D

- RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m -(Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m -(Built into GOT)

CS1W-SCU21 CS1W-SCU21-V1

RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m -(Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m -(Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

Serial communication module /RS-422 converter

CS1H CS1G CS1D

GOT

Connection cable

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 221

22

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

CS1H CS1G CS1D

CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422 GT09-C30R40103-5T(3m) GT09-C100R40103-5T(10m) GT09-C200R40103-5T(20m) GT09-C300R40103-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

50m -(Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 RS- 422A converter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

50m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication module*1

/RS-422A converter

Communicat ion Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

2 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

When connecting to a serial communication board

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication board*1

Communicat ion Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

CS1H CS1G CS1D

CS1W-SCB21 CS1W-SCB41 CS1W-SCB21-V1 CS1W-SCB41-V1

RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for each port of a serial communication board

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

CS1W-SCB41 CS1W-SCB41-V1

RS-422 GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

200m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

Serial communication board

CS1H CS1G CS1D

GOT

Connection cable

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 223

22

Connecting to C1000H, C2000H

*1 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Rack type host link unit*1

Communicat ion Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

C1000H C2000H

C500-LK201-V1 RS-232 GT09-C30R20103-25P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 rack type host link unit

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

RS-422 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

200m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

Rack type host link unit

C1000H C2000H GOT

Connection cable

4 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Connecting to CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1

*1 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1

RS-232 GT09-C30R20101-9P(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*1

RS-232 connection diagram 4) 15m - (Built into GOT)

RS-422 GT09-C30R40101-9P(3m) GT09-C100R40101-9P(10m) GT09-C200R40101-9P(20m) GT09-C300R40101-9P(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 1)

200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 5) 200m - (Built into GOT)

OMRON SYSMAC

Communication driver

CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1

GOT

Connection cable

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 225

22

Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

GOT side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

OMRON PLC side

1

2

3

4

9

5

6

7

8

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

FG

SD

RD

RS

SG

CS

-

FR

ER

GOT side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

OMRON PLC side

8

3

2

20

7

6

4

5

22

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

-

RD

SD

ER

SG

DR

RS

CS

-

GOT side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

OMRON PLC side

1

2

3

4

7

5

6

8

20

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

FG

SD

RD

RS

SG

CS

-

-

ER

6 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

GOT side (terminal block)

3

2

1

4

9

5

6

7

8

OMRON PLC side

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD

SD

FG

RS

SG

CS

-

FR

ER

GOT side (terminal block) OMRON PLC side

2

3

1

4

7

5

6

20

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

SD

RD

-

RS

SG

CS

DR

ER

GOT side (terminal block) OMRON PLC side

3

2

1

4

7

5

6

8

20

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD

SD

FG

RS

SG

CS

-

-

ER

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 227

22

RS-232 connection diagram 7)

RS-232 connection diagram 8)

RS-232 connection diagram 9)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

5

4

6

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

SD

RD

RS

SG

CS

FG

GOT side OMRON PLC side

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

2

1

3

4

5

6

RD

SD

RS

CS

SG

FG

GOT side (terminal block) OMRON PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

4

3

5

6

7

8

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

SD

RD

FG

SG

GOT side OMRON PLC side

8 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

RS-232 connection diagram 10)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications OMRON PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON PLC. For details, refer to the OMRON PLC user's manual.

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

2

1

5

4

3

6

7

8

RD

SD

FG

SG

GOT side (terminal block) OMRON PLC side

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 229

23

RS-422 cable

Differences in polarity between GOT and OMRON PLCs The polarity of poles A and B in signal names is reversed between GOT and OMRON PLCs. Connect a cable according to the following connection diagrams.

Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1)

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

GOT side OMRON PLC side

1

6

2

7

3

4

5

8

9

-

8

6

2

1

4

5

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

RSA

CSA

SG

RSB

CSB

FG

RDB

RDA

SDB

SDA

RS

CS

GOT side OMRON PLC side

-

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

-

1

6

5

9

3

FG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

FG

RDB

RDA

SDB

SDA

SG

GOT side OMRON PLC side

1

6

2

7

3

4

5

8

9

-

8

6

2

1

4

5

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

RSA

CSA

SG

RSB

CSB

FG

RDB

RDA

SDB

SDA

RS

CS

0 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

RS-422 connection diagram 5)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD.

GOT side OMRON PLC side

1

6

7

2

3

4

5

8

9

-

SDA

SDB

RDB

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

RSB

CSB

FG

RDB+

RDA-

SDA-

SDB+

FG

GOT side (terminal block) OMRON PLC side

8

6

2

1

4

5

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDB

RDA

SDB

SDA

RS

CS

*1

*1

*1

*1

GOT side (terminal block) OMRON PLC side

1

6

5

9

3

-

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDB

RDA

SDB

SDA

SG

FG

*1

*1

*1

*1

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 231

23

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. RS-422 connection diagram 8)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The distance between the GOT and the PLC of connection diagram 1), 2) and 3) must be 200 m or less. The length of the RS-422 connection diagram 4) must be 50m or less. GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications OMRON PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON PLC. For details, refer to the OMRON PLC user's manual.

Setting terminating resistors GOT side For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". For GT2505-V, GT21 Set the terminating resistor selector to "330". For GS21 Since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT OMRON PLC side When connecting an OMRON PLC to a GOT, a terminating resistor must be set to the OMRON PLC. OMRON PLC user's Manual

GOT side (terminal block) OMRON PLC side

8

6

2

1

4

5

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDB

RDA

SDB

SDA

RS

CS

*1

*1

*1

*1

GOT side (terminal block) OMRON PLC side

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDB+

RDA-

SDB+

SDA-

FG

*1

*1

*1

*1

2 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

GOT Side Settings

Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [OMRON] [Controller Type]: [OMRON SYSMAC] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 234 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 233

23

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps)

4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 7bits)

7bit (fixed)

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 2bits)

2bit (fixed)

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

Even (fixed)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Host Address Specify the host address (station No. of the PLC to which the GOT is connected) in the network of the GOT. (Default: 0)

0 to 31

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

4 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

PLC Side Setting

OMRON PLC For details of OMRON PLCs, refer to the following manuals. OMRON PLC user's Manual

Model name Refer to PLC CPU CPM2A Page 236 Connecting to CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C adapter

CQM1, CQM1H

CS1, CJ1, CJ2 Page 237 Connecting to CJ1, CJ2, CS1, CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, or CP2E

CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E-E, CP2E-S

Page 237 Connecting to CJ1, CJ2, CS1, CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, or CP2E

C200H Page 236 Connecting to CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C adapter

CV500, CV1000, CV2000, CVM1 Page 240 Connecting to CV500/CV1000/CV2000 or CVM1

RS-232C adapter CPM1-CIF01, CPM2C-CIF01-V1 Page 236 Connecting to CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C adapter

Connection cable CQM1-CIF01 Page 241 Connecting to connection cable

CQM1-CIF02

CPM2C-CN111

Rack type host link unit C200H-LK201-V1 Page 242 Connecting to rack type host link unit

C200H-LK202-V1 Page 242 Connecting to rack type host link unit

C500-LK201-V1 Page 242 Connecting to rack type host link unit

Serial communication module CJ1W-SCU21 Page 246 Connecting to serial communication unit

CJ1W-SCU41

CJ1W-SCU21-V1

CJ1W-SCU31-V1

CJ1W-SCU41-V1

CS1W-SCU21

CS1W-SCU21-V1

Communication board C200HW-COM02(-V1) Page 247 Connecting to communication board

C200HW-COM03(-V1)

C200HW-COM05(-V1)

C200HW-COM06(-V1)

Serial communication board CQM1H-SCB41 Page 249 Connecting to serial communication board

CS1W-SCB21 CS1W-SCB21-V1

CS1W-SCB41 CS1W-SCB41-V1

RS-422A/485 Option board CP1W-CIF11 Page 250 Connecting to RS-422A/485 Option board

CP1W-CIF12-V1

RS-422A converter CJ1W-CIF11 Page 250 Connecting to RS-422A converter

RS-232C&RS-485 Option Board

CP2W-CIFD2 Page 251 Connecting to RS-232C&RS-485 Option Board

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 235

23

Connecting to CPM2A, CQM1, CQM1H, C200H or RS-232C adapter

Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 Set the same transmission speed of the RS-232C port as that of the GOT side. *3 Set the RS-232C port host link station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

Precautions for changing device values Before changing the device values, make sure that the switch settings have been changed as follows: CPM2A: The communication condition switch to "individual" Other PLC CPU: Front panel DIP switch SW5 to "OFF"

Device name Set value DM6645 0001H(fixed)

DM6646

DM6647 0000 (fixed)

DM6648*3 0000 to 0031

DM6649 0000 (fixed)

b15 to b8 b7 to b0

1) RS-232C port transmission speed setting *1*2

02H: 4800bps 03H: 9600bps 04H: 19200bps

2) 1)

2) RS-232C port communication frame format 03H (fixed): The settings are:

Start bit : 1 bit Data length: 7 bits Stop bit : 2 bits Parity : Even bits

6 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Connecting to CJ1, CJ2, CS1, CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, or CP2E

Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches.

Setting on the CJ1, CJ2

Switch Description Settings SW1 Enable/disable write to user memory (UM) OFF

SW2 Enable/disable automatic transfer of user program at power ON OFF

SW3 Free OFF

SW4 CJ1: Peripheral port communication condition CJ2: Free

OFF

SW5 RS-232C communication condition OFF

SW6 User customized DIP switch OFF

SW7 Type specification for simplified backup OFF

SW8 - OFF

RUN ERR/ALM

INH PRPHL COMM

OPEN

MCPWR

BUSY

PERIPHERAL

PORT

DIP switch (inside battery compartment)

ON1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 237

23

Setting on the CS1

Switch Description Settings SW1 Enable/disable write to user memory (UM) OFF

SW2 Enable/disable automatic transfer of user program at power ON OFF

SW3 Programming console message display language (Japanese/English) OFF

SW4 Peripheral port communication condition OFF

SW5 RS-232C communication condition OFF

SW6 User customized DIP switch OFF

SW7 Type specification for simplified backup OFF

SW8 - OFF

RUN

ERR/ALM

INH

PRPHL/COMM

OPEN

OPEN

MCPWR BUSY

PERIPHERAL

PORT

DIP switch (inside battery compartment)

ON

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

8 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Setting on the CP1H, CP1L

Setting on the CP1E, CP2E Settings by DIP switch are not required.

Setting PLC system settings CJ1, CJ2, CS1 Make the PLC system settings.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 Set the same port transmission speed as that of the GOT side. *3 Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

Precautions for changing the PLC system settings Before changing the PLC system settings, make sure that the switch settings have been changed as follows: CJ1, CJ2, CS1: Front panel DIP switch SW5 to "OFF"

Switch Description Settings SW4 Option Board Slot1 According to PLC Setup. OFF

SW5 Option Board Slot2 OFF

Channel Bit Item Set value 160 15 Arbitrary settings ON/OFF 1H: Arbitrary settings (fixed)

8 to 11 Serial communication mode 0H: Upper link (fixed)

3 Data bit 0H: 7bits (fixed)

2 Stop bit 0H: 2bits (fixed)

0 to 1 Parity 0H: Even (fixed)

161 0 to 7 Port transmission speed*1*2 00H: 9600bps 05H: 4800bps 06H: 9600bps 07H: 19200bps 08H: 38400bps 09H: 57600bps 0AH: 115200bps

163 0 to 7 Host link station No.*3 0H to 1FH : No.00 to 31

Dip switch

1

2

3

4 5

6

O N

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 239

24

CP1H, CP1L, CP1E, CP2E Set the PLC system settings of the option slot connected to the GOT.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 Set the same port transmission speed as that of the GOT side. *3 Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

Precautions for changing the PLC system settings When using the CP1H or CP1L, if you change the PLC system settings, check the settings of the front DIP switch that corresponds to the option slot used to establish communication with the GOT. Page 239 Setting on the CP1H, CP1L

Connecting to CV500/CV1000/CV2000 or CVM1

Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches.

Host link RS-422/232 switch

DIP switches

Item Set value Mode Host link

Parameter 7, 2, E

Baud rate*1*2 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps , 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Unit number*3 00 to 31

Settings

For RS-232 communication For RS-422 communication RS-232 (up) RS-422 (down)

Switch No. Settings

For RS-232 communication

For RS-422 communication

6 OFF (no terminating resistor) ON (terminating resistor attached)

5 OFF

4 OFF

3 OFF

2 OFF

1 OFF

DIP switch (inside battery compartment)

HOST LINK

PERIPHERAL

M/C ON

RS-232

RS-422

RS-232

RS-422

1 2

3

4

5 6

O

N

0 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Setting PLC system settings Make the PLC system settings.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. *3 Set the station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

Connecting to connection cable

Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 Set the same transmission speed of the peripheral port as that of the GOT side. *3 Set the peripheral port host link station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

Precautions for changing device values Before changing the device values, make sure that the switch settings have been changed as follows: CPM2A: The communication condition switch to "individual" CPM2C: The communication port function switch to "OFF"

Item Set value Transmission speed*1*2 4800bps/9600bps/19200bps

Stop bit 2 stop bits (fixed)

Parity Even (fixed)

Data bit 7bits (fixed)

Unit number*3 00 to 31

Device name Set value DM6650 0001H(fixed)

DM6651

DM6652 0000 (fixed)

DM6653*3 0000 to 0031

b15 to b8 b7 to b0

1) RS-232C port transmission speed setting*1*2

02H: 4800bps 03H: 9600bps 04H: 19200bps

2) 1)

2) RS-232C port communication frame format 03H (fixed): The settings are:

Start bit : 1 bit Data length: 7 bits Stop bit : 2 bits Parity : Even bits

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 241

24

Connecting to rack type host link unit

Switch setting on C200H-LK201-V1 Set the switches accordingly.

Setting Machine No. (SW1, SW2) Set the Machine No. within the range of 00 to 31. Set the station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

Setting transmission speed (SW3) Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown.

Setting command level/parity/transmission code (SW4)

Rotary switch Description Settings SW1 Machine No. upper digit (101) 0 to 3

SW2 Machine No. lower digit (100) 0 to 9

Setting*1 Settings 4 4800bps

5 9600bps

6 19200bps

Settings Setting details

Command level Parity Transmission code 2(fixed) Levels 1, 2 and 3 enabled Even ASCII 7 bits

2 stop bits

LK201-V1

RUN

RCV

XM

ERROR

SW1 SW2

SW3 SW4

Front Rear

1 2 3 4 O

N

(4)

(1)

(3)

(5)

(1)

(2)

SW1 SW2

SW3

SW4

2 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Setting DIP switches

Setting the CTS switch

Switch setting on C200H-LK202-V1 Set the switches accordingly.

Setting Machine No. (SW1, SW2) Set the Machine No. within the range of 00 to 31. Set the station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

Setting transmission speed (SW3) Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown.

Switch No. Set value 1 OFF

2 OFF

3 ON (1:N procedure)

4 OFF (no 5V power supply)

Settings 0V

Rotary switch Description Settings SW1 Machine No. upper digit (101) 0 to 3

SW2 Machine No. lower digit (100) 0 to 9

Setting*1 Settings 4 4800bps

5 9600bps

6 19200bps

1 2 3 4 O

N

LK201-V1

RUN

RCV

XM

ERROR

SW1 SW2

SW3 SW4

Front Rear

(4)

(1)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(5)

SW1 SW2

SW3

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 243

24

Setting command level/parity/transmission code (SW4)

Setting the 1:1/1:N procedure switch

Setting the terminating resistor connection switch

Switch setting on C500-LK201-V1 Set the switches accordingly.

Setting host link/local

RS-232C/RS-422 switch

Internal/external clock switch

Settings Setting details

Command level Parity Transmission code 2(fixed) Levels 1, 2 and 3 enabled Even ASCII 7 bits

2 stop bits

Settings OFF (1:N procedure)

Settings ON (terminating resistor attached)

Settings Host link

Settings

For RS-232 communication For RS-422 communication RS-232 (down) RS-422 (up)

Settings Internal (up)

SW4

In operation

Receiving

Transmitting

Transmission error

Mode selection Host link

Local

Front Rear

(6)

(7)(1)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

(5)

(4)

(3)

(2)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Terminating resistor connection switch

CTS switch

Setting SW1 (Station No., Run/Stop)

Setting SW2 (Transmission speed, Procedure, Level)

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown.

Settings Attached (down)

Settings 0V (up)

Switch No. Settings Description 8 ON Run

7 OFF -

6 OFF -

5 Set the station No. within the range of 00 to 31. For details, refer to the following manual. OMRON PLC user's Manual

4

3

2

1

Switch No. Settings Description 8 ON Levels 1, 2 and 3 enabled

7 ON

6 OFF 1:N procedure

5 OFF -

4 *1 Transmission speed

3

2

1

Transmission speed Switch No.

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 4800bps OFF ON ON OFF

9600bps ON OFF ON OFF

19200bps OFF OFF ON OFF

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 245

24

Connecting to serial communication unit

Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor.

m = 30000 + (100 unit No.) *1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. *3 Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

DIP switch setting Set the DIP switches when connecting to CJ1W-SCU31-V1 or CJ1W-SCU41(-V1) to perform the RS-422 communications.

Device name Set value

Port 1 Port 2 DM(m) DM(m+10) 8000H(fixed): The settings are:

Port setting: Arbitrary setting Serial communication mode: Host link Start bit: 1bit Data bit: 7bits Stop bit: 2bits Parity: Even

DM(m+1) DM(m+11)

DM(m+2) DM(m+12) 8000H(fixed)

DM (m+3)*3

DM (m+13)*3

8000H to 801FH

DIP switch Set value

Name Description WIRE Setting(2-wire/4-wire) Switch 4 (4-wire type)

TERM Terminator ON/OFF switch OFF (no terminating resistor)

b15 to b8 b7 to b0

1) Transmission speed*1*2

00H: 9600bps 08H: 38400bps 05H: 4800bps 09H: 57600bps 06H: 9600bps 0AH: 115200bps 07H: 19200bps

0H 1)

6 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Connecting to communication board

Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 Set the same transmission speed as that of the GOT side. *3 Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

Device name Set value

Port B Port A DM6550 DM6555 0001H(fixed)

DM6551 DM6556

DM6552 DM6557 0000 (fixed)

DM6553*3 DM6558*3 0000 to 0031

b15 to b8 b7 to b0

1) Transmission speed*1*2

02H:4800bps 03H:9600bps 04H:19200bps

2) 1)

2) Frame format setting 03H (fixed): The settings are:

Start bit :1 bit Data length:7 bits Stop bit :2 bits Parity :Even bits

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 247

24

Setting DIP switches (C200HW-COM03(-V1) and C200HW-COM06(-V1) only) Set the DIP switches when performing the RS-422 communications on the C200HW-COM03(-V1) and C200HW-COM06(- V1).

DIP switch Set value

No. Item SW1 RS-422/485 cable

(2-wire/4-wire type) switching 4 (4-wire type)

SW2 Terminator ON/OFF 1 (no terminating resistor attached)

COMO3 A RS422/485

RDY

COMA

A

COMO6 A RS422/485

B RS232

RDY

COMA COMB

A

SW2

SW1

Side view indicated by A

24 1 O N

C200HW-COM03(-V1) C200HW-COM06(-V1)

8 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Connecting to serial communication board For the setting for connecting to the serial communication board (CQM1H-SCB41), refer to the following. Page 247 Connecting to communication board

Device settings Write the following set values to devices of each PLC CPU and initialize each port using a peripheral tool or DM monitor.

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. *3 Set the host link station No. according to the Host Address on the GOT side.

Setting the DIP switches (CS1W-SCB41(-V1) only) Set the DIP switches when performing the RS-422 communications on the CS1W-SCB41(-V1).

Device name Set value

Port 1 Port 2 D32000 D32010 8000H(fixed):

The settings are: Port setting: Arbitrary setting Serial communication mode: Host link Start bit: 1bit Data bit: 7bits Stop bit: 2bits Parity: Even

D32001 D32011

D32002 D32012 8000H(fixed)

D32003*3 D32013*3 0000H to 0001FH

DIP switch Set value

Name Description WIRE Setting(2-wire/4-wire) Switch 4 (4-wire type)

TERM Terminator ON/OFF switch OFF (no terminating resistor)

b15 to b8 b7 to b0

1) Transmission speed*1*2

00H: 9600bps 08H: 38400bps 05H: 4800bps 09H: 57600bps 06H: 9600bps 0AH: 115200bps 07H: 19200bps

0H 1)

OFF

SCB41-V1

2

ON TERM

4 WIRE

PORT2 (RS422/ RS485)

RDY COMM1 COMM2

TERM WIRE

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 249

25

Precautions for changing the DM area Before changing the DM area, make sure that the switch setting has been changed as follows. CS1: Front panel DIP switch SW5 to "OFF"

Connecting to RS-422A/485 Option board

Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches. The DIP switch differs according to the type of the option board.

Connecting to RS-422A converter

Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches.

Option board Settings Description

CP1W-CIF11, CP1W-CIF12 CP1W-CIF12-V1

Pin No. Pin No. SW1 1 SW1 1 ON Enable Terminating resistance selection

2 2 OFF 4-wire type 2-wire or 4-wire selection

3 3 OFF 4-wire type 2-wire or 4-wire selection

5 SW2 1 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for RD

6 2 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for SD

Switch No. Settings Description 1 ON Enable Terminating resistance selection

2 OFF 4-wire type 2-wire or 4-wire selection

3 OFF 4-wire type 2-wire or 4-wire selection

5 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for RD

6 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for SD

DIP Switches for Operation Settings

COMM

RDA- RDB+ SDA- SDB+ FG

DIP switch

O N

1 2 3 4 5 6

0 4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection

4

Connecting to RS-232C&RS-485 Option Board

Setting DIP switch Set whether to enable or disable terminating resistors using the DIP switch.

Settings Description ON Enable (both terminals) Terminating resistance selection

COMM

RS-485 TERM PORT (EX)

RS-485 PORT RS-232C

SD R D

SG FG A- B+ FG N C

ON

DIP switch

RS-485 TERM

ON

4 OMRON PLC 4.2 Serial Connection 251

25

4.3 Ethernet Connection Connecting to SYSMAC CJ1, CJ2, CS1, or CP2 series

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Series Ethernet module*3

Cable model *1 Maximum segment length*2

Option device*6 Model

CS1H CS1G CS1D

CS1W-ETN21 CS1W-EIP21

Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m - (Built into GOT) When PLC:GOT is N:1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT TCP: 128 or less UDP: 128 or less When PLC:GOT is 1:N The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC TCP: 16 or less*4

UDP: No limit number*5

GT25-J71E71-100

CS1D CS1D- ETN21D

100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

CJ1H CJ1M CJ1G

CJ1W-ETN21 CS1W-EIP21

100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

Ethernet (OMRON), Gateway

Communication driver

CS1H, CS1G, CS1D, CJ1H, CJ1M, CJ1G, CJ2H, CJ2M, CP2E

Ethernet module Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

2 4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection

4

*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards. To connect the target device and hub, use a cable according to the target controller configuration.

*2 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details of the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *4 If it is connected to devices other than the GOT using the connection, the number of connectable GOTs decreases.

For details, refer to the OMRON PLC user's manual. *5 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs. However, if the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-loaded,

and it may affect the communication performance. *6 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

CJ2H-CPU6-EIP CJ2M-CPU3

- Twisted pair cable 10BASE-T

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m - (Built into GOT) When PLC:GOT is N:1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT TCP: 128 or less UDP: 128 or less When PLC:GOT is 1:N The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC TCP: 16 or less*4

UDP: No limit number*5

GT25-J71E71-100

CJ1W-ETN21 CS1W-EIP21

100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

CJ2H-CPU6 CJ2M-CPU1

CJ1W-ETN21 CS1W-EIP21

100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

CP2E - 100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Series Ethernet module*3

Cable model *1 Maximum segment length*2

Option device*6 Model

4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection 253

25

Connecting to NJ or NX series

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentSeries Ethernet

module*3 Cable model *1 Maximum

segment length*2

Option device*5 Model

NJ501-1500 NJ501-1400 NJ501-1300 NJ501-1520 NJ501-1420 NJ501-1320 NJ501-1340 NJ301-1200 NJ301-1100 NJ101-1000 NJ101-9000 NJ101-1020 NJ101-9020

CJ1W-EIP21 Shielded twisted pair cable (STP):Category 5 and 5e

100m - (Built into GOT) When PLC:GOT is N:1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT 128 or less When PLC:GOT is 1:N The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC 128 or less*4

32 or less*4

GT25-J71E71-100

NJ501-1500 NJ501-1400 NJ501-1300 NJ501-1520 NJ501-1420 NJ501-1320 NJ501-1340 NJ301-1200 NJ301-1100 NJ101-1000 NJ101-9000 NJ101-1020 NJ101-9020 NX1P2-1140DT NX1P2-1140DT1 NX1P2-1040DT NX1P2-1040DT1 NX1P2-9024DT NX1P2-9024DT1

- 100m - (Built into GOT) When PLC:GOT is N:1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT 128 or less When PLC:GOT is 1:N The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC 32 or less*4

32 or less*4

100m GT25-J71E71-100

NX701-1700 NX701-1600

- 100m - (Built into GOT) When PLC:GOT is N:1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT 128 or less When PLC:GOT is 1:N The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC 128 or less per port (Total 256 or less for 2 ports)*4

32 or less per port (Total 64 or less for 2 ports)*4

GT25-J71E71-100

Ethernet(OMRON NJ/NX), Gateway

Communication driver

Ethernet moduleNJ/NX series Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

4 4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection

4

*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards. To connect the target device and hub, use a cable according to the target controller configuration.

*2 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details of the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *4 If it is connected to devices other than the GOT using the connection, the number of connectable GOTs decreases.

For details, refer to the OMRON PLC user's manual. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

NX102-1200 NX102-1100 NX102-1000 NX102-9000

- Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m - (Built into GOT) When PLC:GOT is N:1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT 128 or less When PLC:GOT is 1:N The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC 32 or less per port (Total 64 or less for 2 ports) *4

32 or less per port (Total 64 or less for 2 ports) *4

GT25-J71E71-100

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentSeries Ethernet

module*3 Cable model *1 Maximum

segment length*2

Option device*5 Model

4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection 255

25

GOT side settings

Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Select the following items and the detail setting is displayed. [Manufacturer]: [OMRON] [Controller Type]: Depends on the PLC. SYSMAC CJ1/CJ2/CS1/CP2 series: [OMRON SYSMAC] NJ/NX series: [OMRON NJ/NX] [I/F]: [Ethernet:Multi] [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 257 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

6 4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection

4

Communication detail settings Ethernet (OMRON), Gateway Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 Set [FINS UDP Port] of OMRON PLC CX-Programmer to the same value that is set in [GOT Communication Port No.]. *2 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Page 259 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting *3 When assigning the same driver to the multiple channels, in the communication drivers set as the second and following, the default

value of [GOT Communication Port No.] becomes the earliest number in the vacant numbers of No. 6000 and later. *4 Set a value within the setting range of the software for the programming apparatus.

Page 261 CX-Programmer setting

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT.

(Default: 1) 1 to 127

GOT Station*2*4 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18)

1 to 254

GOT Communication Port No.*1*4 Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. (Default: 5018*3)

1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153 to 49170)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255sec

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000 (ms)

4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection 257

25

Ethernet (OMRON NJ/NX), Gateway Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 259 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*2 When [CJ1W-EIP21] is set for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting], even if [Timeout Time] is set to 10 seconds or shorter, the GOT operates with the communication timeout period of 10 seconds. If [CJ1W-EIP21] and [OMRON NJ] are selectable for [Unit Type] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting], and [OMRON NJ] (built-in port connecting side) is set, the GOT also operates with the communication timeout period of 10 seconds. Page 259 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*3 When assigning the same driver to the multiple channels, in the communication drivers set as the second and following, the default value of [GOT Communication Port No.] becomes the earliest number in the vacant numbers of No. 6000 and later.

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting.

GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting.*1

Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Extension port (When using GT25-W, port 2) *1 Set a value within the setting range of the software for the programming apparatus.

Page 261 CX-Programmer setting

GOT Ethernet common setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extension port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.]

IP filter setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. Page 44 GOT Ethernet Setting

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT.

(Default: 1) 1 to 239

GOT Station*1 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18)

1 to 64

GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. (Default: 5034*3)

1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013 and 49153 to 49170)

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255sec

Timeout Time*2 Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000 (ms)

8 4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection

4

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting Ethernet (OMRON), Gateway

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 257 Communication detail settings

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] for GT21 and GS21 Effective range of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] Only [1] to [4] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] can be used for GT21 and GS21. If [5] onwards are used, the settings are invalid on GT21 and GS21. [Host] setting Set [Host] within the range from [1] to [4] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed.

It refers to a station that can be connected without setting a station number. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).)

-

Net No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

1 to 127

Station*1 Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

1 to 254

Unit Type OMRON (fixed) OMRON (fixed)

IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 192.168.250.1)

PLC side IP address

Port No. Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 9600)

256 to 65534

Communication format Select a communication protocol. (Default: UDP) UDP, TCP

Only [1] to [4] can be used.

4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection 259

26

Ethernet (OMRON NJ/NX), Gateway

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 257 Communication detail settings

*2 NX series does not support [CJ1W-EIP21]. *3 NX701 and NX102 have two built-in EtherNet/IP ports.

Set [IP Address] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3, according to the port number set for NX701 or NX102 to be connected.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed.

It refers to a station that can be connected without setting a station number. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).)

-

Net No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station*1 Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

1 to 64

Unit Type Select the device according to the connection destination. Built in Ethernet port: OMRON NJ/NX Communication unit: CJ1W-EIP21*2

(Default: OMRON NJ/NX)

OMRON NJ/NX, CJ1W-EIP21

IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1.1.1.1)

PLC side IP address*3

Port No. 44818 (fixed) 44818 (fixed)

Communication format TCP (fixed) TCP (fixed)

Connection Set the connection. (Default: UCMM)

UCMM, Class3

0 4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection

4

PLC side setting

Communication settings for SYSMAC CJ1/CJ2/CS1/CP2 series For the communication between OMRON PLC (SYSMAC CJ1/CJ2/CS1/CP2 series) and GOT, use the FINS communication. For the FINS communication, the node must be specified according to the realm of FINS. However, for the Ethernet network, the data transfer according to the IP address is required. The following four methods are available for converting the FINS node address to the IP address. Automatic generation method (dynamic) Automatic generation method (static) IP address table conversion method Combined method For details of OMRON PLCs, refer to the following manual. OMRON PLC user's Manual

Node setting switch Set the node setting switch of the module to the value of [Station] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3. Note that the node setting switch is set in hexadecimal. Convert this hexadecimal number to decimal, and set the value to [Station].

CX-Programmer setting For the PLC communication setting, set with a software for programming apparatus (CX-Programmer Ver.3.20 or later).

*1 Set the values of [IP Address] and [Port No.] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3 to [IP address] and [FINS UDP Port].

*2 The Node IP Address dynamically change function is available only when the Ethernet module to be used is Ver.1.3 or later. For the setting, set in the module setting of CX-ProgrammerVer.5.0 or later or in the WEB function. For details of Node IP Address dynamically change, refer to the following manual. OMRON PLC user's Manual

*3 Set the node setting switch of the module to the lowest byte of the [IP address]. Note that the node setting switch is set in hexadecimal. Convert this hexadecimal number to decimal, and set the value to the lowest byte of [IP Address].

Item Setting range

Automatic generation method (dynamic)

Automatic generation method (static) *4*5

IP address table method*4*6

Combined method *4

Ethernet module CPU highly- functional module

Global All 1 (Default) All 1 (Default) All 1 (Default) All 1 (Default)

IP address*1 192.168.3.1 *3 192.168.3.1 *3 192.168.3.1 192.168.3.1

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

FINS UDP port*1 9600 9600 9600 9600

IP address conversion

Automatic generation method (dynamic)

Automatic generation method (static)

IP address table method Combined method

IP address table - - Destination node address: 18 *7

Destination IP address: 192.168.3.18

- *8

Transmission speed

Automatic detection (Default) Automatic detection (Default)

Automatic detection (Default) Automatic detection (Default)

Node IP Address dynamically change*2

Change dynamically (Default)*9

Change dynamically (Default)

Change dynamically (Default) Change dynamically (Default)

Set the node setting switch of the module to this value.

4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection 261

26

*4 In GT Designer3, set the value of [GOT Communication Port No.] in [Detail Setting] to [Port No.] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

*5 In GT Designer3, set the value of [GOT Station] in [Detail Setting] to the lowest byte of [GOT IP address] in [GOT IP Address Setting].

*6 In GT Designer3, set the value of [IP Address Table] to [GOT IP address] in [GOT IP Address Setting] and to [GOT Station] in [Detail Setting].

*7 Set the lowest byte of [Destination IP Address] to [Destination Node Address]. *8 To use [IP Address Table], apply the settings of the IP address table method. *9 Not to set the dynamical change, set the same value to [GOT Communication Port No.] in [Detail Setting] and [Port No.] in [Connected

Ethernet Controller Setting] in GT Designer3.

Communication Setting for NJ/NX series For the PLC communication setting, set with an automation software Sysmac Studio.

Versions of NJ series supporting Sysmac Studio

*1 The CPU module NJ101- does not have Ver. 1.09 or earlier. *2 Use Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.13 or later for the CPU module NJ101-.

Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.12 or earlier cannot be used for NJ101-. *3 The CPU module NJ301- does not have Ver. 1.00.

Therefore, Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.01 or earlier cannot be used for NJ301-.

Version of the CPU module Version of Sysmac Studio Ver.1.14 Ver.1.18

Ver.1.13 Ver.1.17

Ver.1.12 Ver.1.16

Ver.1.11 Ver.1.15

Ver.1.10 *1 Ver.1.13 *2

Ver.1.12

Ver.1.09 Ver.1.10

Ver.1.08 Ver.1.09

Ver.1.07 Ver.1.08

Ver.1.06 Ver.1.07

Ver.1.05 Ver.1.06

Ver.1.04 Ver.1.05

Ver.1.03 Ver.1.04

Ver.1.02 Ver.1.03

Ver.1.01 Ver.1.02

Ver.1.00 *3 Ver.1.01

Ver.1.00

Set this value to [Destination Node Address] in [IP Address Table].

Set this address to [Destination IP Address] in [IP Address Table].

2 4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection

4

Versions of NX series supporting Sysmac Studio

*1 The version of CPU module NX102- The CPU module NX102- does not have Ver. 1.29 or earlier. The CPU modules NX701- and NX1P2- do not have Ver. 1.30.

*2 The CPU modules NX701- and NX1P2- do not have Ver. 1.17. *3 The CPU modules NX701- and NX1P2- do not have Ver. 1.15. *4 The CPU module NX1P2- does not have Ver. 1.12 or earlier. *5 Use Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.17 or later for the CPU module NX1P2-.

Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.16 or earlier cannot be used for NX1P2-.

Setting of an automation software Sysmac Studio

*1 Apply the same setting as [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of the GOT. Page 260 Ethernet (OMRON NJ/NX), Gateway

*2 Apply the same setting as [GOT Ethernet Setting] of the GOT. Page 44 GOT Ethernet Setting

*3 NX701- and NX102- have two built-in EtherNet/IP ports that can be set individually.

Version of the CPU module Version of Sysmac Studio Ver.1.30 *1 Ver.1.23

Ver.1.18 *2 Ver.1.22

Ver.1.16 *3 Ver.1.20

Ver.1.14 Ver.1.18

Ver.1.13 *4 Ver.1.17 *5

Ver.1.12 Ver.1.16

Ver.1.11 Ver.1.15

Ver.1.10 Ver.1.13

Item Description Range IP address*1*3 Set the IP address. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Subnet Mask*2*3 Set the subnet mask for the sub network. (Only for connection via router) If the sub network is not used, the default value is set. (Default: 255.255.255.0)

0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection 263

26

Precautions

When connecting to multiple GOTs Setting station no. When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network, set each station no. to the GOT. Page 259 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Setting IP address Do not use the IP address "192.168.0.18" when using multiple GOTs with the GOT 1000 series mixed. A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address.

When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *.*.*.255 are used by the system.) The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller.

When connecting to the multiple network equipment (including GOT) in a segment By increasing the network load, the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced. The following actions may improve the communication performance. Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT

NJ/NX series start up When writing or reading OMRON NJ/NX tag immediately after NJ/NX series setup, a system alarm may occur. In this case, make the time to start communication with NJ/NX series longer in [Startup Time] for the communication detail settings. For details, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

4 4 OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection

4

4.4 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 627 OMRON equipment ([OMRON SYSMAC]) Page 631 OMRON equipment ([OMRON NJ/NX])

4 OMRON PLC 4.4 Settable Device Range 265

26

MEMO

6 4 OMRON PLC 4.4 Settable Device Range

5

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Page 267 Connectable Model List Page 268 System Configuration Page 281 Connection Diagram Page 291 GOT Side Settings Page 294 Temperature Controller Side Setting Page 299 Settable Device Range Page 299 Precautions

5.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 For GS21, only GS21-W-N supports the RS-485 connection.

Series Model name Communication Type

Connectable GOT*1 Refer to

THERMAC NEO E5AN E5EN E5GN E5CN(-H,-HT)

RS-232 RS-485

Page 268 Connecting to the THERMAC NEO series

E5AN-H E5EN-H E5AN-HT E5EN-HT

RS-232 RS-422 RS-485

INPANEL NEO E5ZN RS-232 RS-485

Page 275 Connecting to the INPANEL NEO

E5C E5CC(-T,-B) E5DC E5GC E5EC(-T,-B) E5AC(-T)

RS-232 RS-485

Page 277 Connecting to the E5C series, E5D series

E5D E5CD(-B) E5ED(-B)

RS-232 RS-485

Page 277 Connecting to the E5C series, E5D series

THERMAC R E5AR(-T) E5ER(-T)

RS-232 RS-485

Page 279 Connecting to the THERMAC R series

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.1 Connectable Model List 267

26

5.2 System Configuration Connecting to the THERMAC NEO series

When connecting to one temperature controller When connecting to E5AN, E5EN

*1 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

E5AN E5EN

RS-232 Page 281 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*1

Page 281 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

GOTTemperature controller

Connection cable

8 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration

5

When connecting to E5AN-H, E5CN-H, E5EN-H, E5AN-HT, E5CN-HT, E5EN-HT

*1 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

E5AN-H E5EN-H E5AN-HT E5EN-HT E5CN-H E5CN-HT

RS-232 Page 281 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*1

Page 281 RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON digital temperature controller

GOTTemperature controller

Connection cable

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration 269

27

When connecting to multiple temperature controllers (via an interface converter) When connecting to E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN

*1 The interface converter is a product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable model

Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3 Model

E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN

Page 285 RS- 485 connection diagram 1)

500m K3SC-10 RS-232 Page 281 RS- 232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 32 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Page 282 RS- 232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

0 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration

5

When connecting to E5AN-H, E5CN-H, E5EN-H, E5AN-HT, E5CN-HT, E5EN-HT

*1 The interface converter is a product manufactured by OMRON Corporation. For details on the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable model

Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3 Model

E5AN-H E5EN-H E5AN-HT E5EN-HT E5CN-H E5CN-HT

Page 285 RS- 485 connection diagram 1)

500m K3SC-10 RS-232 Page 281 RS- 232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 32 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Page 282 RS- 232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON digital temperature controller

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration 271

27

When connecting to multiple temperature controllers When connecting to E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN

*1 Not available to GT25-W. *2 Not available to GT2505-V. *3 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *4 Only available to GT2505-V. *5 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

E5AN E5EN E5CN E5GN

RS-485 Page 286 RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)

*2

31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 287 RS-485 connection diagram 3)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*1*2

Page 290 RS-485 connection diagram 6)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*4

Page 288 RS-485 connection diagram 4)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*5

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 289 RS-485 connection diagram 5)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

GOT

Connection cable

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

2 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration

5

When connecting to E5AN-H, E5CN-H, E5EN-H, E5AN-HT, E5CN-HT, E5EN-HT

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

E5AN-H E5EN-H E5AN-HT E5EN-HT E5CN-H E5CN-HT

RS-485 Page 286 RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m)

*3

31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT *1

Page 287 RS-485 connection diagram 3)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*2*3

Page 290 RS-485 connection diagram 6)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *4

*5

Page 288 RS-485 connection diagram 4)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*6

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 289 RS-485 connection diagram 5)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON digital temperature controller

GOT

Connection cable

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration 273

27

*1 Up to 10 temperature controllers can be connected to GS21-W. *2 Not available to GT25-W. *3 Not available to GT2505-V. *4 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *5 Only available to GT2505-V. *6 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

E5AN-H E5EN-H E5AN-HT E5EN-HT

RS-422 Page 283 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT) 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT *1

GT15-RS4-9S

*2*3

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 283 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

- (Built into GOT)

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

4 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration

5

Connecting to the INPANEL NEO

When connecting to multiple temperature controllers (via interface converter)

*1 The interface converter is a product manufactured by OMRON Corporation.For details of the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable model

Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3 Model

E5ZN Page 285 RS- 485 connection diagram 1)

500m K3SC-10 RS-232 Page 281 RS- 232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 16 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H- 6PT09P*2

Page 282 RS- 232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

GOT Interface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

E5ZN E5ZN

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration 275

27

When connecting to multiple temperature controllers

*1 Not available to GT25-W. *2 Not available to GT2505-V. *3 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *4 Only available to GT2505-V. *5 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

E5ZN RS-485 Page 286 RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)

*2

15 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 287 RS-485 connection diagram 3)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*1*2

Page 290 RS-485 connection diagram 6)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*4

Page 288 RS-485 connection diagram 4)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*5

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 289 RS-485 connection diagram 5)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

GOT

Connection cable

E5ZN E5ZN

6 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration

5

Connecting to the E5C series, E5D series

When connecting to multiple temperature controllers (via interface converter)

*1 The interface converter is a product manufactured by OMRON Corporation.For details of the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable model

Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3 Model

E5CC(-T,-B) E5DC E5GC E5EC(-T,-B) E5AC(-T)

Page 285 RS- 485 connection diagram 1)

500m K3SC-10 RS-232 Page 281 RS- 232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 32 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Page 282 RS- 232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

E5CD(-B) E5ED(-B)

Page 281 RS- 232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

Communication driver

OMRON digital temperature controller

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration 277

27

When connecting to multiple temperature controllers

*1 Not available to GT25-W. *2 Not available to GT2505-V. *3 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *4 Only available to GT2505-V. *5 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

E5CC(-T,-B) E5DC E5GC E5EC(-T,-B) E5AC(-T) E5CD(-B) E5ED(-B)

RS-485 Page 286 RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m)

*2

31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 287 RS-485 connection diagram 3)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*1*2

Page 290 RS-485 connection diagram 6)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*4

Page 288 RS-485 connection diagram 4)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*5

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 289 RS-485 connection diagram 5)

- (Built into GOT)

E5CD-B E5ED-B

Page 288 RS-485 connection diagram 4)

500m GT15-RS4-9S

*1*2

Communication driver

OMRON digital temperature controller

GOT

Connection cable

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

8 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration

5

Connecting to the THERMAC R series

When connecting to multiple temperature controllers (via interface converter)

*1 The interface converter is a product manufactured by OMRON Corporation.For details of the product, contact OMRON Corporation. *2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Temperature controller

Connection cable 1) Interface converter*1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Cable model

Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3 Model

E5AR(-T) E5ER(-T)

Page 285 RS- 485 connection diagram 1)

500m K3SC-10 RS-232 Page 281 RS- 232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 32 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Page 282 RS- 232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON digital temperature controller

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration 279

28

When connecting to multiple temperature controllers

*1 Not available to GT25-W. *2 Not available to GT2505-V. *3 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *4 Only available to GT2505-V. *5 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

E5AR(-T) E5ER(-T)

RS-485 Page 286 RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m)

*2

31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT

Page 287 RS-485 connection diagram 3)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*1*2

Page 290 RS-485 connection diagram 6)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P*3

*4

Page 288 RS-485 connection diagram 4)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*5

GT10-C02H-9SC

Page 289 RS-485 connection diagram 5)

- (Built into GOT)

Communication driver

OMRON digital temperature controller

GOT

Connection cable

Temperature controller

Temperature controller

0 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.2 System Configuration

5

5.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the controller.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

GOT side

-

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

FG

SG

SD

RD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

13

11

12

OMRON temperature controller side

GOT side

-

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

FG

SG

RD

SD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

3

6

5

Interface converter (K3SC-10)

GOT side (terminal block)

12

11

13

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD

SD

SG

OMRON temperature controller side

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram 281

28

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

OMRON temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON temperature controller. For details, refer to the user's manual of the OMRON temperature controller.

GOT side (terminal block)

6

5

3

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD

SD

SG

Interface converter (K3SC-10)

2 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram

5

RS-422 cable

Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*1 Terminating resistor of 240 1/2W should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal. *2 For GT27 and GT25 (except for GT2505-V), set the terminating resistor to enable.

For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 330 . For GS21-W, since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*1 Terminating resistor of 240 1/2W should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal. *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to 330.

Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT *3 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

OMRON temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON temperature controller. For details, refer to the user's manual of the OMRON temperature controller.

Temperature controller side

2

7

1

6

5

3

4

8

9

-

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

RDA RDB SDA SDB SG

RSA CSA RSB CSB FG

Temperature controller sideGOT side*2

Terminating resistor*1

21

22

11

12

13

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

21

22

11

12

13

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

RDA RDB SDA SDB SG

RSA*3

CSA*3

RSB*3

CSB*3

21

22

11

12

13

SDB

SDA

RDB

RDA

SG

21

22

11

12

13

Temperature controller side

Temperature controller sideGOT side*2

Terminating resistor*1

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram 283

28

Setting terminating resistors GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM". For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

OMRON temperature controller side When connecting a OMRON temperature controller to the GOT, the terminating resistor must be connected to the OMRON temperature controller. User's Manual of the OMRON temperature controller

4 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram

5

RS-485 cable

Connection diagram RS-485 connection diagram 1)

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following. *2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors.

Signal name

Model of temperature controller Interface converter (K3SC-10)

E5AN(-H,-HT) E5EN(-H,-HT) E5CN(-H,-HT)

E5GN E5ZN E5CC(-T) E5EC(-T) E5AC(-T)

E5CC-B E5EC-B

E5DC E5GC E5AR(-T) E5ER(-T)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. A(-) 12 6 24 14 19 or 20 4 8 2 8

B(+) 11 5 23 13 17 or 18 3 7 1 11

Temperature controller side

Temperature controller side

Interface converter (K3SC-10)

A(-)

B(+)

A(-)

B(+)

A(-)

B(+)

Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

*1 *1

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram 285

28

RS-485 connection diagram 2)

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following. *2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors. *3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to Enable.

Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

Signal name

Model of temperature controller

E5AN(-H,-HT) E5EN(-H,-HT) E5CN(-H,-HT)

E5GN E5ZN E5CC(-T) E5EC(-T) E5AC(-T) E5CD E5ED

E5CC-B E5EC-B E5CD-B E5ED-B

E5DC E5GC E5AR(-T) E5ER(-T)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. A(-) 12 6 24 14 19 or 20 4 8 2

B(+) 11 5 23 13 17 or 18 3 7 1

GOT side*3

SDA1(TXD1+)

SDB1(TXD1-)

NC

SG

SDA2(TXD2+)

NC

SDB2(TXD2-)

NC

RDA2(RXD2+)

RDA1(RXD1+)

RDB2(RXD2-)

RDB1(RXD1-)

NC

RSA(RTS+)

NC

RSB(RTS-)

NC

CSA(CTS+)

NC

CSB(CTS-)

6

8

1

2

5

3

7

4

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

B(+)

A(-)

B(+)

A(-)

Temperature controller side*1

Temperature controller side*1

Temperature controller side*1

B(+)

A(-)

Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

6 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram

5

RS-485 connection diagram 3)

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model.Refer to the following. *2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors. *3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to Enable.

Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

Signal name

Model of temperature controller

E5AN(-H,-HT) E5EN(-H,-HT) E5CN(-H,-HT)

E5GN E5ZN E5CC(-T) E5EC(-T) E5AC(-T) E5CD E5ED

E5CC-B E5EC-B E5CD-B E5ED-B

E5DC E5GC E5AR(-T) E5ER(-T)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. A(-) 12 6 24 14 19 or 20 4 8 2

B(+) 11 5 23 13 17 or 18 3 7 1

GOT side*3

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

SG

FG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

B(+)

A(-)

B(+)

A(-)

Temperature controller side*1

Temperature controller side*1

Temperature controller side*1

B(+)

A(-)

Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram 287

28

RS-485 connection diagram 4)

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following. *2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors. *3 For GT27 and GT25 (except for GT2505-V), set the terminating resistor to enable.

For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 110 . Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

Signal name

Model of temperature controller

E5AN(-H,-HT) E5EN(-H,-HT) E5CN(-H,-HT)

E5GN E5ZN E5CC(-T) E5EC(-T) E5AC(-T) E5CD E5ED

E5CC-B E5EC-B E5CD-B E5ED-B

E5DC E5GC E5AR(-T) E5ER(-T)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. A(-) 12 6 24 14 19 or 20 4 8 2

B(+) 11 5 23 13 17 or 18 3 7 1

GOT side*3

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

B(+)

A(-)

B(+)

A(-)

Temperature controller side*1

Temperature controller side*1

Temperature controller side*1

B(+)

A(-)

Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

8 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram

5

RS-485 connection diagram 5)

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following. *2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminating resistors. *3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to 110.

Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

*4 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required.

Signal name

Model of temperature controller

E5AN(-H,-HT) E5EN(-H,-HT) E5CN(-H,-HT)

E5GN E5ZN E5CC(-T) E5EC(-T) E5AC(-T) E5CD E5ED

E5CC-B E5EC-B E5CD-B E5ED-B

E5DC E5GC E5AR(-T) E5ER(-T)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. A(-) 12 6 24 14 19 or 20 4 8 2

B(+) 11 5 23 13 17 or 18 3 7 1

GOT side*3 Temperature

controller side*1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

B(+)

A(-)

B(+)

A(-)

Temperature controller side*1

B(+)

A(-)

Temperature controller side*1

Terminating resistor(120 1/2W)*2

*4

*4

*4

*4

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram 289

29

RS-485 connection diagram 6)

*1 Pin No. of temperature controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and the GOT which will be terminating resistors. *3 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below.

2-wire/4-wire: 2-wire (1Pair) Terminating resistor: OPEN Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-485 cable must be 500m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

OMRON temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the OMRON temperature controller. For details, refer to the user's manual of the OMRON temperature controller.

Setting terminating resistors GOT side Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "100 OHM". For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

OMRON temperature controller side When connecting a OMRON temperature controller to the GOT, the terminating resistor must be connected to the OMRON temperature controller. User's Manual of the OMRON temperature controller

Signal name

Model of temperature controller

E5AN(-H,-HT) E5EN(-H,-HT) E5CN(-H,-HT)

E5GN E5ZN E5CC(-T) E5EC(-T) E5AC(-T) E5CD E5ED

E5CC-B E5EC-B E5CD-B E5ED-B

E5DC E5GC E5AR(-T) E5ER(-T)

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. A(-) 12 6 24 14 19 or 20 4 8 2

B(+) 11 5 23 13 17 or 18 3 7 1

GOT side *3 Temperature

controller side *1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

B(+)

A(-)

B(+)

A(-)

Temperature controller side *1

B(+)

A(-)

Temperature controller side *1

Terminating resistor(120 1/2W) *2

0 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.3 Connection Diagram

5

5.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Select the following items and the detail setting is displayed. [Manufacturer]: [OMRON] [Controller Type]: Select one of the following items according to the controller to be connected.

[I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 292 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

Series Model of temperature controller Controller Type THERMAC NEO E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO or OMRON digital

temperature controller

E5AN-H, E5CN-H, E5EN-H, E5AN-HT, E5CN-HT, E5EN-HT OMRON digital temperature controller

INPANEL NEO E5ZN OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO or OMRON digital temperature controller

E5C E5CC(-T,-B), E5DC, E5GC, E5EC(-T,-B), E5AC(-T) OMRON digital temperature controller

E5D E5CD(-B), E5ED(-B) OMRON digital temperature controller

THERMAC R E5AR(-T), E5ER(-T) OMRON digital temperature controller

2.

3.

Click!

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.4 GOT Side Settings 291

29

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication

with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 7bits)

7bits/8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 2bits)

1bit/2bits

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 2ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Format Select the communication format. (Default: 1) format 1: only continuous access format 2: continuous and random access

1, 2

2 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.4 GOT Side Settings

5

OMRON Digital temperature controller

Delay Time When connecting to the temperature controller E5ZN, set the delay time to 5ms or more. Format setting Make sure to select format 1 when connecting with previous models (manufactured in December 2007 or before) of the THERMAC NEO series (E5AN, E5CN, E5EN, E5GN). For the continuous access and random access of the temperature controller, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the OMRON temperature controller Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication

with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 7bits)

7bits/8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 2bits)

1bit/2bits

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Host Address Specify the host address (station No. of the GOT to which the temperature controller is connected) in the connected network. (Default: 1)

0 to 99

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 2ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

Format Select the communication format. (Default: 2) format 1: only continuous access format 2: continuous and random access

1, 2

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.4 GOT Side Settings 293

29

5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting

OMRON temperature controller For details of OMRON temperature controller, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the OMRON temperature controller

Connecting E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN Set the communication data by operating the key of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Select the communication unit No. without overlapping with that of other units. *3 When changing the device values of the temperature controller from the GOT, turn ON CMWT (Communications writing) in advance.

Connecting to E5CN(-H,-HT), E5AN(-H,-HT), E5EN(-H,-HT) Set the communication data by operating the key of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Select the communication unit No. without overlapping with that of other units. *3 When changing the device values of the temperature controller from the GOT, turn ON CMWT (Communications writing) in advance.

Model name Refer to Temperature controller E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN Page 294 Connecting E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN

E5CN(-H,-HT), E5AN(-H,-HT), E5EN(-H,-HT) Page 294 Connecting to E5CN(-H,-HT), E5AN(-H,-HT), E5EN(-H,-HT)

E5ZN Page 295 Connecting E5ZN

E5CC(-T,-B), E5DC, E5GC, E5EC(-T,-B), E5AC(-T) Page 295 Connecting E5CC(-T,-B), E5DC, E5GC, E5EC(-T,-B), E5AC(-T)

E5CD(-B), E5ED(-B) Page 295 Connecting E5CD(-B), E5ED(-B)

E5AR(-T), E5ER(-T) Page 296 Connecting E5AR(-T), E5ER(-T)

Interface converter K3SC-10 Page 296 Connection to interface converter (K3SC-10)

Item Set value Protocol CompoWay/F (Sysway)

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit*1 8 bits, 7 bits

Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Communication unit No.*2 0 to 99

CMWT (Communications writing)*3 ON

Item Set value Protocol CompoWay/F (Sysway)

Transmission speed*1 9600bps,19200bps,38400bps,57600bps

Data bit*1 8 bits, 7 bits

Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Communication unit No.*2 0 to 99

CMWT (Communications writing)*3 ON

4 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting

5

Connecting E5ZN Set the communication data by operating the key of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Select the communication unit No. without overlapping with that of other units. *3 When changing the device values of the temperature controller from the GOT, turn ON CMWT (Communications writing) in advance.

Connecting E5CC(-T,-B), E5DC, E5GC, E5EC(-T,-B), E5AC(-T) Set the communication data by operating the key of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Select the communication unit No. without overlapping with that of other units. *3 When changing the device values of the temperature controller from the GOT, turn ON CMWT (Communications writing) in advance.

Connecting E5CD(-B), E5ED(-B) Configure the communication data settings by operating the keys of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Select the communication unit No. without overlapping with that of other units. *3 When changing the device values of the temperature controller from the GOT, turn on CMWT (Communications writing) in advance.

Item Set value Protocol CompoWay/F (Sysway)

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 38400bps

Data bit*1 8 bits, 7 bits

Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Communication unit No.*2 0 to 15

CMWT (Communications writing)*3 ON

Item Set value Protocol CompoWay/F (Sysway)

Transmission speed*1 9600bps,19200bps,38400bps,57600bps

Data bit*1 8 bits, 7 bits

Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Communication unit No.*2 0 to 99

CMWT (Communications writing)*3 ON

Item Set value Protocol CompoWay/F (Sysway)

Transmission speed*1 9600bps,19200bps,38400bps,57600bps,115200bps

Data bit*1 8 bits, 7 bits

Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None

Stop bit*1 1 bit, 2 bits

Communication unit No.*2 0 to 99

CMWT (Communications writing)*3 ON

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 295

29

Connecting E5AR(-T), E5ER(-T) Set the communication data by operating the key of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Select the communication unit No. without overlapping with that of other units. *3 When changing the device values of the temperature controller from the GOT, turn ON CMWT (Communications writing) in advance.

Connection to interface converter (K3SC-10)

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the DIP switch of the temperature controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Set to Without.

Settings by DIP switch

Item Set value Protocol CompoWay/F (Sysway)

Transmission speed*1 9600bps,19200bps,38400bps,57600bps

Data bit*1 8 bits, 7 bits

Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Communication unit No.*2 0 to 99

CMWT (Communications writing)*3 ON

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 19200bps, 38400bps

Data bit*1 7 bits, 8 bits

Parity bit*1 Odd, Even, None

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Communication Type RS-232RS485

Echo back*2 With, Without

Terminal block for RS-422/485 communication

Terminal block for RS-232 communication

Front of K3SC-10 body Inside of K3SC-10 body (When removing the front cover)

DIP switch

6 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting

5

Transmission speed settings

Settings of data length, parity bit, stop bit, master/slave device and echoback

Transmission speed (bps) Switch No.

1 2 3 1200 ON OFF OFF

2400 OFF ON OFF

4800 ON ON OFF

9600 OFF OFF OFF

19200 ON OFF ON

38400 OFF ON ON

Setting item Set value Switch No.

4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Data bit 7bits OFF

8bits ON

Stop bit 2bits OFF

1bit ON

Parity Even OFF OFF

Odd ON OFF

None OFF ON

Communication Type RS232RS422 OFF ON

RS-232RS485 OFF OFF

Echo back Without OFF

With ON

ON SW

Set these switches.

ON SW

Set these switches.

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 297

29

Station No. settings Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Direct specification When setting the device, specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed.

Indirect specification When setting the device, indirectly specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No. specification will be the station No. of the temperature controller.

All station specification Target station differs depending on write-in operation or read-out operation. For write-in operation, all station will be a target. For read-out operation, only one station will be a target.

Model name Specification range E5AN, E5EN, E5CN, E5GN 0 to 99

E5ZN 0 to 15

Specification station NO. Compatible device Setting range 100 GD10 0 to 99: For E5AN, E5EN, E5CN or E5GN

0 to 15: For E5ZN For the setting other than the above, error (dedicated device is out of range) will occur.

101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

GOT

Station No.3

Station No.7

Station No.1

Station No.15

Station No.6

Examples of station number setting

8 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.5 Temperature Controller Side Setting

5

5.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 632 OMRON equipment ([OMRON THERMAC/INPANEL NEO]) Page 636 OMRON equipment ([OMRON Digital Temperature Controller])

5.7 Precautions

Station number setting of the temperature controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No.1 station.

GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function, the settings of [time adjusting] or [Broadcast] by GOT clock control will be disabled.

Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device.For example, the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment. For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.6 Settable Device Range 299

30

MEMO

0 5 OMRON TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5.7 Precautions

6

6 KEYENCE PLC Page 301 Connectable Model List Page 302 Serial Connection Page 332 Ethernet Connection Page 339 Settable Device Range

6.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 For the RS-485 connection of GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface.

Series Model name Clock Communication Type Connectable GOT *1 Refer to KV-8000 KV-8000 RS-232 Page 302 Connecting to KV-8000 or KV-

7000 seriesRS-422

RS-485

Ethernet Page 332 Ethernet connection

KV-7000 KV-7500 KV-7300

RS-232 Page 302 Connecting to KV-8000 or KV- 7000 seriesRS-422

RS-485

Ethernet Page 332 Ethernet connection

KV-5000 KV-5500 KV-5000

RS-232 Page 305 Connecting to KV-5000 series

RS-422

RS-485

Ethernet Page 332 Ethernet connection

KV-3000 KV-3000 RS-232 Page 307 Connecting to KV-3000 series

RS-422

RS-485

Ethernet Page 332 Ethernet connection

KV-1000 KV-1000 RS-232 Page 310 Connecting to KV-1000 series

RS-422

RS-485

Ethernet Page 332 Ethernet connection

KV-700 KV-700 RS-232 Page 313 Connecting to KV-700 series

RS-422

RS-485

Ethernet Page 332 Ethernet connection

KV Nano KV-N14 RS-232 Page 316 Connecting to KV Nano series

RS-422

RS-485

KV-N24 KV-N40 KV-N60 KV-NC32T

RS-232 Page 316 Connecting to KV Nano series

RS-422

RS-485

Ethernet Page 332 Ethernet connection

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.1 Connectable Model List 301

30

6.2 Serial Connection Connecting to KV-8000 or KV-7000 series

When connecting to a PLC

*1 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

KV-7300 RS-232 GT09-C30R21101-6P or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*1

RS-232 connection diagram 4) 15m - (Built into GOT)

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

KV-7300 GOT

Connection cable

2 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

When connecting to multi-communication unit

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

KV-8000 KV-7500 KV-7300

KV-L20V (port 1) KV-L21V (port 1) KV-XL202

RS-232 GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

Multi- communication unit

KV-8000 KV-7500 KV-7300

GOT

Connection cable

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 303

30

*1 The multi-communication unit is a product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection.

KV-8000 KV-7500 KV-7300

KV-L20V (port 2) KV-L21V (port 2)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

RS-422 GT09-C30R41101-5T(3m) GT09-C100R41101-5T(10m) GT09-C200R41101-5T(20m) GT09-C300R41101-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

RS-485 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*4

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

4 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

Connecting to KV-5000 series

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

KV-5500 KV-5000

KV-L20V (port 1)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

15m - (Built into GOT)

KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

Multi- communication unit

KV-5500 KV-5000 GOT

Connection cable

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 305

30

*1 The multi-communication unit is a product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection.

KV-5500 KV-5000

KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-422 GT09-C30R41101-5T(3m) GT09-C100R41101-5T(10m) GT09-C200R41101-5T(20m) GT09-C300R41101-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

RS-485 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*4

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

6 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

Connecting to KV-3000 series

When connecting to a PLC

*1 The cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Conversion connector*1

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

KV-3000 RS-232 GT09-C30R21101-6P or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

- 15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

- 15m - (Built into GOT)

OP-26487*1 OP-26486 2.5m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

KV-3000 GOT

Connection cable

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 307

30

When connecting to multi-communication unit

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

KV-3000 KV-L20V (port 1)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

15m - (Built into GOT)

KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

Multi- communication unit

KV-3000 GOT

Connection cable

8 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

*1 The multi-communication unit is a product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection.

KV-3000 KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-422 GT09-C30R41101-5T(3m) GT09-C100R41101-5T(10m) GT09-C200R41101-5T(20m) GT09-C300R41101-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-485 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*4

1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 309

31

Connecting to KV-1000 series

When connecting to PLC

*1 The cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Conversion connector*1

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

KV-1000 RS-232 GT09-C30R21101-6P or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

- 15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

- 15m - (Built into GOT)

OP-26487*1 OP-26486 2.5m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

KV-1000 GOT

Connection cable

0 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

When connecting to multi-communication unit

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

KV-1000 KV-L20R, KV-L20V (port 1)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

15m - (Built into GOT)

KV-L20R, KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

Multi- communication unit

KV-1000 GOT

Connection cable

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 311

31

*1 The multi-communication unit is a product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection.

KV-1000 KV-L20R, KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-422 GT09-C30R41101-5T(3m) GT09-C100R41101-5T(10m) GT09-C200R41101-5T(20m) GT09-C300R41101-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

RS-485 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*4

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

2 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

Connecting to KV-700 series

When connecting to PLC

*1 The cable, conversion connector, and multi-communication unit are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Conversion connector*1

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

KV-700 RS-232 GT09-C30R21101-6P or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

- 15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

- 15m - (Built into GOT)

OP-26487*1 OP-26486 2.5m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

KV-700 GOT

Connection cable

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 313

31

When connecting to multi-communication unit

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

KV-700 KV-L20R, KV-L20, KV-L20V (port 1)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

15m - (Built into GOT)

KV-L20R, KV-L20, KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21103-3T(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*2

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

Multi- communication unit

KV-700 GOT

Connection cable

4 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

*1 The conversion connector and multi-communication unit are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection.

KV-700 KV-L20R, KV-L20, KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-422 GT09-C30R41101-5T(3m) GT09-C100R41101-5T(10m) GT09-C200R41101-5T(20m) GT09-C300R41101-5T(30m) or

RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 multi- communication unit

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

KV-L20R, KV-L20, KV-L20V (port 2)

RS-485 RS-485 connection diagram 1)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*4

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Multi- communication unit*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 315

31

Connecting to KV Nano series

When connecting to PLC

*1 The cable, conversion connector, and multi-communication unit are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Conversion connector *1

Max. distance

Option device *3 Model

KV-N14 KV-N24 KV-N40 KV-N60 KV-NC32T

RS-232 GT09-C30R21101-6P or

RS-232 connection diagram 1)

- 15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *2

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

- 15m - (Built into GOT)

OP-26487 *1 OP-26486 2.5m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *2

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

KV-N14 KV-N24 KV-N40 KV-N60 KV-NC32T

6 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

Connecting to serial communication cassette or serial adapter

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication cassette, serial adapter *1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

KV-N14 KV-N24 KV-N40 KV-N60 KV-NC32T

KV-N10L, KV-NC10L, KV-NC20L (port 1)

RS-232 GT09-C30R21102-9S(3m) or

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 serial communication cassette or serial adapter

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *2

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

15m - (Built into GOT)

KV-NC32T KV-NC20L (port 2)

RS-232 connection diagram 7)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P *2

RS-232 connection diagram 8)

15m - (Built into GOT)

Serial (KEYENCE)

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

Serial communication cassette, serial adapter

KV-N14 KV-N24 KV-N40 KV-N60 KV-NC32T

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 317

31

*1 The serial communication cassette and serial adapter are products manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION.

*2 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *4 For GS21-W, use the RS-422 interface for connection.

KV-N14 KV-N24 KV-N40 KV-N60 KV-NC32T

KV-N11L, KV-NC20L (port 2)

RS-422 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

500m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 serial communication cassette or serial adapter

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

500m - (Built into GOT)

RS-485 RS-485 connection diagram 3)

500m - (Built into GOT)

*4

GT15-RS4-9S

GT10-C02H-9SC

RS-485 connection diagram 4)

500m - (Built into GOT)

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Serial communication cassette, serial adapter *1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

8 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

RS-232 connection diagram 3)

KEYENCE PLC side (Modular 6-pin)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GOT side

1

5

3

2

4

6

-

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

+5V

SD

RD

+5V

SG

SG

KEYENCE PLC side (D-sub 9-pin)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GOT side

1

3

2

6

5

4

8

7

9

-

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

CD

SD

RD

DR

SG

ER

CS

RS

-

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GOT side

2

3

5

4

1

-

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

-

SD

RD

-

SG

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 319

32

RS-232 connection diagram 4)

RS-232 connection diagram 5)

RS-232 connection diagram 6)

KEYENCE PLC side (Modular 6-pin)

GOT side (terminal block)

3

5

1

2

4

6

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD

SD

+5V

+5V

SG

SG

KEYENCE PLC side (D-sub 9-pin)

GOT side (terminal block)

2

3

6

4

5

8

7

1

9

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD

SD

DR

ER

SG

CS

RS

CD

-

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)

GOT side (terminal block)

5

3

2

4

1

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD

SD

-

-

SG

0 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

RS-232 connection diagram 7)

RS-232 connection diagram 8)

Precaution when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be within 15m. GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications KEYENCE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KEYENCE PLC side module. For details, refer to the KEYENCE PLC user's manual.

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

GOT side

2

1

4

3

5

-

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

-

SD

RD

-

SG

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)

GOT side (terminal block)

4

1

2

3

5

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RD

SD

-

-

SG

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 321

32

RS-422 cable Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1)

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required. RS-422 connection diagram 3)

*1 Turn on the terminating resistor selector.

GOT side KEYENCE PLC side

(terminal block)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

4

5

1

2

3

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

FG

RDB(+)

SDB(+)

SG

RDA(-)

SDA(-)

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)

GOT side (terminal block)

4

2

5

3

1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDB(+)

RDA(-)

SDB(+)

SDA(-)

SG

*1

*1

*1

*1

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)GOT side

4

2

5

3

1

SDA(+)

RDA(+)

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB(-)

RDB(-)

RSB

CSB

RDB(+)

SDB(+)

SG

RDA(-)

SDA(-)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*1

2 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

*1 Turn on the terminating resistor selector. *2 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD and GT2103-PMBD.

Return connection is not required.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications KEYENCE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KEYENCE PLC side module. For details, refer to the KEYENCE PLC user's manual.

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side When connecting a KEYENCE PLC to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT. For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to disable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 . For GS21-W Since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)

GOT side (terminal block)

4

3

2

1

5

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDB(+)

RDA(-)

SDB(+)

SDA(-)

SG

*1

*2

*2

*2

*2

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 323

32

RS-485 cable Connection diagram RS-485 connection diagram 1)

RS-485 connection diagram 2)

*1 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD. Return connection is not required. RS-485 connection diagram 3)

*1 Turn on the terminating resistor selector.

GOT side KEYENCE PLC side

(terminal block)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4

5

1

2

3

SDA

RDA

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB

RDB

RSB

CSB

FG

RDB(+)

SDB(+)

SG

RDA(-)

SDA(-)

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)

GOT side (terminal block)

4

2

5

3

1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDB(+)

RDA(-)

SDB(+)

SDA(-)

SG

*1

*1

*1

*1

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)GOT side

4

2

5

3

1

SDA(+)

RDA(+)

RSA

CSA

SG

SDB(-)

RDB(-)

RSB

CSB

RDB(+)

SDB(+)

SG

RDA(-)

SDA(-)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*1

4 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

RS-485 connection diagram 4)

*1 Turn on the terminating resistor selector.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-485 cable must be 500m or less GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications KEYENCE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KEYENCE PLC side module. For details, refer to the KEYENCE PLC user's manual.

Connecting terminating resistors GOT For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to enable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 . For GS21-W Since the terminating resistor is fixed to 330 , no setting is required for the terminating resistor. For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT KEYENCE PLC Connect the terminating resistor on the KEYENCE PLC side when connecting a GOT to a KEYENCE PLC. Page 328 PLC Side Setting

KEYENCE PLC side (terminal block)

GOT side (terminal block)

4

3

2

1

5

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

RDB(+)

RDA(-)

SDB(+)

SDA(-)

SG

*1

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 325

32

GOT Side Settings

Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [KEYENCE] [Controller Type]: [KEYENCE KV-700/1000/3000/5000/7000/8000] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 327 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

6 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data.For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Contents Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication

with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps) 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bits)

7bits/8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit/2bits

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Host Address Specify the host address (station No. of the PLC to which the GOT is connected) in the network of the GOT. (Default: 0)

0 to 9

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

Station No. Selection Specify whether to use the station No. during communication. (Default: None)

Yes or No

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 327

32

PLC Side Setting

KEYENCE PLC For details of KEYENCE PLC, refer to the following manual. KEYENCE PLC user's Manual

Connecting KV-7300, KV-3000, KV-1000

*1 There is no transmission speed setting on the PLC side.The transmission speed of the PLC side is automatically adjusted to that of the GOT side.

*2 The communication mode setting is not available for KV-3000 and KV-1000.

Connecting to KV-700

Model name Reference PLC CPU KV-7300 Page 328 Connecting KV-7300, KV-3000, KV-1000

KV-3000 Page 328 Connecting KV-7300, KV-3000, KV-1000

KV-1000 Page 328 Connecting KV-7300, KV-3000, KV-1000

KV-700 Page 328 Connecting to KV-700

KV-N14 Page 329 Connecting to KV-N14, KV-N24, KV-N40, KV-N60, KV-NC32T

KV-N24 Page 329 Connecting to KV-N14, KV-N24, KV-N40, KV-N60, KV-NC32T

KV-N40 Page 329 Connecting to KV-N14, KV-N24, KV-N40, KV-N60, KV-NC32T

KV-N60 Page 329 Connecting to KV-N14, KV-N24, KV-N40, KV-N60, KV-NC32T

KV-NC32T Page 329 Connecting to KV-N14, KV-N24, KV-N40, KV-N60, KV-NC32T

Multi-communication unit KV-L20R Page 329 Connecting to KV-L20R, KV-L20, KV-L20V, KV-L21V

KV-L20

KV-L20V

KV-L21V

Serial communication cassette KV-N10L Page 331 Connecting to KV-N10L, KV-N11L, KV-NC10L, KV-NC20L

KV-N11L

Serial adapter KV-NC10L

KV-NC20L

Setting items Set value Communication mode *2 KV mode (Upper link)

Transmission Speed 9600 to 115200 bps*1

Data bit 8bits

Parity bit Even

Stop bit 1bit

Setting items Set value Transmission Speed 9600bps

Data bit 8bits

Parity bit Even

Stop bit 1bit

8 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

Connecting to KV-N14, KV-N24, KV-N40, KV-N60, KV-NC32T

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 326 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Connecting to KV-L20R, KV-L20, KV-L20V, KV-L21V Communication settings

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 326 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

*3 Set the station No. according to the host address on the GOT side. For the Host Address setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 326 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Setting items Set value Communication mode KV mode (Upper link)

Transmission speed *1*2 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data bit 8bits

Parity bit Even

Stop bit 1bit

Setting items Set value Communication mode KV mode (Upper link)

Transmission speed*1*2 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data bit 8bits

Parity bit Even

Stop bit 1bit

Station No.*3 0 to 9

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 329

33

Setting DIP switches Set the DIP switches. When using KV-L20R or KV-L20

RS232/RS422/RS485 switch (For port 2) (For KV-L20R)

(For KV-L20)

Terminator setting switch Set when carrying out RS-422 communication.

When using KV-L20, KV-L21V

Settings For RS-232 communication For RS-422 communication

RS-232C RS-422A 485(4)

Settings For RS-232 communication For RS-422 communication

RS-232C RS-422A

Settings When multi-communication unit is a terminal When multi-communication unit is not a terminal

ON OFF

Terminator setting switch

Port 1 (RS232)

Port 2 (RS232/RS422/RS485) RS232/RS422/RS485 switch

(For port 2)

485(4) 232C 422A 485(2)

232C 422A VT

ON

OFF

Terminator setting switch

Port 1 (RS232)

Port 2 (RS232/RS422/RS485)

0 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection

6

Terminator setting switch Set when carrying out RS-422 communication.

Connecting to KV-N10L, KV-N11L, KV-NC10L, KV-NC20L

*1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown. *2 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 326 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Settings When multi-communication unit is a terminal When multi-communication unit is not a terminal

ON OFF

Setting items Set value Communication mode KV mode (Upper link)

Transmission speed *1*2 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data bit 8bits

Parity bit Even

Stop bit 1bit

ON

OFF

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.2 Serial Connection 331

33

6.3 Ethernet Connection Ethernet connection

PLC Ethernet module*3

Connection cable Maximum segment length*2

GOT Model*3 Number of connectable equipment

Series Cable model*1 Option device*4

KV-5000 KV-7500 KV-8000

- Twisted pair cable*1

10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m - (Built into GOT) When PLC:GOT is N:1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT TCP: 128 or less UDP: 128 or less TCP: 4 or less UDP: 4 or less

When PLC:GOT is 1:N The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC TCP: 15 or less UDP: 1 or less

GT25-J71E71-100

KV-700 KV-1000 KV-3000 KV-5000 KV-5500 KV-7300 KV-7500 KV-8000

KV-LE20V KV-LE21V

100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

KV-7300 KV-7500 KV-8000

KV-EP21V KV-XLE02

100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

Ethernet (KEYENCE), Gateway

Communication driver

Ethernet moduleCPU Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

2 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection

6

*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system.

Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standards. To connect the target device and hub, use a cable according to the target controller configuration.

*2 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 Product manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact KEYENCE CORPORATION. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

KV-N24 KV-N40 KV-N60

KV-N1 + KV- NC1EP

Twisted pair cable*1

10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m - (Built into GOT) When PLC:GOT is N:1 The following shows the number of PLCs for 1 GOT TCP: 128 or less UDP: 128 or less TCP: 4 or less UDP: 4 or less

When PLC:GOT is 1:N The following shows the number of GOTs for 1 PLC TCP: 15 or less UDP: 1 or less

GT25-J71E71-100

KV-NC32T KV-NC1EP 100m - (Built into GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

PLC Ethernet module*3

Connection cable Maximum segment length*2

GOT Model*3 Number of connectable equipment

Series Cable model*1 Option device*4

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection 333

33

GOT side settings

Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [KEYENCE] [Controller Type]: [KEYENCE KV-700/1000/3000/5000/7000/8000] [I/F]: [Ethernet:Multi] When using the Ethernet communication unit (GT25-J71E71-100), also select [Ethernet:Multi]. [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 335 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

4 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection

6

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 336 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*2 When assigning the same driver to the multiple channels, in the communication drivers set as the second and following, the default value of [GOT Communication Port No.] becomes the earliest number in the vacant numbers of No. 6000 and later.

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting.

GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Extension port (When using GT25-W, port 2)

GOT Ethernet common setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extension port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.]

IP filter setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. Page 44 GOT Ethernet Setting

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT.

(Default: 1) 1 to 239

GOT Station*1 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 18)

1 to 254

GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. (Default: 5025*2)

1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011, 5012, 5013, and 49153 to 49170)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255sec

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000 (ms)

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection 335

33

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 335 Communication detail settings

*2 During UDP communication, if communications become unstable after a communication error due to noise, network disconnection, or power failure, use TCP communication.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed.

It refers to a station that can be connected without setting a station number. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).)

-

Net No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank)

1 to 239

Station *1 Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: blank)

1 to 254

Unit Type KEYENCE (fixed) KEYENCE (fixed)

IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 192.168.0.10)

PLC side IP address

Port No. Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 8501)

PLC side port No.

Communication*2 UDP, TCP (Default: UDP)

Adjust the settings with the PLC settings.

6 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection

6

[Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] for GT21 and GS21 Effective range of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] Only [1] to [4] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] can be used for GT21 and GS21. If [5] onwards are used, the settings are invalid on GT21 and GS21. [Host] setting Set [Host] within the range from [1] to [4] in [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting].

Only [1] to [4] can be used.

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection 337

33

PLC side setting

KEYENCE PLC For details of KEYENCE PLC, refer to the following manual. KEYENCE PLC user's Manual

Setting of KV-5000, KV-7500, and KV-8000 (built-in Ethernet) Set the communication mode, IP address and port No. by the unit editor of KV STUDIO.

*1 Apply the same setting as [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of the GOT. Page 336 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

Setting of KV-LE21V, KV-LE20V, KV-EP21V, KV-XLE02, and KV-NC1EP Set the IP address and port No. by the unit editor of KV STUDIO.

*1 Apply the same setting as [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting] of the GOT. Page 336 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting-

Item Description Range Communication mode Ethernet -

IP address*1 Set the IP address. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No.*1

(Host link) Set the port No. 256 to 65534

Item Description Range IP address*1 Set the IP address. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port No.*1

(Host link) Set the port No. 256 to 65534

8 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.3 Ethernet Connection

6

6.4 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 641 KEYENCE equipment ([KEYENCE KV-700/1000/3000/5000/7000/8000])

6 KEYENCE PLC 6.4 Settable Device Range 339

34

MEMO

0 6 KEYENCE PLC 6.4 Settable Device Range

7

7 KOYO EI PLC Page 341 Connectable Model List Page 342 System Configuration Page 358 Connection Diagram Page 364 GOT Side Settings Page 366 PLC Side Setting Page 374 Settable Device Range Page 374 Precautions

7.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 The GOT can only read the clock data.In the clock setting, though the adjust is available, the broadcast is not available.

Series Model name Clock*1 Communication Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

KOSTAC SU Series SU-5E RS232 RS422

Page 342 Connecting to SU-5E or SU-6BSU-6B

SU-5M RS232 RS422

Page 345 Connecting to SU-5M or SU-6MSU-6M

DirectLOGIC 05 Series D0-05AA RS232 RS422

Page 348 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 seriesD0-05AD

D0-05AR

D0-05DA

D0-05DD

D0-05DD-D

D0-05DR

D0-05DR-D

DirectLOGIC 06 Series D0-06DD1 RS232 RS422

Page 351 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 06 seriesD0-06DD2

D0-06DR

D0-06DA

D0-06AR

D0-06AA

D0-06DD1-D

D0-06DD2-D

D0-06DR-D

DirectLOGIC 205 Series D2-240 RS232 RS422

Page 354 Connecting to D2- 240, D2-250-1 or D2-260D2-250-1

D2-260

PZ series PZ3 RS232 RS422

Page 356 Connecting to PZ

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.1 Connectable Model List 341

34

7.2 System Configuration Connecting to SU-5E or SU-6B

When connecting to one PLC

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Host link module*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

SU-5E/6B (general communication port)

- RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 PLC for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 Page 359 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

1000m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

SU-5E/6B U-01DM RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 host link module for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 Page 360 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOTHost Link Module

Connection cable

SU-5E/6B

2 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration

7

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration 343

34

When connecting to multiple PLCs

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Host link module*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

SU-5E/6B - RS-422 Page 361 RS-422 connection diagram 5)

1000m - (Built into GOT) 90 PLCs for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

SU-5E/6B U-01DM RS-422 Page 362 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

1200m - (Built into GOT) 90 host link module for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

Host Link ModuleSU-5E/6B SU-5E/6B Host Link

Module

4 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration

7

Connecting to SU-5M or SU-6M

When connecting to one PLC

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Host link module*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

SU-5M/6M (general communication port 1)

- RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 PLC for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 Page 359 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

1000m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

SU-5M/6M (general communication port 2)

- RS-232 Z-20JP (Programmable connecting cable) + S-9CNS1(Conversion connector)*1

3m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

SU-5M/6M (general communication port 3)

- RS-422 Page 359 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

1000m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOTHost Link Module

Connection cable

SU-5M/6M

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration 345

34

*1 The programmable connecting cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

SU-5M/6M U-01DM RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 host link module for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 Page 360 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Host link module*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

6 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration

7

When connecting to multiple PLCs

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Host link module*1

Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

SU-5M/6M (general communication port 1)

- RS-422 Page 361 RS-422 connection diagram 5)

1000m - (Built into GOT) 90 PLCs for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

SU-5M/6M (general communication port 3)

- RS-422 Page 361 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

1000m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

SU-5M/6M U-01DM RS-422 Page 362 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

1200m - (Built into GOT) 90 host link module for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

SU-5M/6M SU-5M/6MHost Link Module

Host Link Module

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration 347

34

Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series

When connecting to one PLC

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Data communicati ons module*2

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distan ce

Option device*3 Model

Direct LOGIC 05 (communication port 1) (communication port 2)

- RS-232 Z-20JP (Programmable connecting cable) + S-9CNS1(Conversion connector)*1

3m - (Built into GOT) 1 PLC for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Direct LOGIC 05

D0-DCM (port 1)

RS-232 Z-20JP (Programmable connecting cable) + S-9CNS1(Conversion connector)*1

3m - (Built into GOT) 1 data communication module for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Direct LOGIC 05

D0-DCM (port 2)

RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 Page 360 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

1000m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM

8 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration

7

*1 The programmable connecting cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration 349

35

When connecting to multiple PLCs

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Data communications module*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3 Model

Direct LOGIC 05

D0-DCM (port 2)

RS-422 Page 362 RS-422 connection diagram 8)

1000m - (Built into GOT) 90 data communication module for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM DirectLOGIC 05 D0-DCM

0 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration

7

Connecting to DirectLOGIC 06 series

When connecting to one PLC

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Data communicati ons module*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distan ce

Option device*3 Model

Direct LOGIC 06 (communication port 1)

- RS-232 Z-20JP (Programmable connecting cable) + S-9CNS1(Conversion connector)*2

3m - (Built into GOT) 1 PLC for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Direct LOGIC 06 (communication port 2)

- RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

- RS-422 Page 360 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

1000m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOTD0-DCM

Connection cable

DirectLOGIC 06

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration 351

35

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 The programmable connecting cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Direct LOGIC 06

D0-DCM (port 1)

RS-232 Z-20JP (Programmable connecting cable) + S-9CNS1(Conversion connector)*2

3m - (Built into GOT) 1 data communication module for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Direct LOGIC 06

D0-DCM (port 2)

RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 Page 360 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

1000m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Data communicati ons module*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distan ce

Option device*3 Model

2 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration

7

When connecting to multiple PLCs

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Data communicati on module*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distan ce

Option device*3 Model

Direct LOGIC 06 (communication port 2)

- RS-422 Page 362 RS-422 connection diagram 8)

1000m - (Built into GOT) 90 PLCs for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

Direct LOGIC 06

D0-DCM (port 2)

RS-422 Page 362 RS-422 connection diagram 8)

1000m - (Built into GOT) 90 data communication module for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

D0-DCMDirectLOGIC 06 D0-DCMDirectLOGIC 06

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration 353

35

Connecting to D2-240, D2-250-1 or D2-260

When connecting to one PLC

*1 The programmable connecting cable and conversion connector are products manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Data communicati ons module*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distan ce

Option device*2 Model

D2-240 D2-250-1 D2-260 (communication port 2)

- RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

3m - (Built into GOT) 1 PLC for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

D2-250-1 D2-260 (communication port 2)

- RS-422 Page 360 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

1000m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

D2-240 D2-250-1 D2-260

D2-DCM RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 data communication module for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 Page 360 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOTD2-DCM

Connection cable

D2-240 D2-250-1 D2-260

4 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration

7

When connecting to multiple PLCs

*1 The data communications module is manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. For details of the product, contact KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

*2 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Data communicati ons module*1

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distan ce

Option device*3 Model

D2-250-1 D2-260 (communication port 2)

- RS-422 Page 362 RS-422 connection diagram 8)

1000m - (Built into GOT) 90 PLCs for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

D2-240 D2-250-1 D2-260

D2-DCM RS-422 Page 362 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

1200m - (Built into GOT) 90 data communication module for 1 GOT*2

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

D2-DCM D2-240 D2-250-1 D2-260

D2-DCM D2-240 D2-250-1 D2-260

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration 355

35

Connecting to PZ

When connecting to one PLC

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*1 Model

PZ (general communication port 2)

RS-232 Page 358 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 PLC for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 Page 360 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

1000m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOTPZ

Connection cable

6 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration

7

When connecting to multiple PLCs

*1 When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

PZ (general communication port 2)

RS-422 Page 362 RS-422 connection diagram 8)

1000m - (Built into GOT) 90 PLCs for 1 GOT*1

GT15-RS4-9S

KOYO KOSTAC/DL

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

PZPZ

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.2 System Configuration 357

35

7.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

*1 GT27: CD, GT23:NC *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *3 For U-01DM and D2-DCM, the signal name will be +5V.

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

*1 GT27: CD, GT23:NC *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

KOYO EI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KOYO EI PLC side. For details, refer to the KOYO EI PLC user's manual.

GOT side

CD/NC*1

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

-

TXD

RXD

RTS

0V

CTS

-*3

-

*2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

7

5

6

8 to 25

KOYO EI PLC side

GOT side

CD/NC*1

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

5V

TXD

RXD

RTS

0V

CTS

-

0V

-*2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

7

5

6

8

9 to 15

KOYO EI PLC side

8 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.3 Connection Diagram

7

RS-422 cable

Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150) to the PLC at a terminal station.

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150) to the PLC at a terminal station.

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

14

16

9

10

1 to 6

8

12

13

7

15

17

18

19

20 to 22

23

11

24, 25

+TXD

-TXD

+RXD

-RXD

-

-

-

-

SG

-

-

-RTS

+RTS

-

-CTS

+CTS

-

KOYO EI PLC side

*1

*2

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

12

13

24

25

1 to 6

8 to 11

14 to 23

-

7

+TXD3

-TXD3

+RXD3

-RXD3

-

-

-

-

SG

KOYO EI PLC side

*1

*2

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.3 Connection Diagram 359

36

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150) to the PLC at a terminal station.

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 100 to 500) to the PLC to be a terminal.

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

14

15

17

16

1to 6

8

9

18 to 21

7

10

11

12

13

22

23

24

25

+TXD

-TXD

+RXD

-RXD

-

+RTS

-RTS

-

LG

+RTS

-RTS

+CTS

-CTS

+TXD

-TXD

-RXD

+RXD

KOYO EI PLC side

*1 *2

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

9

10

13

6

1

2 to 5

8

7

11

12

14

15

+TXD

-TXD

+RXD

-RXD

5V

-

0V

0V

+RTS

-RTS

+CTS

-CTS

KOYO EI PLC side

*1

*2

0 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.3 Connection Diagram

7

RS-422 connection diagram 5)

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150) to the PLC at a terminal station.

When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150) to the PLC at a terminal station.

When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

GOT side

+TXD

-TXD

+RXD

-RXD

-

-

-

-

SG

-

-

-RTS

+RTS

-

-CTS

+CTS

-

KOYO EI PLC side

+TXD

-TXD

+RXD

-RXD

-

-

-

-

SG

-

-

-RTS

+RTS

-

-CTS

+CTS

-

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

14

16

9

10

1 to 6

8

12

13

7

15

17

18

19

20 to 22

23

11

24, 25

14

16

9

10

1 to 6

8

12

13

7

15

17

18

19

20 to 22

23

11

24, 25

KOYO EI PLC side

*2

*1 *1

GOT side

+TXD3

-TXD3

+RXD3

-RXD3

-

-

-

-

SG

KOYO EI PLC side

+TXD3

-TXD3

+RXD3

-RXD3

-

-

-

-

SG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

12

13

24

25

1 to 6

8 to 11

14 to 23

-

7

12

13

24

25

1 to 6

8 to 11

14 to 23

-

7

KOYO EI PLC side

*2

*1 *1

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.3 Connection Diagram 361

36

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 150) to the PLC at a terminal station.

When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *2 Connect a terminating resistor (approximately 100 to 500) to the PLC to be a terminal.

When the number of links exceeds 30, use a transmission line conversion unit D-01CV per 30 links. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

GOT side

+TXD

-TXD

+RXD

-RXD

-

+RTS

-RTS

-

LG

+RTS

-RTS

+CTS

-CTS

+TXD

-TXD

-RXD

+RXD

KOYO EI PLC side

+TXD

-TXD

+RXD

-RXD

-

+RTS

-RTS

-

LG

+RTS

-RTS

+CTS

-CTS

+TXD

-TXD

-RXD

+RXD

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

14

15

17

16

1 to 6

8

9

18 to 21

7

10

11

12

13

22

23

24

25

14

15

17

16

1 to 6

8

9

18 to 21

7

10

11

12

13

22

23

24

25

KOYO EI PLC side

*1 *1

*2

GOT side

+TXD

-TXD

+RXD

-RXD

5V

-

-

0V

0V

+RTS

-RTS

+CTS

-CTS

KOYO EI PLC side

+TXD

-TXD

+RXD

-RXD

5V

-

-

0V

0V

+RTS

-RTS

+CTS

-CTS

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

9

10

13

6

1

2 to 5

8

7

11

12

14

15

9

10

13

6

1

2 to 5

8

7

11

12

14

15

KOYO EI PLC side

*2

*1 *1

2 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.3 Connection Diagram

7

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The maximum length of the RS-422 cable differs according to the specifications of the KOYO EI PLC side module. For details, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

KOYO EI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the KOYO EI PLC side. For details, refer to the KOYO EI PLC user's manual.

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". For GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor selector to "330". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

KOYO EI PLC To connect a KOYO EI PLC to a GOT, a terminating resistor must be set to the KOYO EI PLC. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.3 Connection Diagram 363

36

7.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [KOYO] [Controller Type]: [KOYO KOSTAC/DL] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 365 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

4 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.4 GOT Side Settings

7

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication

with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps) 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bits)

7bits/8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit/2bits

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Odd)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 50sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

Host Address Specify the host address (station No. of the GOT to which the PLC is connected) in the connected network. (Default: 1)

1 to 90

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.4 GOT Side Settings 365

36

7.5 PLC Side Setting

KOYO EI PLC For details of KOYO EI PLCs, refer to the following manuals. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

Model name Refer to PLC CPU KOSTAC SU Series SU-5E/6B Page 367 Connecting to SU-5E/6B

SU-5M/6M Page 368 Connecting to SU-5M/6M

DirectLOGIC 05 Series DirectLOGIC 06 Series

Page 368 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series or DirectLOGIC 06 series

DirectLOGIC 205 Series Page 369 Connecting to DirectLOGIC 205 series

PZ series Page 369 Connecting to PZ Series

Host Link Module U-01DM Page 370 Connecting to U-01DM

Data Communications Module D0-DCM Page 372 Connecting to D0-DCM

D2-DCM Page 372 Connecting to D2-DCM

6 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.5 PLC Side Setting

7

Connecting to SU-5E/6B

Communication settings Make the following settings using the programmer system parameter setting.

Setting DIP switches Set the transmission speed using the CPU DIP switch.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 364 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Item Set value Station No. 1 to 90

Transmission mode HEX

Parity NONE, ODD

Data bit 8 bit (Fixation)

Stop bit 1 bit (Fixation)

Item Set value Switch No.

3 4 Transmission speed*1 9600bps ON OFF

19200bps ON ON

CPU DIP switch

O N

1 2 3 4

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.5 PLC Side Setting 367

36

Connecting to SU-5M/6M

Communication settings Make the following settings using the programmer system parameter setting.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 364 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Connecting to DirectLOGIC 05 series or DirectLOGIC 06 series

Communication settings Make the following settings using the programmer system parameter setting.

*1 To use a PLC with multidrop, set the "RTS on delay time" to 5ms or more and the "RTS off delay time" to 2ms or more. *2 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side.

Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 364 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Item Set value Protocol CCM

Response delay time 0ms

Timeout Time 800ms/960ms/1200ms/1600ms/4000ms/8000ms/16000ms/40000ms

Station No. 1 to 90

Transmission mode HEX

Stop bit 1bit, 2bits

Data bit 8bits (Fixed)

Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Item Set value Protocol CCM NET (DirectNET)

Timeout 780ms or more

RTS On Delay Time 0ms*1

RTS Off Delay Time 0ms*1

Station No. 1 to 90

Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Stop bit 1bit, 2bits

Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN

Communication format HEX

8 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.5 PLC Side Setting

7

Connecting to DirectLOGIC 205 series

Communication settings Make the following settings using the programmer system parameter setting.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 364 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Connecting to PZ Series

Communication settings Make the following settings using the programmer system parameter setting.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 364 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Item Set value Protocol CCM NET (DirectNET)

Station No. 1 to 90

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Data bit 8bits (fixed)

Stop bit 1bit (fixed)

Parity NONE, ODD

Self-diagnostic mode OFF

Response delay time 0ms

Peer to Peer OFF

Master/Slave Slave

Timeout Enable

Transmission mode HEX

MODBUS OFF

Item Set value Protocol CCM NET

Timeout 800ms/960ms/1200ms/1600ms/4000ms/8000ms/16000ms/40000ms

Response delay time 0ms

Station No. 1 to 90

Communication format HEX

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Stop bit 1bit

Parity NONE, ODD

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.5 PLC Side Setting 369

37

Connecting to U-01DM

Setting switches Make the communication settings using each setting switch.

Address selection switch(SW2, SW3)

Switch No. Settings Setting details SW2 Code higher rank (101figures) 01 to 5A

SW3 Code low rank (100figures)

Front Back

Address selection switch

Communication and the DIP switch for a setup of a protocol

CBA

9 8

7 6 5

FED

4 32

1 0

CBA

9 8

7 6 5

FED

4 32

1 0

SW3

SW2

UNIT ASR (HEX)

10

1

(H)

0 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.5 PLC Side Setting

7

Communication and the DIP switch for a setup of a protocol(SW4)

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 364 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Communication and the DIP switch for a setup of a protocol(SW5)

Setting item Set value Switch No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission speed*1 9600bps OFF ON ON

19200bps ON ON ON

38400bps OFF OFF OFF

Parity ODD ON

NONE OFF

Self-diagnostic OFF OFF

Response delay time 0ms OFF OFF OFF

Item Set value Switch No.

1 2 3 4 Peer to Peer OFF OFF

M/S Slave OFF

TOUT existence Enable OFF

ASCII/HEX HEX OFF

SW4 ON

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

SW5 ON

1 2

3 4

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.5 PLC Side Setting 371

37

Connecting to D0-DCM

Communication settings Write the following communication settings to the specified register using the programmer.For details of the register, refer to the following manual. KOYO EI PLC user's Manual

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 364 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Connecting to D2-DCM

Communication settings Make the following settings using the programmer.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 364 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Item Set value Transmission mode HEX

Protocol DirectNet

Station No. 1 to 90

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN (Only communication port 2)

RTS On Delay Time (Only communication port 2)

0ms

RTS Off Delay Time (Only communication port 2)

0ms

Timeout (Only communication port 2)

800ms/960ms/1200ms/1600ms/4000ms/8000ms/16000ms/40000ms

485 mode selection (Only communication port 2)

RS232, RS422/485 4 line type

Data bit (Only communication port 2)

8bits, 7bits

Stop bit (Only communication port 2)

1bit, 2bits

The timeout between characters (Only communication port 2)

0 to 9999ms

The completion of a setting Default use,A preset value is effective

Reset timeout Invalid,Effective

Item Set value Station No. 1 to 90

Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Data bit 8bits (fixed)

Stop bit 1bit (fixed)

Parity NONE, ODD

Self-diagnostic mode OFF

Response delay time 0ms

Peer to Peer OFF

Master/Slave Slave

Timeout Enable

Transmission mode HEX

MODBUS OFF

2 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.5 PLC Side Setting

7

Station No. settings Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Direct specification Specify the station No. of the PLC to be changed when setting device.

Specification range 1 to 90

The example of a Station No. setting

Station No.3 Station No.1 Station No.15 GOT

7 KOYO EI PLC 7.5 PLC Side Setting 373

37

7.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 647 KOYO EI equipment ([KOYO KOSTAC/DL])

7.7 Precautions

GOT clock control The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC with a calendar function. Note: Although the "time adjusting" and "time broadcast" functions can be selected on the GOT, the "time broadcast" function is not available. Do not select the "time broadcast" function. If both of the functions are selected, not only the "time broadcast" function but also the "time adjusting" function will be disabled.

4 7 KOYO EI PLC 7.6 Settable Device Range

8

8 JTEKT PLC Page 375 Connectable Model List Page 376 System Configuration Page 387 Connection Diagram Page 393 GOT Side Settings Page 395 PLC Side Setting Page 404 Settable Device Range Page 404 Precautions

8.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 Use PC3J of the version 2.1 or later.

Model name Model type Clock Communication Type

Connectable GOT

Refer to

PC3JG PC3JG-P TIC-6088 RS-232 RS-422

Page 376 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JDPC3JG TIC-6125

PC3JD PC3JD TIC-5642

PC3JD-C TIC-6029

PC3J PC3J*1 TIC-5339 RS-232 RS-422

Page 378 Connecting to PC3J

PC3JL TIC-5783

PC2J PC2J THC-2764 RS-232 RS-422

Page 380 Connecting to PC2J (PC2J, PC2JS, or PC2JR)PC2JS THC-2994

PC2JR THC-5053

PC2JC THC-5070 RS-232 RS-422

Page 382 Connecting to PC2J (PC2JC, PC2J16P, or PC2J16PR)PC2J16P THC-5169

PC2J16PR THC-5173

PC10G PC10G-CPU TCC-6353 RS-232 RS-422

Page 384 Connecting to PC10G

8 JTEKT PLC 8.1 Connectable Model List 375

37

8.2 System Configuration Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JD

For the RS-422 connection

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *3 When connecting multiple PLCs, set the same operation mode for all the PLCs.

In GT Designer3, set [Format] in [Detail Setting] according to the operation mode set for the PLCs. For details, refer to the following. Page 394 Communication detail settings

PLC*3 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Max. dista nce

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*2

Model

PC3JG PC3JD

PC3JG PC3JG-P PC3JD PC3JD-C

PC/CMP2-LINK (THU-5139)

RS-422 Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

GT09-C30R41201- 6C(3m) GT09-C100R41201- 6C(10m) GT09-C200R41201- 6C(20m) GT09-C300R41201- 6C(30m) or

Page 391 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

500m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS4-9S

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

GOTLink unit

Connection cable 2) 2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

Link unit

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

PC3JG PC3JG-P PC3JD PC3JD-C

PC3JG PC3JG-P PC3JD PC3JD-C

Connection cable 1)

6 8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration

8

For the RS-232 connection (via an interface converter)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *2 The interface converter is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION.

For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable 1) RS-232/RS-422 interface converter*2

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3

Model

PC3JG PC3JD

PC3JG PC3JG-P PC3JD PC3JD-C

- Page 389 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

PC/CMP- LINK (THU-2755) 2PORT- LINK (THU-2927)

Page 389 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

PC/CMP2- LINK (THU-5139)

Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

Link unit

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

PC3JG PC3JG-P PC3JD PC3JD-C

Link unit

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

GOT RS-232/ RS-422 Interface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

PC3JG PC3JG-P PC3JD PC3JD-C

8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration 377

37

Connecting to PC3J

For the RS-422 connection

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *3 When connecting multiple PLCs, set the same operation mode for all the PLCs.

In GT Designer3, set [Format] in [Detail Setting] according to the operation mode set for the PLCs. For details, refer to the following. Page 394 Communication detail settings

PLC*3 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Max. dista nce

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*2

Model

PC3J PC3J PC3JL

- RS-422 Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 6)

GT09-C30R41201- 6C(3m) GT09-C100R41201- 6C(10m) GT09-C200R41201- 6C(20m) GT09-C300R41201- 6C(30m) or

Page 391 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

500m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS4-9S

PC/CMP2-LINK (THU-5139)

RS-422 Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

GT09-C30R41201- 6C(3m) GT09-C100R41201- 6C(10m) GT09-C200R41201- 6C(20m) GT09-C300R41201- 6C(30m) or

Page 391 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS4-9S

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

Link unit

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

PC3J PC3JL GOT

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2) P C 3 J - C P U

BATTERY

I/F

POWER RUN ERR ALM PC2MOD PRG.2 PRG.3

L2 -

L1 -

L1 +

L1 -

ZW

L1 R-

L1 R+

L1 S-

L1 S+

4W

0V

FG

TIP-5426 1st./ 2nd./

BATTERY

START RESET

2W

4W

L1RXD L1

L1RXD L2 4W 2W

Link unit

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

PC3J PC3JL

P C 3 J - C P U

BATTERY

I/F

POWER RUN ERR ALM PC2MOD PRG.2 PRG.3

L2 -

L1 -

L1 +

L1 -

ZW

L1 R-

L1 R+

L1 S-

L1 S+

4W

0V

FG

TIP-5426 1st./ 2nd./

BATTERY

START RESET

2W

4W

L1RXD L1

L1RXD L2 4W 2W

8 8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration

8

For the RS-232 connection (via interface converter)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *2 The interface converter is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION.

For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable 1) RS-232/RS-422 interface converter*2

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Link unit*1 Cable model

Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commun ication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3

Model

PC3J PC3J PC3JL

- Page 389 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m TXU-2051 RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 5)

500m TXU-2051 RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

PC/CMP- LINK (THU-2755) 2PORT- LINK (THU-2927)

Page 389 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m TXU-2051 RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

PC/CMP2- LINK (THU-5139)

Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

500m TXU-2051 RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

GOT RS-232/ RS-422 Interface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Link unit

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

PC3J PC3JL

P C 3 J - C P U

BATTERY

I/F

POWER RUN ERR ALM PC2MOD PRG.2 PRG.3

L2 -

L1 -

L1 +

L1 -

ZW

L1 R-

L1 R+

L1 S-

L1 S+

4W

0V

FG

TIP-5426 1st./ 2nd./

BATTERY

START RESET

2W

4W

L1RXD L1

L1RXD L2 4W 2W

Link unit

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

PC3J PC3JL

P C 3 J - C P U

BATTERY

I/F

POWER RUN ERR ALM PC2MOD PRG.2 PRG.3

L2 -

L1 -

L1 +

L1 -

ZW

L1 R-

L1 R+

L1 S-

L1 S+

4W

0V

FG

TIP-5426 1st./ 2nd./

BATTERY

START RESET

2W

4W

L1RXD L1

L1RXD L2 4W 2W

8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration 379

38

Connecting to PC2J (PC2J, PC2JS, or PC2JR)

For the RS-422 connection

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION.For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Max. dista nce

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*2

Model

PC2J PC2J PC2JS PC2JR

PC/CMP2-LINK (THU-5139)

RS-422 Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

GT09-C30R41201- 6C(3m) GT09-C100R41201- 6C(10m) GT09-C200R41201- 6C(20m) GT09-C300R41201- 6C(30m) or

Page 391 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

500m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS4-9S

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

Link unit PC2J PC2JS PC2JR

GOT

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Link unit PC2J PC2JS PC2JR

0 8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration

8

For the RS-232 connection (via interface converter)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *2 The interface converter is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION.

For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable 1) RS-232/RS-422 interface converter*2

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3

Model

PC2J PC2J PC2JS PC2JR

PC/CMP- LINK (THU-2755) 2PORT- LINK (THU-2927)

Page 389 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

PC/CMP2- LINK (THU-5139)

Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

GOT RS-232/ RS-422 Interface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Link unit PC2J PC2JS PC2JR

Link unit PC2J PC2JS PC2JR

8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration 381

38

Connecting to PC2J (PC2JC, PC2J16P, or PC2J16PR)

For the RS-422 connection

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Max. dista nce

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*2

Model

PC2J PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR

PC/CMP2-LINK (THU-5139)

RS-422 Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

Page 391 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

500m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS4-9S

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

Link unit PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR

GOT

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Link unit PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR

2 8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration

8

For the RS-232 connection (via interface converter)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION. For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *2 The interface converter is a product manufactured by JTEKT CORPORATION.

For details of the product, contact JTEKT CORPORATION. *3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable 1) RS-232/RS-422 interface converter*2

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3

Model

PC2J PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR

- Page 389 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

PC/CMP- LINK (THU-2755) 2PORT- LINK (THU-2927)

Page 389 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

PC/CMP2- LINK (THU-5139)

Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

GOT RS-232/ RS-422 Interface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Link unit PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR

Link unit PC2JC PC2J16P PC2J16PR

8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration 383

38

Connecting to PC10G

For the RS-422 connection

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *3 When connecting multiple PLCs, set the same operation mode for all the PLCs.

In GT Designer3, set [Format] in [Detail Setting] according to the operation mode set for the PLCs. For details, refer to the following. Page 394 Communication detail settings

PLC*3 Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Max. dista nce

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*2

Model

PC10G PC10G- CPU

PC/CMP2-LINK (THU-5139)

RS-422 Page 390 RS-422 connection diagram 4)

GT09-C30R41201- 6C(3m) GT09-C100R41201- 6C(10m) GT09-C200R41201- 6C(20m) GT09-C300R41201- 6C(30m) or

Page 391 RS-422 connection diagram 7)

500m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS4-9S

ML10 (TCU-6903)

RS-422 Page 391 RS-422 connection diagram 9)

GT09-C30R41201- 6C(3m) GT09-C100R41201- 6C(10m) GT09-C200R41201- 6C(20m) GT09-C300R41201- 6C(30m) or

Page 392 RS-422 connection diagram 10)

500m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS4-9S

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DBC

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

PC10G

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DBC

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

PC10G GOTLink unit Link unit

Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 1)

4 8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration

8

For the RS-232 connection (via an interface converter)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.

*2 The interface converter is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.

*3 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable 1) RS-232/RS-422 interface converter*2

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*3

Model

PC10G PC10G- CPU

- Page 389 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

32 PLCs for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

PC/CMP- LINK (THU-2755) 2PORT- LINK (THU-2927)

Page 389 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

ML10 (TCU-6903)

Page 391 RS-422 connection diagram 8)

500m TXU- 2051

RS-232 GT09- C30R21201- 25P(3m) or

Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

Link unit

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

PC10G Link unit

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

GOT RS-232/ RS-422 Interface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

PC10G

8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration 385

38

For the RS-232 connection (via link unit)

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by JTEKT Corporation. For details of the product, contact JTEKT Corporation.

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable 1) Max. distance

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Link unit*1 Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*2

Model

PC10G PC10G-CPU ML10 (TCU-6903)

RS-232 Page 387 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 PLC for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC

Communication driver

SEL 8 2

4 1

A B

A

L(+)

L(-) SD

RD 0V 0V FG

ML10

S/R C.ERR P.ERR

B

L(+)

L(-) SD

RD 0V 0V FG

RS 232

RS 422

Connection cable 1)

Link unitPC10G GOT

6 8 JTEKT PLC 8.2 System Configuration

8

8.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

*1 When using communication port B of the ML10, use the following terminal numbers.

Signal name Terminal No. SD 13

RD 15

0V 17

FG 18

JTEKT PLC side (RS-232/RS-422

Interface converter)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

GOT side

1

3

2

4

7

-

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

FG

FG

RD

TD

RS

0V

GOT side

-

FG

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

1 1

2

3

3

4

5

5

6

7

7

8

9

8

9

-

FG

NC

SD

NC

0V

RD

Link unit side (communication port A)*1

8 JTEKT PLC 8.3 Connection Diagram 387

38

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

JTEKT PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the JTEKT PLC side module. For details, refer to the JTEKT PLC user's manual.

8 8 JTEKT PLC 8.3 Connection Diagram

8

RS-422 cable

Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1) (For PC3JG-P/PC3JG/PC3JD/PC3JD-C)

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

(For PC3J/PC3JL)

*3 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. *4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

(For PC2JC/PC2J16P, PC2J16PR)

*5 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. *6 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

PLC side*1 RS-232/RS-422

interface converter

L1+

L1-

0V

L1+

L1-

0V

RD(+)

RD(-)

0V

FG

PLC side*1

*2*2

PLC side*3 RS-232/RS-422

interface converter

RD(+)

RD(-)

0V

FG

L1+

L1-

0V

FG

L1+

L1-

0V

FG

PLC side*3

*4*4

PLC side*5 RS-232/RS-422

interface converter

RD(+)

RD(-)

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

PLC side*5

*6*6

Link unit side*1 RS-232/RS-422

interface converter

RD(+)

RD(-)

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

Link unit side*1*1

*2*2

8 JTEKT PLC 8.3 Connection Diagram 389

39

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS-422 connection diagram 4)

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS-422 connection diagram 5)

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS-422 connection diagram 6)

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

Link unit side*1 RS-232/RS-422

interface converter

RD(+)

RD(-)

TD(+)

TD(-)

0V

FG

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

Link unit side*1*1

*2*2

Link unit side*1

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

Link unit side*1 Link unit side*1

*2 *2

PLC side*1 RS-232/RS-422

interface converter

RD(+)

RD(-)

TD(+)

TD(-)

0V

FG

L1S+

L1S-

L1R+

L1R-

0V

FG

L1S+

L1S-

L1R+

L1R-

0V

FG

PLC side*1

*2*2

*1

PLC side*1

L1S+

L1S-

L1R+

L1R-

0V

FG

L1S+

L1S-

L1R+

L1R-

0V

FG

L1S+

L1S-

L1R+

L1R-

0V

FG

PLC side*1 PLC side*1

*2 *2

0 8 JTEKT PLC 8.3 Connection Diagram

8

RS-422 connection diagram 7)

*1 Terminating resistors should not be provided for a PLC and an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be terminals. *2 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal.

Page 392 Connecting terminating resistors *3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS-422 connection diagram 8)

*1 Do not provide terminating resistors for the link unit and RS-232/RS-422 interface converter which will be the terminals. *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS-422 connection diagram 9)

*1 Do not provide terminating resistors for the terminal link units. *2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *3 Connect the cable to the terminal of communication port A. *4 Connect the cable to the terminal of communication port B.

L1S+

L1S-

L1R+

L1R-

0V

FG

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

GOT side*2 PLC side*1 Link unit

side

2

7

1

6

5

3

4

8

9

-

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

FG

*1

*3

+

-

0V

FG

L(+)

L(-)

0V

FG

L(+)

L(-)

0V

FGFG

Link unit side*1 RS-232/RS-422

interface converter*1

RD(+)

RD(-)

0V

FG

Link unit side*1

*2*2

0V

-

+

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

L(+)*3

L(-)*3

L(+)*4

L(-)*4

0V

FG

*2 *2

L(+)*3

L(-)*3

L(+)*4

L(-)*4

0V

FG FG

L(+)*3

L(-)*3

L(+)*4

L(-)*4

0V

FG

Link unit side*1 Link unit side*1 Link unit side*1

8 JTEKT PLC 8.3 Connection Diagram 391

39

RS-422 connection diagram 10)

*1 Do not provide a terminating resistor for the terminal link unit. *2 Set the terminating resistor settings on the terminal GOT.

Page 392 Connecting terminating resistors *3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *4 Connect the cable to the terminal of communication port A. *5 Connect the cable to the terminal of communication port B.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The maximum length of the RS-422 cable must be 500m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

JTEKT PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the JTEKT PLC side module. For details, refer to the JTEKT PLC user's manual.

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". For GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor selector to "330". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

2

7

1

6

5

3

4

8

9

-

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

FG

*3

L(+)*4

L(-)*4

L(+)*5

L(-)*5

0V

FG

Link unit side*1GOT side*2

2 8 JTEKT PLC 8.3 Connection Diagram

8

8.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [JTEKT] [Controller Type]: [JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 394 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

8 JTEKT PLC 8.4 GOT Side Settings 393

39

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 When using an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter, set 19200 bps or less for [Transmission Speed(BPS)].

Format setting The compatible format of PLC differs depending on model.

For details of PC3J extended function, refer to the following manual. JTEKT PLC user's manual Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed*1 Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with

the connected equipment. (Default: 19200bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bits)

7bits/8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit)

1bit/2bits

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 30sec

Host Address Specify the host address (station No. of the GOT to which the PLC is connected) in the connected network. (Default: 00)

00 to 37 (Octal)

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0)

0 to 300ms

Format Select the communication format. (Default: 1) format 1: PC3J extended function incompliant format 2: PC3J extended function compliant

1/2

Model name Compatible format

Format 1 onlyPC2J, PC2JS, PC2JR, PC2JC, PC2J16P, PC2J16PR

Format 1 or Format 2PC3JG, PC3JG-P, PC3JD, PC3JD-C, PC3J, PC3JL, PC10G

4 8 JTEKT PLC 8.4 GOT Side Settings

8

8.5 PLC Side Setting

JTEKT PLC For details of JTEKT PLCs, refer to the following manuals. JTEKT PLC user's manual

Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JD, PC2J (PC2J, PC2JS, or PC2JR), or PC10G

Communication settings The following shows the communication settings to connect the GOT and a PLC through an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter. Configure the communication settings using the PLC peripheral device (PCwin).

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 When using an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter, set 19200 bps or less for the transmission speed. The value must be the same as

the value set for the RS-232/RS-422 interface converter. *3 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *4 Make the settings referring to the following connection diagram.

Page 389 RS-422 cable

Model name Refer to PLC CPU PC3JG, PC3JG-P, PC3JD, PC3JD-C, PC2J,

PC2JS, PC2JR, PC10G-CPU Page 395 Connecting to PC3JG, PC3JD, PC2J (PC2J, PC2JS, or PC2JR), or PC10G

PC3J, PC3JL Page 396 Connecting to PC3J

PC2JC Page 397 Connecting to PC2JC

PC2J16P, PC2J16PR Page 398 Connecting to PC2J16P or PC2J16PR

RS-232/RS-422 interface converter RS-232/RS-422 interface converter Page 399 RS-232/RS-422 interface converter setting

Link unit PC/CMP-LINK Page 400 PC/CMP-LINK, 2PORT-LINK, or PC/CMP2- LINK settings2PORT-LINK

PC/CMP2-LINK

ML10 Page 402 ML10 settings

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 Connection via interface converter*2 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits

Parity bit Even (fixed)

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Station No.*3 0 to 37 (Octal)

2-wire/4-wire type*4 2-wire type or 4-wire type

8 JTEKT PLC 8.5 PLC Side Setting 395

39

Connecting to PC3J

Communication settings The following shows the communication settings to connect the GOT and a PLC directly or through an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter. Configure the communication settings using the PLC peripheral device (PCwin).

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 When using an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter, set 19200 bps or less for the transmission speed. The value must be the same as

the value set for the RS-232/RS-422 interface converter. *3 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *4 Make the settings referring to the following connection diagram.

Page 389 RS-422 cable

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 Direct connection 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Connection via interface converter*2 9600bps, 19200bps,

Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits

Parity bit Even (fixed)

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Station No.*3 0 to 37 (Octal)

2-wire/4-wire type*4 2-wire type or 4-wire type

6 8 JTEKT PLC 8.5 PLC Side Setting

8

Connecting to PC2JC

Communication settings Make the communication settings using each setting switch. For the detail settings, refer to the following manual. JTEKT PLC user's manual

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting switch.

Setting of the station No. Set the station No. between 00 and 37 (Octal).

Transmission speed settings

Settings of data length and stop bit length

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Station No.*1 0 to 37 (Octal)

Switch name Station number setting SW3 Upper digit

SW4 Lower digit

Switch name Switch position Transmission speed (bps) SW2 1 19200

2 9600

Switch name Setting item Set value Switch No.

2 1 SW5 Data bit 8bits OFF

7bits ON

Stop bit length 2bits OFF

1bit ON

A 6

D B

C 4

8

F 10

E 2

9 7

3 5

A 6

D B

C 4

8

F 10

E 2

9 7

3 5

A 6

D B

C 4

8

F 10

E 2

9 7

3 5

ST.NO.H

ST.NO.L

BAUDRA

P O W E R

E R R

A L M

R U N R E S E T

S T A R T

W R E M R O M

P C 2 J C C P U

I / F

1st. 2nd. 3rd.

/ /

/ /

B A T T E R Y Exchanged

T E R M

.

.

.

Transmission speed setting switch SW2

Station number switch SW3, SW4

Data length,stop bit length SW5

8 JTEKT PLC 8.5 PLC Side Setting 397

39

Connecting to PC2J16P or PC2J16PR

Communication settings Make the communication settings using each setting switch. For the detail settings, refer to the following manual. JTEKT PLC user's manual

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting switch.

Setting of the station No. Set the station No. between 00 and 37 (Octal).

Transmission speed settings

Settings of data length, stop bit length and module type

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Station No.*1 0 to 37 (Octal)

Selection of module type Computer link

Switch name Station number setting SW2 Upper digit

SW3 Lower digit

Switch name Switch position Transmission speed (bps) SW4 1 19200

2 9600

Switch name Setting item Set value Switch No.

4 3 2 SW5 Data bit 8bits OFF

7bits ON

Stop bit length 2bits OFF

1bit ON

Module type Computer link OFF

P O W E R

E R R

A L M

R U N R E S E T

S T A R T

W R E M R O M

P C 2 J 1 6 C P U

I / F

1st. 2nd. 3rd.

/ /

/ /

B A T T E R Y

Exchanged

T E R M

.

.

.

Data length, stop bit length and module type setting switches SW 5

Station number switch SW2, SW3

Transmission speed setting switch SW4

SW2 SW3 SW4

SW5 3 2 14

SET

ON

OFF

A 6

D B

C 4

8

F 10

E 2

9 7

3 5

A 6

D B

C 4

8

F 10

E 2

9 7

3 5

A 6

D B

C 4

8

F 10

E 2

9 7 3

5

8 8 JTEKT PLC 8.5 PLC Side Setting

8

RS-232/RS-422 interface converter setting

Communication settings Make the communication settings by the setting switch of the RS-232/RS-422 interface converter.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Set referring to the RS-422 connection diagram.For details, refer to the following.

Page 389 RS-422 cable

Settings by switch Make the communication settings by each setting switch of the RS-232/RS-422 interface converter.

Transmission speed settings

Mode setting switch

Echoback setting switch

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

2-wire/4-wire type*2 2-wire type or 4-wire type

Echo back OFF

Transmission speed (bps) Switch position 9600 2

19200 1

Mode Switch position 2-wire type 2W-AUTO

4-wire type 4 WIRES

Setting Switch position OFF OFF

R S

2 3

2 C

C O N N E C T I O N 2 W I R E S , 2 W - A U T O

4 W I R E S

FG

TD

RS

RD

0V

FG

TD

RS

RD

0V

1

2

4

3

7

1

2

4

3

7

TM

AUTO

TD

RD

TD

RD

FG

(-)

(-) (-)

(+)

(+) (+)

0V

FG

(-)

(-)

(+)

(+)

0V

0V

L

R D

T D (-)

(-)

(+)

(+)

0V 0

5643 7 82 1 9

B A U D R A T E

2WIRES

4WIRES

2W-AUTO

O N

OFF ECHO BACK

P O W E R R DT D R S

T O Y O D A M A C H I N E W O R K S , L T D

N o . BAUD RATE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps 1200 bps

600 bps 300 bps

RS 232C/RS 422 CONVERTER

TXU 2051 P O

W E

R

O FF

FG TD

R D

(+ )

(+ )

(- )

(- )

0V O

N

R S

4 22

0

5643 7 82 1 9

B A U D R A T E

2WIRES

4WIRES

2W-AUTO

ON

OFF ECHO BACK

8 JTEKT PLC 8.5 PLC Side Setting 399

40

PC/CMP-LINK, 2PORT-LINK, or PC/CMP2-LINK settings

Communication settings Make the communication settings using each setting switch of the link unit. For the detail settings, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the JTEKT link unit

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Set referring to the RS-422 connection diagram.For details, refer to the following.

Page 389 RS-422 cable

Settings by switch

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Station No.*1 0 to 37 (Octal)

Selection of module type Computer link

Selection of 2-wire type or 4- wire type*2 2-wire type or 4-wire type

Transmission speed setting switch

(Model PC/CMP-LINK)

Station number switch

Data length, stop bit length and module type setting switches

P C / C M P - L I N K

T X D R X D

ERR CODE

SW1

SW2

SW3 SW4-4 SW4-3 SW4-2 SW4-1

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

LT

+

-

0V

FG

Transmission speed setting switch

(Model PC/CMP2-LINK)

P C / C M P 2 - L I N K T X D R X D

E R R C O D E

SW1

SW2

SW3 SW4-4 SW4-3 SW4-2 SW4-1

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

S+

S-

R+

R-

0V

FG

Station number switch

Data length, stop bit length, module type and 2-wire/4-wire selection setting switches

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

SW

SW SW SW

SW SW

SW4ASW4B

Station number switch

Data length, stop bit length and module type setting switches

Transmission speed setting switch

(Model 2PORT-LINK)

0 8 JTEKT PLC 8.5 PLC Side Setting

8

Setting of the station No. Set the station No. between 00 and 37 (Octal).

Transmission speed settings The settings must be consistent with the GOT settings.

Data length, stop bit length, module type and 2-wire/4-wire type communication selection setting

*1 Set to ON (computer link) when connecting the GOT. *2 The setting is available only for the link unit (Model: PC/CMP2-LINK).

Switch name Station number setting SW1 Upper digit

SW2 Lower digit

Switch name Switch position Transmission speed (bps) SW3 2 9600

1 19200

Switch name Setting item Set value Switch No.

4 3 2 1 SW4 Data bit 8bits OFF

7bits ON

Stop bit length 2bits OFF

1bit ON

Module type*1 PC link OFF

Computer link ON

2-wire type/4- wire type communication selection*2

2-wire type communication OFF

4-wire type communication ON

8 JTEKT PLC 8.5 PLC Side Setting 401

40

ML10 settings

Communication settings Make the communication settings using each setting switch of the link unit. For the detail settings, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the JTEKT link unit

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 When using an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter, set 19200 bps or less for the transmission speed. The value must be the same as

the value set for the RS-232/RS-422 interface converter. *3 Set referring to the RS-422 connection diagram.For details, refer to the following.

Page 389 RS-422 cable

Settings by switch

Function selection switch (SEL) Configure the communication function settings for communication port A and B.

*1 Set SW4A and SW4B to the computer link when connecting the GOT. When setting the value of the SEL to 8 to E, also set the unused communication port to the computer link.

Item Set value Transmission speed*1*2 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data bit*1 8bits, 7bits

Stop bit*1 1bit, 2bits

Station No.*1 0 to 37 (Octal)

Port function Computer link

Selection of 2-wire type or 4- wire type*3 2-wire type or 4-wire type

SEL Function 2-wire type/ 4-wire type

Detail setting switch to be used

Communication port A Communication port B 0 PC link, computer link*1 - 2-wire type SW1A to SW4A

1 PC link, computer link (send)*1 PC link, computer link (receive)*1 4-wire type SW1A to SW4A

8 to E PC link, computer link*1 PC link, computer link*1 2-wire type Communication port A setting: SW1A to SW4A Communication port B setting: SW1A to SW4A

0FED C B A 9 876

5 43

21 0FED C B A 9 876

5 43

21 0FED C B A 9 876

5 43

21

0FED C B A 9 876

5 43

21

SW1A SW2A SW3A SW4A

0FED C B A 9 876

5 43

21 0FED C B A 9 876

5 43

21 0FED C B A 9 876

5 43

21

SW1B SW2B SW3B SW4B Detail setting switches (SW1A to SW4B)

Function selection switch (SEL)

SEL 8 2

4 1

A B

A

L(+)

L(-) SD

RD 0V 0V FG

ML10

S/R C.ERR P.ERR

B

L(+)

L(-) SD

RD 0V 0V FG

RS 232

RS 422

2 8 JTEKT PLC 8.5 PLC Side Setting

8

Detail setting switches (SW1A to SW4B) Setting of the station No. Set the station No. between 00 and 37 (Octal).

Transmission speed settings The settings must be consistent with the GOT settings.

*1 When using an RS-232/RS-422 interface converter, set 19200 bps or less for the transmission speed. The value must be the same as the value set for the RS-232/RS-422 interface converter.

Data length, stop bit length, port function, and 2-wire type/4-wire type settings

*1 Set to ON (computer link) when connecting the GOT.

Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Direct specification Specify the station No. of the PLC to be changed when setting device.

Switch name Station number setting

Communication port A or 4-wire type Communication port B SW1A SW1B Upper digit

SW2A SW2B Lower digit

Switch name Switch position Transmission speed (bps)*1

Communication port A or 4-wire type Communication port B SW3A SW3B 0 57600

1 19200

2 9600

A 38400

B 115200

Switch name Setting item Set value Switch No.

Communication port A or 4-wire type

Communication port B 4 3 2 1

SW4A SW4B Data length 8bits OFF

7bits ON

Stop bit length 2bits OFF

1bit ON

Port function*1 PC link OFF

Computer link ON

2-wire type/4-wire type 2-wire type OFF

4-wire type ON

Specification range 00 to 37 (Octal)

Station No.3

Station No.0

Station No.1

Station No.15

Station No.6

Examples of station number setting

GOT

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

2 P O R T - L I N K

TXDA TXDB RXDA RXDB ERRA ERRB

A 6

DB C

4

8

F 1

0

E

2

9 7

35

+

-

0V

FG

+

-

0V

FG

A

B

8 JTEKT PLC 8.5 PLC Side Setting 403

40

8.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 652 JTEKT equipment ([JTEKT TOYOPUC-PC])

8.7 Precautions

Station No. settings of the PLC side In the system configuration, the PLC with the station number set with the host address must be included.For details of host address setting, refer to the following. Page 393 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

GOT clock control The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC with the station number set with the host address. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. Page 393 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

System configuration If the system is configured by mixing the PC3J extended function compliant PLC with the PC3J extended function incompliant PLC, normal communication may not be performed.Unify the PLCs into PC3J extended function compliant or PC3J extended function incompliant to configure the system.

System alarm The system alarm can be displayed only for the PLC set with a host address.When connected to the PC3J extended function compliant PLC, only the system alarm of program No. 1 can be displayed.

4 8 JTEKT PLC 8.6 Settable Device Range

9

9 SHARP PLC Page 405 Connectable Model List Page 406 System Configuration Page 410 Connection Diagram Page 413 GOT Side Settings Page 415 PLC Side Setting Page 422 Settable Device Range

9.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 When the link unit (ZW-10CM) is used in JW-70CUH/100CUH, the clock function is not available.

Model name Clock Communication Type Connectable GOT Refer to JW-21CU RS-422 Page 406 Connecting to JW-21CU or

JW-22CUJW-22CU RS-232 RS-422

JW-31CUH RS-422 Page 407 Connecting to JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH or JW-33CUHJW-32CUH RS-232

RS-422JW-33CUH

JW-50CUH RS-422 Page 408 Connecting to JW-50CUH, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH, or JW-100CUJW-70CUH *1 RS-232

RS-422JW-100CUH *1

JW-100CU

Z-512J RS-232 RS-422

Page 409 Connecting to Z-512J

9 SHARP PLC 9.1 Connectable Model List 405

40

9.2 System Configuration Connecting to JW-21CU or JW-22CU

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by SHARP Corporation. For details of this product, contact SHARP Corporation.

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *3 Up to two GOTs in the system configuration have been validated by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

PLC Connection cable Max. distance GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Link unit*1 Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*2 Model

JW-22CU - RS-232 GT09-C30R20601-15P(3m) or

Page 410 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT09-C30R40601-15P(3m) GT09-C100R40601-15P(10m) GT09-C200R40601-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40601-15P(30m) or

Page 411 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

JW-21CU JW-22CU

JW-21CM RS-422 GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m) GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m) GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m) GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m) or

Page 411 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 link unit*3

GT15-RS4-9S

SHARP JW

Communication driver

GOTLink unit

Connection cable

JW-21CU JW-22CU

6 9 SHARP PLC 9.2 System Configuration

9

Connecting to JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH or JW-33CUH

*1 Use the link unit supporting JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH or JW-33CUH. The link unit is a product manufactured by SHARP Corporation. For details of this product, contact SHARP Corporation.

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *3 Up to two GOTs in the system configuration have been validated by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

PLC Connection cable Max. distance GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Link unit*1 Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*2 Model

JW-32CUH JW-33CUH

- RS-232 GT09-C30R20602-15P(3m) or

Page 410 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 GT09-C30R40602-15P(3m) GT09-C100R40602-15P(10m) GT09-C200R40602-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40602-15P(30m) or

Page 411 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

JW-31CUH JW-32CUH JW-33CUH

JW-21CM RS-422 GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m) GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m) GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m) GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m) or

Page 411 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 link unit*3

GT15-RS4-9S

SHARP JW

Communication driver

GOTLink unit

Connection cable

JW-31CUH JW-32CUH JW-33CUH

9 SHARP PLC 9.2 System Configuration 407

40

Connecting to JW-50CUH, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH, or JW-100CU

*1 The link unit is a product manufactured by SHARP Corporation. For details of this product, contact SHARP Corporation.

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *3 Up to two GOTs in the system configuration have been validated by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

PLC Connection cable Max. distance GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Link unit*1 Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*2 Model

JW-70CUH JW-100CUH JW-100CU

- RS-232 GT09-C30R20601-15P(3m) or

Page 410 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 GT09-C30R40601-15P(3m) GT09-C100R40601-15P(10m) GT09-C200R40601-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40601-15P(30m) or

Page 411 RS-422 connection diagram 1)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

JW-50CUH JW-70CUH JW-100CUH JW-100CU

JW-10CM ZW-10CM

RS-422 GT09-C30R40603-6T(3m) GT09-C100R40603-6T(10m) GT09-C200R40603-6T(20m) GT09-C300R40603-6T(30m) or

Page 411 RS-422 connection diagram 3)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 link unit*3

GT15-RS4-9S

SHARP JW

Communication driver

GOTLink unit

Connection cable

JW-50CUH JW-70CUH JW-100CUH JW-100CU

8 9 SHARP PLC 9.2 System Configuration

9

Connecting to Z-512J

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable Max. distance GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*1 Model

Z-512J RS-232 GT09-C30R20602-15P(3m) or

Page 410 RS-232 connection diagram 2)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 GT09-C30R40602-15P(3m) GT09-C100R40602-15P(10m) GT09-C200R40602-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40602-15P(30m) or

Page 411 RS-422 connection diagram 2)

Differs according to PLC side specifications.

- (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

SHARP JW

Communication driver

GOTZ-512J

Connection cable

9 SHARP PLC 9.2 System Configuration 409

41

9.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

*1 GT27: CD, GT23: NC

RS-232 connection diagram 2)

*1 GT27: CD, GT23: NC

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The maximum length of the RS-232 cable differs according to the specifications of the SHARP PLC. For details, refer to the following manual. SHARP PLC user's Manual

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

SHARP PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the SHARP PLC side module. For details, refer to the SHARP PLC user's manual.

GOT side SHARP PLC side

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

5

7

4

12

14

FG

TXD

RXD

CTS

SG

RTS

-

-

GOT side SHARP PLC side

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

4

12

7

8

FG

SD

RD

CTS

SG

RTS

0 9 SHARP PLC 9.3 Connection Diagram

9

RS-422 cable

Connection diagram RS-422 connection diagram 1)

*1 Connect the terminating resistor at pin 6 with pin 13 (RXD) only at the terminal station. (Valid for JW-70CUH and JW-100CUH. The terminating resistor does not exist in JW-22CU and JW-100CU.)

RS-422 connection diagram 2)

RS-422 connection diagram 3)

*1 Two SHIELD terminals are provided for JW-10CM and ZW-10CM.Connect to either SHIELD terminal.

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

10

11

12

13

6

7

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

TXD(SD(+))

TXD(SD(-))

RXD(RD(+))

RXD(RD(-))

*1

SG

Terminating resistor

SHARP PLC side

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

3

11

9

10

6

7

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

SD(+)

SD(-)

RD(+)

RD(-)

SG

SG

SHARP PLC side

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

SD(+)

SD(-)

RD(+)

RD(-)

SHARP PLC side

L1

L2

L3

L4

SHIELD*1

9 SHARP PLC 9.3 Connection Diagram 411

41

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The maximum length of the RS-422 cable differs according to the specifications of the SHARP PLC. For details, refer to the following manual. SHARP PLC user's Manual

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

SHARP PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the SHARP PLC side module. For details, refer to the SHARP PLC user's manual.

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". For GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor selector to "330". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

SHARP PLC side Connect the terminating resistor on the SHARP PLC side when connecting a GOT to a SHARP PLC. The PLC CPUs and the modules on the PLC CPU side requiring a terminating resistor are shown below. JW-22CU Turn "ON" the terminating resistor setting switch (SW1) on the back of JW-22CU to validate the terminating resistor. JW-70CUH and JW-100CUH Connect the pin 6 (terminating resistor) of the communication port connection connector with the pin 13 (RXD) only at the terminal station to validate the terminating resistor. JW-21CM, JW-10CM and ZW-10CM Turn "ON" the terminator switch (SW7) on the front panel only at the terminal station to validate the terminating resistor.

2 9 SHARP PLC 9.3 Connection Diagram

9

9.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [SHARP] [Controller Type]: [SHARP JW] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 414 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

9 SHARP PLC 9.4 GOT Side Settings 413

41

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 When connecting to the communication port or link module, set [Delay Time] of the GOT side to 30 ms or more.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected

equipment. (Default: 19200bps)

4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 7bits)

7bit (fixed)

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 2bit)

2bit (fixed)

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

Even (fixed)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 30sec

Timeout Time*1 Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300ms

4 9 SHARP PLC 9.4 GOT Side Settings

9

9.5 PLC Side Setting

SHARP PLC For details of the SHARP PLC, refer to the following manual. SHARP PLC user's Manual

Model name Refer to PLC CPU JW-22CU Page 416 Connecting to JW-22CU, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU

JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH Page 417 Connecting to JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH or Z-512J

JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH, JW-100CU Page 416 Connecting to JW-22CU, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU

Z-512J Page 417 Connecting to JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH or Z-512J

Link unit JW-21CM Page 418 Connecting to the link unit (JW-21CM)

JW-10CM, ZW-10CM Page 420 Connecting to the link unit (JW-10CM or ZW-10CM)

9 SHARP PLC 9.5 PLC Side Setting 415

41

Connecting to JW-22CU, JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH or JW-100CU

System memory setting Set the system memory.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. *2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 413 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Terminating resistor setting switch (For JW-22CU only) Set the terminating resistor setting switch.

When using KV-L20R or KV-L20

System memory No. Item Set value #236 Transmission speed, parity and stop bit

#237 Station No. 1: Station No. 1 (fixed)

Settings For RS-232 communication RS-422 communication

OFF (no terminating resistor) ON (terminating resistor attached)

*1 *2

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 to D0

0 0 (3) (2) (1)

(1)

(2)

(3)

Transmission speed 000: 19200bps 001: 9600bps 010: 4800bps

Parity 10 (fixed): Even

1 (fixed): 2 bits Stop bit

terminator switch(SW1)

ON OFF

6 9 SHARP PLC 9.5 PLC Side Setting

9

Connecting to JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH or Z-512J

Settings for connecting to communication port 1 (PG/COMM1 port) Set the system memory.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. *2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 413 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Settings for connecting to communication port 2 (PG/COMM2 port) Set the system memory.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. *2 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 413 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

System memory No. Item Set value #234 Transmission speed, parity and stop bit

#235 Station No. 1: Station No. 1 (fixed)

System memory No. Item Set value #236 Transmission speed, parity and stop bit

#237 Station No. 1: Station No. 1 (fixed)

*1 *2

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D0

0 0 (3) (2) (1)

(1)

(2)

(3)

Transmission speed 000: 19200bps 001: 9600bps 010: 4800bps

Parity 10 (fixed): Even

1 (fixed): 2 bits Stop bit

to

*1 *2

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D0

0 0 (3) (2) (1)

(1)

(2)

(3)

Transmission speed 000: 19200bps 001: 9600bps 010: 4800bps

Parity 10 (fixed): Even

1 (fixed): 2 bits Stop bit

to

9 SHARP PLC 9.5 PLC Side Setting 417

41

Connecting to the link unit (JW-21CM)

Switch setting of the link unit (JW-21CM) Make setting for each switch.

Module No. switch (SW8) The module No. switch is not used for communication with the GOT.

Terminator switch(SW7)

*1 Turn on only for the terminal station.

Station number setting switch(SW1,SW2)

Settings Setting details ON*1 Terminating resistor validated

Switch No. Settings Setting details SW1 Station No. lower digit

(100 digit) 1 (fixed)

SW2 Station No. upper digit (101 digit)

0 (fixed)

UNIT No.

LT

ON

OFF

125 4 3

09876

125 4 3

09876

125 4 3

09

876

S W

4 S

W 0

S W

3

1 2

3 4

O N

O FF

CBA

9 8

7 6 5

FED

4 32

1 0

CBA

9 8

7 6 5

FED

4 32

1 0

STA No.

10

STA No.

1SHIELD

UNIT No.

CM 30 RO

80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1

JW-21CM

TERF

L1

L2

L3

L4

FG

Inside the front panel

(3)

(5)

(6)

(1)

(4)

(2)

A

Side view indicated by A

LT

ON

OFF 125 4 3

09876

125 4 3

09876 STA No.

STA No.

1

10

8 9 SHARP PLC 9.5 PLC Side Setting

9

Operation mode setting switch(SW3)

Transmission speed setting switch (SW4) Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 413 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side.

Function setting switch(SW0)

Switch No. Settings Setting details SW3-1 OFF (fixed) Invalid

SW3-2 ON (fixed) 4-wire type

SW3-3 OFF (fixed) Invalid

SW3-4 ON (fixed) Even

Setting*1 Setting details 0 19200bps

1 9600bps

2 4800bps

Settings Setting details 4 (fixed) Computer link

S W

3

1 2

3 4

O N

O FF

S W

4

CBA

9 8

7 6 5

FED

4 32

1 0

S W

0

CBA

9 8

7 6 5

FED

4 32

1 0

9 SHARP PLC 9.5 PLC Side Setting 419

42

Connecting to the link unit (JW-10CM or ZW-10CM)

Switch setting of link unit (JW-10CM and ZW-10CM)

Function setting switch(SW0)

Station number switch(SW1,SW2)

Operation mode setting switch(SW3)

Settings Setting details 4 (fixed) Computer link (command mode)

Switch No. Settings Setting details SW1 Station No. lower digit (100 digit) 1 (fixed)

SW2 Station No. upper digit (101 digit) 0 (fixed)

Switch No. Settings Setting details SW3-1 OFF (fixed) Invalid

SW3-2 ON (fixed) 4-wire type

SW3-3 OFF (fixed) Invalid

SW3-4 ON (fixed) Even

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

4

SW1

SW2

SW0

SW4

SW3

SW7

3

2 1

ON

OFF

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

ON

Inside the cover of switch setting

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1SW0

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1

SW1

SW2

4

SW3 3

2 1ON

0 9 SHARP PLC 9.5 PLC Side Setting

9

Transmission speed setting switch (SW4) Set the same transmission speed of the GOT. For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 413 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side.

Terminator switch(SW7)

*1 Set to ON only for the terminal station.

Setting*1 Setting details 0 19200bps

1 9600bps

2 4800bps

Settings Setting details ON*2 Terminating resistor validated

3 2

05

9

4

87

6

1SW4

SW7 ON

OFF

9 SHARP PLC 9.5 PLC Side Setting 421

42

9.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 657 SHARP equipment ([SHARP JW])

9.7 Precautions

Connecting to the communication port or link module When connecting to the communication port or link module, 30 ms or more is required for the send delay time. In the communication detail settings, set [Delay Time] to 30 ms or more. If a communication timeout error occurs even when [Delay Time] is set to 30 ms or more, adjust the following settings so that no communication timeout error occurs. [Retry] [Startup Time] [Timeout Time] For details on each setting, refer to the following. Page 414 Communication detail settings

2 9 SHARP PLC 9.6 Settable Device Range

10

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER Page 423 Connectable Model List Page 425 System Configuration Page 430 Connection Diagram Page 438 GOT Side Settings Page 440 Indicating Controller Side Setting Page 442 Settable Device Range Page 442 Precautions

10.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

ACS-13A Series ACS-13A/,,C5*2 RS-232 RS-485

Page 425 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC-900, ACD- 13A, ACR-13A, or BC2

JC Series JCS-33A-/,C5*2 RS-232 RS-485

Page 425 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC-900, ACD- 13A, ACR-13A, or BC2

JCR-33A-/,C5*2

JCD-33A-/,C5*2

JCM-33A Series JCM-33A/,C5*2 RS-232 RS-485

Page 425 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC-900, ACD- 13A, ACR-13A, or BC2

JIR-301-M Series JIR-301-M,C5*2 RS-232 RS-485

Page 425 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC-900, ACD- 13A, ACR-13A, or BC2

PCD-300 Series PCD-33A-/M,C5*2 RS-232 RS-485

Page 425 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC-900, ACD- 13A, ACR-13A, or BC2

PC-900 Series PC935-/M,C5*2 RS-232 RS-485

Page 425 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC-900, ACD- 13A, ACR-13A, or BC2

PC955-/M,C5*2

PC935-/M,C*1 RS-232 Page 427 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- 100, FCR-23A, FIR, PC-900, ACD-13A, or ACR-13A

PC955-/M,C*1

FCD-100 Series*1 FCD-13A-/M,C RS-232 Page 427 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- 100, FCR-23A, FIR, PC-900, ACD-13A, or ACR-13A

FCD-15A-/M,C

FCR-100 Series*1 FCR-13A-/M,C RS-232 Page 427 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- 100, FCR-23A, FIR, PC-900, ACD-13A, or ACR-13A

FCR-15A-/M,C

FCR-23A Series*1 FCR-23A-/M,C RS-232 Page 427 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- 100, FCR-23A, FIR, PC-900, ACD-13A, or ACR-13A

FCR-23A-/M,C5

FIR Series*1 FIR-201-M,C RS-232 Page 427 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- 100, FCR-23A, FIR, PC-900, ACD-13A, or ACR-13A

DCL-33A Series DCL-33A-/M,,C5*2 RS-232 RS-485

Page 428 When connecting to DCL-33A Series

ACD-13A ACR-13A

ACD-13A-/M,C5 ACR-13A-/M,C5

RS-232 RS-485

Page 425 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC-900, ACD- 13A, ACR-13A, or BC2

ACD-13A-/M,C ACR-13A-/M,C

RS-232 Page 427 Connecting to FCD-100, FCR- 100, FCR-23A, FIR, PC-900, ACD-13A, or ACR-13A

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.1 Connectable Model List 423

42

*1 Only the indicating controller equipped with RS-232 communication function can be connected. *2 The indicating controller of the following version or later can be connected.

BC2 Series BCD2- BCR2- BCS2-

RS-232 RS-485

Page 425 Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC-900, ACD- 13A, ACR-13A, or BC2

Series Model name Version ACS-13A Series ACS-13A/,,C5 Products manufactured in October 2007 or later

(Indicating controllers with the serial numbers 07Axxxxxx, 07Kxxxxxx, and 07Xxxxxxx or later) (The first two digits of the serial numbers show the last two digits of the year.)

JC Series JCS-33A-/,C5

JCR-33A-/,C5

JCD-33A-/,C5

JCM-33A Series JCM-33A-/,C5

JIR-301-M Series JIR-301-M,C5

PCD-300 Series PCD-33A-/M,C5

PC-900 Series PC935-/M,C5

PC955-/M,C5

DCL-33A Series DCL-33A-/M,,C5

Series Model name Clock Communication Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

4 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.1 Connectable Model List

10

10.2 System Configuration Connecting to ACS-13A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300, PC- 900, ACD-13A, ACR-13A, or BC2 In this section, PC-900 series represents PC-955-/M,C5 and PC-935-/M,C5. ACD-13A represents ACD-13A-/M,C5. ACR-13A represents ACR-13A/M,C5.

For the RS-232 connection (via interface converter)

*1 The communication converter is a product manufactured by Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.For details of the product, contact Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

*2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Communi cation converter *1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distan ce

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. dista nce

Option device*2

Model

ACS13A JC JCM-33A JIR-301-M PCD-300 Series PC-955-/M,C5 PC-935-/M,C5 ACD-13A-/M,C5 ACR-13A-/M,C5 BC2

RS-232 Page 431 RS- 485 connection diagram 1)

1,200m IF-400 RS-232C CFP-C2*1 15m - (Built into GOT)

31 indicating controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2- 9P

Shinko Technos Controller

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

ACS13A,JC, JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, PCD-300 series, PC-955-/M,C5, PC-935-/M,C5

ACS13A,JC, JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, PCD-300 series, PC-955-/M,C5, PC-935-/M,C5

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.2 System Configuration 425

42

For the RS-485 connection

*1 Not available to GT25-W. *2 Not available to GT2505-V. *3 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *4 Only available to GT2505-V.

Indicating controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

ACS13A JC JCM-33A JIR-301-M PCD-300 Series PC-955-/M,C5 PC-935-/M,C5 ACD-13A-/M,C5 ACR-13A-/M,C5 BC2

RS-485 Page 435 RS-485 connection diagram 7)

500m - (Built into GOT) 31 indicating controllers for 1 GOT

Page 432 RS-485 connection diagram 2)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*1*2

Page 434 RS-485 connection diagram 6)

500m FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)

*2

Page 436 RS-485 connection diagram 8)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *3

*4

Shinko Technos Controller

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

ACS13A,JC, JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, PCD-300 series, PC-955-/M,C5, PC-935-/M,C5

ACS13A,JC, JCM-33A,JIR-301-M, PCD-300 series, PC-955-/M,C5, PC-935-/M,C5

6 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.2 System Configuration

10

Connecting to FCD-100, FCR-100, FCR-23A, FIR, PC-900, ACD- 13A, or ACR-13A In this section, PC-900 series represents PC-955-/M,C and PC-935-/M,C. ACD-13A represents ACD-13A-/M,C. ACR-13A represents ACR-13A/M,C.

*1 Only the indicating controller equipped with RS-232 communication function can be connected. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Indicating controller*1 Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

FCD-100 FCR-100 FCR-23A FIR Series PC-955-/M,C PC-935-/M,C ACD-13A-/M,C ACR-13A-/M,C

RS-232 GT09-C30R21401- 4T(3m) or

Page 430 RS-232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 31 indicating controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Shinko Technos Controller

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

FCD-100,FCR-100, FCR-23A, FIR series, PC-955-/M,C, PC-935-/M,C

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.2 System Configuration 427

42

When connecting to DCL-33A Series

For the RS-232 connection (via communication converter)

*1 Product manufactured by Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.For details of the product, contact Shinko Technos Co., Ltd. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Commu nication convert er*1

Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distan ce

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distan ce

Option device*2

Model

DCL-33A Series RS-232 RS485-CPP*1 1,200m IF-400 RS-232CCFP-C2*1 15m - (Built into GOT) 31 indicating controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

Shinko Technos Controller

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

DCL-33A series

DCL-33A series

8 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.2 System Configuration

10

For the RS-485 connection

*1 Product manufactured by Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.For details of the product, contact Shinko Technos Co., Ltd. *2 Not available to GT25-W. *3 Not available to GT2505-V. *4 Mount it on the RS-232 interface (GOT built-in). *5 Only available to GT2505-V.

Indicating controller Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Max. distan ce

GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device Model

DCL-33A Series RS-485 RS-485 CPP*1 Page 433 RS-485 connection diagram 5)

500m - (Built into GOT) 31 indicating controllers for 1 GOT

Page 432 RS-485 connection diagram 3)

500m GT15-RS4-TE

*2*3

Page 433 RS-485 connection diagram 4)

500m FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)

*3

Page 436 RS-485 connection diagram 9)

500m GT14-RS2T4-9P *4

*5

Shinko Technos Controller

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable 1)

DCL-33A series

DCL-33A series

Connection cable 2)

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.2 System Configuration 429

43

10.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the controller.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS-232 connection diagram 1)

*1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

Shinko Technos indicating controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the Shinko Technos indicating controller side. For details, refer to the user's manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller.

GOT side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

Indicating controller side

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

NC

FG

COM

TX

RX

*1

0 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.3 Connection Diagram

10

RS-485 cable

Connection diagram RS-485 connection diagram 1)

*1 Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *3 For details of the terminating resistor specifications, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

JCS-33A JCR-33A JCD-33A JCM-33A JIR-301-M ACS-13A

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 13 11 11 10 11 16

YB(+) 14 14 14 13 14 17

SG 15 17 17 14 17 18

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

PCD-33A PC-955 PC-935 ACD-13A ACR-13A BC2

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 11 11 11 13 13 16

YB(+) 14 12 12 14 14 17

SG 17 16 16 15 15 18

Interface converter (IF-400)

4

3

1

6

2

5

YA(-)

YB(+)

SG

YA(-)

YB(+)

SG

Indicating controller side *1

Indicating controller side *1

*2*2

Terminating resistor*3

YA(-)

YB(+)

COM

COM

NC

NC

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.3 Connection Diagram 431

43

RS-485 connection diagram 2)

*1 Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *3 For details of the terminating resistor specifications, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller *4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal.

Page 437 Connecting terminating resistors

RS-485 connection diagram 3)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of The GOT side. Page 437 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

*3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

JCS-33A JCR-33A JCD-33A JCM-33A JIR-301-M ACS-13A

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 13 11 11 10 11 16

YB(+) 14 14 14 13 14 17

SG 15 17 17 14 17 18

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

PCD-33A PC-955 PC-935 ACD-13A ACR-13A BC2

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 11 11 11 13 13 16

YB(+) 14 12 12 14 14 17

SG 17 16 16 15 15 18

GOT side*4

(terminal block)

YA(-) YB(+)

SG

YA(-)

YB(+)

SG

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

*2

*2

SDB1 SDA1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2

SG FG

Indicating controller side *1

Indicating controller side *1

Terminating resistor*3

GOT side*1

(terminal block)

SDB1

SDA1

RDA1

RDB1

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

SG

FG

4

3

2

5

1

6

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

YA(-)

YB(+)

NC

NC

COM

COM

Shinko technos indicating controller side *2

(Modular connector)

*3

2 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.3 Connection Diagram

10

RS-485 connection diagram 4)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side. Page 437 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

*3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

RS-485 connection diagram 5)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side. Page 437 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

*3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

SDB1(TXD1-) SDA1(TXD1+)

NC SDA2(TXD2+) SDB2(TXD2-) RDA1(RXD1+) RDB1(RXD1-) RDA2(RXD2+) RDB2(RXD2-)

NC NC NC

RSA(RTS+) RSB(RTS-) CSA(CTS+) CSB(CTS-)

SG NC NC NC

4

3

2

5

1

6

8

6

1

5

7

10

12

9

11

3

4

13

14

16

18

20

2

15

17

19

YA(-) YB(+)

NC NC

COM COM

*3

GOT side*1

(terminal block)

Shinko technos indicating controller side *2

(Modular connector)

SDB

SDA

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

4

3

2

5

1

6

6

1

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

YA(-)

YB(+)

NC

NC

COM

COM

*3

GOT side*1

Shinko technos indicating controller side *2

(Modular connector)

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.3 Connection Diagram 433

43

RS-485 connection diagram 6)

*1 Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *3 For details of the terminating resistor specifications, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller *4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal.

Page 437 Connecting terminating resistors

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

JCS-33A JCR-33A JCD-33A JCM-33A JIR-301-M ACS-13A

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 13 11 11 10 11 16

YB(+) 14 14 14 13 14 17

SG 15 17 17 14 17 18

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

PCD-33A PC-955 PC-935 ACD-13A ACR-13A BC2

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 11 11 11 13 13 16

YB(+) 14 12 12 14 14 17

SG 17 16 16 15 15 18

GOT side*4

YA(-)

YB(+)

SG

YA(-)

YB(+)

SG

8

6

2

1

3

4

5

7

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

Indicating controller side *1

Indicating controller side *1

*2

*2

Terminating resistor**3

SDB1(TXD1-)

SDA1(TXD1+)

SG

NC

NC

NC

SDA2(TXD2+)

SDB2(TXD2-)

RDA2(RXD2+)

RDA1(RXD1+)

RDB2(RXD2-)

RDB1(RXD1-)

NC

RSA(RTS+)

NC

RSB(RTS-)

NC

CSA(CTS+)

NC

CSB(CTS-)

4 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.3 Connection Diagram

10

RS-485 connection diagram 7)

*1 Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *3 For details of the terminating resistor specifications, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller *4 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal.

Page 437 Connecting terminating resistors

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

JCS-33A JCR-33A JCD-33A JCM-33A JIR-301-M ACS-13A

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 13 11 11 10 11 16

YB(+) 14 14 14 13 14 17

SG 15 17 17 14 17 18

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

PCD-33A PC-955 PC-935 ACD-13A ACR-13A BC2

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 11 11 11 13 13 16

YB(+) 14 12 12 14 14 17

SG 17 16 16 15 15 18

GOT side*4

YA(-)

YB(+)

SG

YA(-)

YB(+)

SG

Indicating controller side*1

6

1

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

Indicating controller side*1

*2

*2

Terminating resistor*3

SDB

SDA

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.3 Connection Diagram 435

43

RS-485 connection diagram 8)

*1 Pin No. of communication converter differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line. *3 For details of the terminating resistor specifications, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller *4 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below.

2-wire/4-wire: 2-wire (1Pair) Terminating resistor: 110 Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

RS-485 connection diagram 9)

*1 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below. 2-wire/4-wire: 2-wire (1Pair) Terminating resistor: 110 Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

*3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line.

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

JCS-33A JCR-33A JCD-33A JCM-33A JIR-301-M ACS-13A

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 13 11 11 10 11 16

YB(+) 14 14 14 13 14 17

SG 15 17 17 14 17 18

Signal name

Model of indicating controller

PCD-33A PC-955 PC-935 ACD-13A ACR-13A BC2

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. YA(-) 11 11 11 13 13 16

YB(+) 14 12 12 14 14 17

SG 17 16 16 15 15 18

Indicating controller side *1

GOT side *4 (terminal block)

YA(-) YB(+)

SG

YA(-)

YB(+)

SG

Indicating controller side *1

*2*2

Terminating resistor *3

SDB SDA RDA RDB SG

GOT side *1 (terminal block)

SDB

SDA

RDA

RDB

SG

4

3

2

5

1

6

YA(-)

YB(+)

NC

NC

COM

COM

Shinko technos indicating controller side *2

(Modular connector)

*3

6 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.3 Connection Diagram

10

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-485 cable used for direct connecting the indicating controller to the communication converter The length of the RS-485 cable must be 1200m or less. The length of the RS-485 cable used for direct connecting the indicating controller to GOT The length of the RS-485 cable must be 500m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

Shinko Technos indicating controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the Shinko Technos indicating controller side. For details, refer to the user's manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller.

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Enable". For GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor selector to "110". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

Shinko Technos indicating controller side When connecting a Shinko Technos indicating controller to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the Shinko Technos indicating controller. User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.3 Connection Diagram 437

43

10.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [Shinko Technos] [Controller Type]: [Shinko Technos Controller] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 439 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

8 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.4 GOT Side Settings

10

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication

with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps) 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 7bits)

7bits/8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit) 1bit/2bits

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 30sec

Host Address Specify the host address (station No. of the GOT to which the indicating controller is connected) in the connected network. (Default: 0)

0 to 94

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 5ms)

0 to 300ms

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.4 GOT Side Settings 439

44

10.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting

Shinko Technos indicating controller For details of Shinko Technos indicating controller, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the Shinko Technos indicating controller Communication converter For details on communication settings of the communication converter, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of communication converter

Connecting to indicating controller Make the communication settings by operating the key of the indicating controller.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *3 When setting the "95" to the station No., the read-out of data cannot be performed. *4 The speed (38400bps) is available for ACD-13A, ACR-13A, and BC2 series only.

However, select 9600bps or19200bps to use a converter (IF-400).

Connecting to communication converter Make the communication settings by operating the key of the communication converter.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT and the indicating controller settings. *2 The setting of 1 character is recommended.

Model name Refer to Indicating controller ACS-13A, DCL-33A, JC, JCM-33A, JIR-301-M, PCD-300,

PC-900, FCD-100, FCR-100, FCR-23A, FIR, ACD-13A, ACR-13A, BC2 Series

Page 440 Connecting to indicating controller

Communication converter IF-400 Page 440 Connecting to communication converter

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps*4

Data bit 7bits (fixed)

Parity bit Even (fixed)

Stop bit 1bit (fixed)

Station No. *1*2*3 0 to 95

Communication protocol Shinko protocol

Item Set value Transmission speed*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Sending/Receiving switching period*2 1 character, 2 character

0 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting

10

Station No. settings Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Direct specification When setting the device, specify the station number of the indicating controller of which data is to be changed.

Indirect specification When setting the device, indirectly specify the station number of the indicating controller of which data is to be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No. specification will be the station No. of the indicating controller.

All station specification Target station differs depending on write-in operation or read-out operation. For write-in operation, all station will be a target. In the WORD BIT write-in operation, only the indicating controller whose station No. is the same as host address is applicable. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. Page 438 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) In the read-out operation, only the indicating controller whose station No. is the same as host address is applicable. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. Page 438 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Specification range 0 to 94

Specification station NO. Compatible device Setting range 100 GD10 0 to 94

For the setting other than the above, error (dedicated device is out of range) will occur.101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

GOT

Station No.3

Station No.7

Station No.1

Station No.15

Station No.6

Examples of station number setting

10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.5 Indicating Controller Side Setting 441

44

10.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 661 SHINKO equipment ([Shinko Technos Controller])

10.7 Precautions

Station number settings of indicating controller In the system configuration, the indicating controller with the station number set with the host address must be included. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. Page 438 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

GOT clock control Since the indicating controller does not have a clock function, the settings of [time adjusting] or [time broad cast] by GOT clock control will be disabled.

When using the communication converter IF-400 When using the communication converter IF-400, some communication error may occur.Set the number of retries to more than one time.

Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device.For example, the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment. For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

2 10 SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING CONTROLLER 10.6 Settable Device Range

11

11 CHINO CONTROLLER Page 443 Connectable Model List Page 444 System Configuration Page 455 Connection Diagram Page 469 GOT Side Settings Page 471 Controller Side Setting Page 482 Settable Device Range Page 482 Precautions

11.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 From the models of controller, select the detailed model name which supports each communication type. For details of CHINO controller detailed model names, refer to the following catalog. Catalog of CHINO controllers

Series Model name*1 Clock Communication Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

LT230 Series LT230 RS-232 RS-485

Page 444 Connecting to LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830, DZ, DB series

LT300 Series LT350 RS-232 RS-422 RS-485

LT370

LT400 Series LT450

LT470

LT830 Series LT830 RS-232 RS-485

DZ Series DZ1000 DZ2000

RS-232 RS-422 RS-485DB Series DB1000

DB2000

KP Series KP1000 KP2000

RS-232 RS-422 RS-485

Page 447 Connecting to KP, AL3000, AH3000 series

AL3000 Series AL3000

AH3000 Series AH3000

SE3000 Series SE3000 RS-232 RS-422 RS-485

Page 450 Connecting to SE3000, JU, KE3000, LE5000 series

JU Series JU RS-422 RS-485KE Series KE3000

LE5000 Series LE5000

GT120 Series GT120 RS-232 RS-485

Page 453 Connecting to GT120 Series

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.1 Connectable Model List 443

44

11.2 System Configuration Connecting to LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830, DZ, DB series

When connecting to controller

Indicating controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000

RS-232 Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 controller for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

*1*2

RS-422 Page 457 RS422 connection diagram 2)

1200m - (Built into GOT) 31 controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS4-9S

*1*2

Page 458 RS422 connection diagram 3)

1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P *3

*4

CHINO MODBUS device

Communication driver

GOT

Connection cable

LT230, LT830, LT300, LT400, DZ1000, DZ2000, DB1000, DB2000

LT230, LT830, LT300, LT400, DZ1000, DZ2000, DB1000, DB2000

4 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration

11

*1 Not available to GT25-W. *2 Not available to GT2505-V. *3 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built in the GOT). *4 Only available to GT2505-V.

LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000

RS-485 Page 460 RS485 connection diagram 1)

1200m FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 (0.5m) FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 (1m) FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 (2m)

*2

31 controllers for 1 GOT

Page 462 RS485 connection diagram 3)

1200m GT15-RS4-TE

*1*2

Page 467 RS485 connection diagram 12)

1200m - (Built into GOT)

Indicating controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device Model

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration 445

44

When connecting to converter

*1 The converter is a product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Indicating controller

Connection cable 1) Converter*1 Connection cable 2) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

LT300 LT400 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000

Page 456 RS422 connection diagram 1)

1200m SC8-10 RS-232 Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 31 controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DZ1000 DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000

Page 461 RS485 connection diagram 2)

1200m SC8-10 RS-232 Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

CHINO MODBUS device

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

LT230, LT830, LT300, LT400, DZ1000, DZ2000, DB1000, DB2000

LT230, LT830, LT300, LT400, DZ1000, DZ2000, DB1000, DB2000

6 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration

11

Connecting to KP, AL3000, AH3000 series

When connecting to controller

Indicating controller Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Max. distance

GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Communication Type

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Option device Model

KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000

RS-232 - RZ-CRS6 or

Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 controller for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

*2*3

RS-422 RZ-CRA1 Page 457 RS422 connection diagram 2)

1200m - (Built into GOT) 31 controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS4-9S

*2*3

Page 457 RS422 connection diagram 2) 1200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

*2*3

Page 458 RS422 connection diagram 3) 1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P *4

*5

CHINO MODBUS device

Communication driver

GOTControllerController

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration 447

44

*1 Product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation. *2 Not available to GT25-W. *3 Not available to GT2505-V. *4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built in the GOT). *5 Only available to GT2505-V.

KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000

RS-485 RZ-CRA1 Page 456 RS422 connection diagram 1)

1200m FA-LTBGTR2CBL05 (0.5m) FA-LTBGTR2CBL10 (1m) FA-LTBGTR2CBL20 (2m)

*3

31 controllers for 1 GOT

Page 460 RS485 connection diagram 1)

RZ-LEC Page 462 RS485 connection diagram 3)

1200m GT15-RS4-TE

*2*3

Page 467 RS485 connection diagram 12) 1200m - (Built into GOT)

Indicating controller Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Max. distance

GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Communication Type

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Option device Model

8 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration

11

When connecting to converter

*1 Product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Indica ting contro ller

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Max. distance

Converter*1 Connection cable 3) GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000

RZ-CRA1 or

Page 456 RS422 connection diagram 1)

RZ-CRA2 or

Page 456 RS422 connection diagram 1)

1200m SC8-10 RS-232 RZ-CRS6 or

Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 31 controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

RZ-LEC or

Page 461 RS485 connection diagram 2)

RZ-LEC (only KP1000, KP2000) RZ-LED (only AL3000, AH3000) or

Page 461 RS485 connection diagram 2)

1200m SC8-10 RS-232 RZ-CRS6 or

Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS2-9P

CHINO MODBUS device

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 3)

ControllerController

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration 449

45

Connecting to SE3000, JU, KE3000, LE5000 series

When connecting to controller

Indicating controller Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Max. distance

GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Communication Type

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Option device Model

SE3000 RS-232 -- RZ-CRS6 or

Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 controller for 1 GOT

GT15-RS2-9P

*4*5

CHINO MODBUS device

Communication driver

GOTController Controller

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

0 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration

11

*1 Product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation. *2 RZ-CRA1 and RZ-LEC can be used in SE3000, JU or LE5000 series only. *3 RZ-CSS1Z2 can be used in JU series only. *4 Not available to GT25-W. *5 Not available to GT2505-V. *6 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built in the GOT). *7 Only available to GT2505-V.

SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000

RS-422 RZ-CRA1*2 Page 457 RS422 connection diagram 2)

1200m - (Built into GOT) 31 controllers for 1 GOT

GT15-RS4-9S

*4*5

Page 457 RS422 connection diagram 2) 1200m - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

*4*5

Page 458 RS422 connection diagram 3) 1200m GT14-RS2T4-9P *6

*7

RS-485 RZ-LEC*2

or RZ-CSS1Z2*3 Page 465 RS485

connection diagram 9) 1200m FA-LTBGTR2CBL05 (0.5m)

FA-LTBGTR2CBL10 (1m) FA-LTBGTR2CBL20 (2m)

*5

31 controllers for 1 GOT

Page 465 RS485 connection diagram 9)

RZ-LEC*2

or RZ-CSS1Z2*3 Page 466 RS485

connection diagram 10) 1200m GT15-RS4-TE

*4*5

Page 468 RS485 connection diagram 13) 1200m - (Built into GOT)

Indicating controller Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Max. distance

GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Communication Type

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Option device Model

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration 451

45

When connecting to converter

*1 Product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation. *2 RZ-CRA1 and RZ-CRA2 can be used in SE3000, JU or LE5000 series only. *3 RZ-CSS1Z2 can be used in JU series only. *4 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Indicating controller

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Max. distance

Converter*1 Connection cable 3) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Cable model*1 Connection diagram number

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*4

Model

SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000

RZ-CRA1*2

or Page 456

RS422 connection diagram 1)

RZ-CRA2*2

or Page 456

RS422 connection diagram 1)

1200m SC8 -10

RS-232 RZ-CRS6 or

Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

31 controllers for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

RZ-LEC (only SE3000, JU, LE5000) or RZ-CSS1Z2*3

or Page 466

RS485 connection diagram 11)

RZ-LEC (only JU, LE5000) RZ-LED (only SE3000) or

Page 466 RS485 connection diagram 11)

1200m SC8 -10

RS-232 RZ-CRS6 or

Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

GT15- RS2-9P

CHINO MODBUS device

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 3)

ControllerController

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

2 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration

11

Connecting to GT120 Series

When connecting to controller

*1 GT25-W is not compatible to the option devices other than FA-LTBGT2R4CBL. *2 GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Indicating controller Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Max. distance

GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Cable model Connection diagram number

Option device*1*2 Model

GT120 RS-485 GT8-CDD(60mm) or

Page 462 RS485 connection diagram 4)

Page 463 RS485 connection diagram 5)

1200m - (Built into GOT) 31 controllers for 1 GOT

Page 463 RS485 connection diagram 6)

1200m FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05 (0.5m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10 (1m) FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20 (2m)

Page 464 RS485 connection diagram 7)

1200m GT15-RS4-TE

CHINO MODBUS device

Communication driver

GOTGT120 GT120

Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2)

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration 453

45

When connecting to converter

*1 The converter is a product manufactured by CHINO corporation. For details of the product, contact CHINO corporation. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Indicating controller

Connection cable 1)

Connection cable 2)

Max. distance

Converter*1 Connection cable 3) GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel

name Cable model Connection diagram number

Cable model Connection diagram number

Model name

Commu nication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2

Model

GT120 GT8- CDD(60mm) or

Page 462 RS485 connection diagram 4)

GT8- CDM(3m) or

Page 464 RS485 connection diagram 8)

1200m SC8-10 RS-232 Page 455 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT)

31 controllers for 1 GOT

GT15- RS2-9P

CHINO MODBUS device

Communication driver

GOTInterface converter

Connection cable 2)

Connection cable 3)

GT120 GT120

Connection cable 1)

4 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.2 System Configuration

11

11.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the controller.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1)

*1 Terminal number of the controller and the converter differ depending on the model.Refer to the following table.

*2 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model. *3 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.

Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 12) 13) 14) For the symbol B, two terminal numbers are available. Select as necessary.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

CHINO controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the CHINO controller side module. For details, refer to the user's manual of the CHINO controller.

Signal name

Controller Converter

LT300 LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000 SC8-10

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. SD 11 11 19 13 27 2

RD 13 13 21 12 26 1

SG 15 15 23 14 28 3

Signal name

Controller

KP1000 KP2000 SE3000 AL3000 AH3000

Terminal No. Terminal No.*2 Terminal name Terminal name

R*3, B*3, C*3, D*3 B*3, E*3

SD 13 27 30 SD SD

RD 12 26 29 RD RD

SG 14 28 31 SG SG

CHINO controller side, Interface

converter

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

GOT side

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

FG

-

SD

RD

-

SG

*1

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram 455

45

RS-422 cable

Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model. *3 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.

Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 12) 13) 14) *4 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal. *5 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS-422. *6 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the converter.

Signal name Controller type

LT300 LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. SDA 11 11 19 14 28

SDB 12 12 20 15 29

RDA 13 13 21 12 26

RDB 14 14 22 13 27

SG 15 15 23 16 30

Signal name Controller type

KP1000 KP2000 SE3000 AL3000 AH3000

JU KE3000 LE5000

Terminal No.

Terminal No.*2 Terminal name

Terminal name

Terminal No.

Terminal name

Terminal nameA*3 C*3, F*3

SDA 14 28 31 SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB 15 29 32 SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

RDA 12 26 29 RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB 13 27 30 RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SG 16 30 28 SG SG 5 SG SG

Controller *1Term

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

4

5

6

7

8

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG *6

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG *6

Controller *1

Terminating resistor(100 1/4W) *4 *5

Interface converter SC8-10

6 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram

11

RS422 connection diagram 2)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model. *3 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.

Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 12) 13) 14) *4 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal. *5 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors *6 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Signal name Controller type

LT300 LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. SDA 11 11 19 14 28

SDB 12 12 20 15 29

RDA 13 13 21 12 26

RDB 14 14 22 13 27

SG 15 15 23 16 30

Signal name Controller type

KP1000 KP2000 SE3000 AL3000 AH3000

JU KE3000 LE5000

Terminal No.

Terminal No.*2 Terminal name

Terminal name

Terminal No.

Terminal name

Terminal nameA*3 C*3, F*3

SDA 14 28 31 SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB 15 29 32 SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

RDA 12 26 29 RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB 13 27 30 RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SG 16 30 28 SG SG 5 SG SG

GOT side *5 Controller *1

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG *6

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

2

7

1

6

5

3

4

8

9

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG *6SG *6

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG *6

Controller *1

Terminating resistor(100 1/4W) *4

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram 457

45

RS422 connection diagram 3)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model. *3 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.

Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 12) 13) 14) *4 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal. *5 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter as shown below.

2-wire/4-wire: 4-wire (2 pairs) Terminating resistor: 330 Page 67 Setting the RS-232/485 signal conversion adaptor

*6 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 1200m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

CHINO controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the CHINO controller side module. For details, refer to the user's manual of the CHINO controller.

Signal name Controller type

LT300 LT400 DZ1000, DZ2000 DB1000 DB2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. SDA 11 11 19 14 28

SDB 12 12 20 15 29

RDA 13 13 21 12 26

RDB 14 14 22 13 27

SG 15 15 23 16 30

Signal name Controller type

KP1000 KP2000 SE3000 AL3000 AH3000

JU KE3000 LE5000

Terminal No.

Terminal No. *2 Terminal name

Terminal name

Terminal No.

Terminal name

Terminal nameA *3 C *3, F *3

SDA 14 28 31 SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB 15 29 32 SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

RDA 12 26 29 RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB 13 27 30 RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SG 16 30 28 SG SG 5 SG SG

GOT side *5 Controller *1

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG *6

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG *6SG *6

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG *6

Controller *1

Terminating resistor(100 1/4W) *4

8 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram

11

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Enable". For GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor selector to "330". For the procedure to set the terminating resistor, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

CHINO controller side When connecting a CHINO controller to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the CHINO controller. User's Manual of the CHINO controller

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram 459

46

RS-485 cable

Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model. *3 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.

Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 12) 13) 14) For the symbol G, two terminal numbers are available. Select as necessary.

Signal name Controller type

LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DZ1000, DZ2000

DB1000 DB2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. SA 6 11 11 6 19 12 26

SB 7 12 12 7 20 13 27

SG 8 15 15 8 23 14 28

Signal name Controller type

KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000

Terminal No. Terminal No. *2 Terminal name

S *3, E *3, F *3, G *3 D *3, G *3

SA 12 26 29 SA

SB 13 27 30 SB

SG 14 28 31 SG

GOT side *5 Controller *1

SDA1(TXD1+)

SDB1(TXD1-)

SG *6

SDA2(TXD2+)

SDB2(TXD2-)

RDA1(RXD1+)

RDB1(RXD1-)

RSA(RTS+)

RSB(RTS-)

CSA(CTS+)

CSB(CTS-)

NC

NC

NC

RDA2(RXD2+)

RDB2(RXD2-)

NC

NC

NC

NC

6

8

2

5

7

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

3

4

9

11

13

15

17

19

SA

SB

SG *6SG *6

SA

SB

SG *6

Controller *1

Terminating resistor(100 1/4W) *4

0 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram

11

*4 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal. *5 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors *6 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

RS485 connection diagram 2)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model. *3 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.

Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 12) 13) 14) For the symbol G, two terminal numbers are available. Select as necessary.

*4 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal. *5 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS-485. *6 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Signal name Controller type

LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DZ1000, DZ2000

DB1000 DB2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. SA 6 11 11 6 19 12 26

SB 7 12 12 7 20 13 27

SG 8 15 15 8 23 14 28

Signal name Controller type

KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000

Terminal No. Terminal No. *2 Terminal name

S *3, E *3, F *3, G *3 D *3, G *3

SA 12 26 29 SA

SB 13 27 30 SB

SG 14 28 31 SG

Controller *1Controller *1Term

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

4

5

6

7

8

SA

SB

SA

SB

SG *6 SG *6

Terminating resistor(100 1/4W) *4 *5

Interface converter SC8-10

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram 461

46

RS485 connection diagram 3)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model. *3 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.

Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 12) 13) 14) For the symbol G, two terminal numbers are available. Select as necessary.

*4 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be a terminal. *5 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side.

Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors *6 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

RS485 connection diagram 4)

*1 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the CHINO controller

Signal name Controller type

LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DZ1000, DZ2000

DB1000 DB2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. SA 6 11 11 6 19 12 26

SB 7 12 12 7 20 13 27

SG 8 15 15 8 23 14 28

Signal name Controller type

KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000

Terminal No. Terminal No. *2 Terminal name

S *3, E *3, F *3, G *3 D *3, G *3

SA 12 26 29 SA

SB 13 27 30 SB

SG 14 28 31 SG

GOT side *5 Controller *1

SDA1

SDB1

SG *6

RDA1

RDB1

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

FG

1

2

9

3

4

5

6

7

8

10

SA

SB

SG *6SG *6

SA

SB

SG *6

Controller *1

Terminating resistor(100 1/4W) *4

3

4

3

4

YB(+)

YA(-)

Controller*1 (Modular connector)

Controller*1 (Modular connector)

2 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram

11

RS485 connection diagram 5)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side. Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the CHINO controller

RS485 connection diagram 6)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side. Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the CHINO controller

3

4

YB(+)

YA(-)

Controller*2

(Modular connector)GOT side*1

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

GOT side*1

3

4

YB(+)

YA(-)

Controller*2 (Modular connector)

SDA1(TXD1+)

SDB1(TXD1-)

SDA2(TXD2+)

SDB2(TXD2-)

RDA1(RXD1+)

RDB1(RXD1-)

RSA(RTS+)

RSB(RTS-)

CSA(CTS+)

CSB(CTS-)

NC

SG

NC

NC

RDA2(RXD2+)

RDB2(RXD2-)

NC

NC

NC

NC

6

8

5

7

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

2

3

4

9

11

13

15

17

19

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram 463

46

RS485 connection diagram 7)

*1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side. Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors

*2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the CHINO controller

RS485 connection diagram 8)

*1 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS-485. *2 For details of the pin assignment, refer to the following manual.

User's Manual of the CHINO controller

GOT side*1 Controller*2

(Modular connector)

3

4

YB(+)

YA(-)

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

SG

FG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Term

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

4

5

6

7

8

*1 Interface converter

SCB-10

3

4

YB(+)

YA(-)

Controller*2 (Modular connector)

4 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram

11

RS485 connection diagram 9)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be terminating resistors. *3 Set the terminating resistor of The GOT side.

Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors *4 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Signal name Controller type

SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000

Terminal name Terminal No. Terminal name Terminal name RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

SG SG 5 SG SG

GOT side *3 Controller *1

SDA1 (TXD1+)

SDB1 (TXD1-)

SG *4

SDA2 (TXD2+)

SDB2 (TXD2-)

RDA1 (RXD1+)

RDB1 (RXD1-)

RSA (RTS+)

RSB (RTS-)

CSA (CTS+)

CSB (CTS-)

NC

NC

NC

RDA2 (RXD2+)

RDB2 (RXD2-)

NC

NC

NC

NC

6

8

2

5

7

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

3

4

9

11

13

15

17

19

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG *4

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG *4

Controller *1

Terminating resistor (100 1/4W) *2

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram 465

46

RS485 connection diagram 10)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be terminating resistors. *3 Set the Communication Type switch of the converter to RS-485.

RS485 connection diagram 11)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be terminating resistors. *3 Set the terminating resistor of The GOT side.

Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors *4 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Signal name Controller type

SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000

Terminal name Terminal No. Terminal name Terminal name RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

SG SG 5 SG SG

Signal name Controller type

SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000

Terminal name Terminal No. Terminal name Terminal name RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

SG SG 5 SG SG

Interface converter SC8-10 *3

Controller *1Term

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

4

5

6

7

8

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

Controller *1

Terminating resistor (100 1/4W) *2

GOT side *3 Controller *1

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

SDA2

SDB2

RDA2

RDB2

SG *4

FG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG *4

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG *4

Controller *1

Terminating resistor (100 1/4W) *2

6 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram

11

RS485 connection diagram 12)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For KP2000 series, the terminal No. differs according to the model. *3 This indicates the symbols of the position 10) (third zone) of the following models.

Model: KP2 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) - 12) 13) 14) For the symbol G, two terminal numbers are available. Select as necessary.

*4 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be terminating resistors. *5 Set the terminating resistor of The GOT side.

Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors *6 When connecting to DB1000 or DB200 Series, connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Signal name Controller type

LT230 LT300 LT400 LT830 DZ1000, DZ2000

DB1000 DB2000

Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. Terminal No. SA 6 11 11 6 19 12 26

SB 7 12 12 7 20 13 27

SG 8 15 15 8 23 14 28

Signal name Controller type

KP1000 KP2000 AL3000 AH3000

Terminal No. Terminal No. *2 Terminal name

S *3, E *3, F *3, G *3 D *3, G *3

SA 12 26 29 SA

SB 13 27 30 SB

SG 14 28 31 SG

GOT side *5 Controller *1Controller *1

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG *6

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

SA

SB

SG *6

SA

SB

SG *6

Terminating resistor(100 1/4W) *4

SG *6

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram 467

46

RS485 connection diagram 13)

*1 Pin No. of controller differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a controller which will be terminating resistors. *3 Set the terminating resistor of The GOT side.

Page 459 Connecting terminating resistors *4 Do not connect SG of the controller and SG of the GOT.

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The maximum length of the RS-485 cable must be 1,200m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

CHINO controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the CHINO controller side module. For details, refer to the user's manual of the CHINO controller.

Connecting terminating resistors GOT side For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Enable". For GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor selector to "110". Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

CHINO controller side When connecting a CHINO controller to the GOT, a terminating resistor must be connected to the CHINO controller. User's Manual of the CHINO controller

Signal name Controller type

SE3000 JU KE3000 LE5000

Terminal name Terminal No. Terminal name Terminal name RDA RDA 3 RDA RDA

RDB RDB 4 RDB RDB

SDA SDA 1 SDA SDA

SDB SDB 2 SDB SDB

SG SG 5 SG SG

GOT side *3

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG *4

RSA

CSA

RSB

CSB

1

6

2

7

5

3

4

8

9

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG *4

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG *4

Controller *1 Controller *1

Terminating resistor(100 1/4W) *2

8 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.3 Connection Diagram

11

11.4 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [CHINO] [Controller Type]: [CHINO MODBUS device] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 470 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.4 GOT Side Settings 469

47

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Format When connecting to GT120, specify format 2. Delay Time When connecting to the following models, set the send delay time to 30ms or more.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication

with the connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps)

9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 8bits)

7bits/8bits

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 1bit)

1bit/2bits

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: None)

None Even Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 1sec)

1 to 30sec

Host Address Specify the host address (station No. of the GOT to which the controller is connected) in the connected network. (Default: 1)

1 to 99

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 5ms)

0 to 300ms

Format Select the communication format. (Default: 1) Format 1: Accessible to LT230/300/400/830, DZ1000/2000, Not accessible to GT120 Format 2: Accessible to GT120

1/2

Model name

DZ1000, DZ2000

0 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.4 GOT Side Settings

11

11.5 Controller Side Setting

CHINO controller For details of CHINO controller, refer to the following manual. User's Manual of the CHINO controller Converter For details on communication settings of the converter, refer to the following manual. User's Manual for converter

Connecting to LT230, LT300 Series

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting to Lock 4.

Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Model name Refer to Controller LT230, LT300 Page 471 Connecting to LT230, LT300 Series

LT400, LT830 Page 472 Connecting to LT400, LT830 Series

DZ1000, DZ2000 Page 472 Connecting to DZ1000, DZ2000 Series

DB1000, DB2000 Page 473 Connecting to DB1000, DB2000 Series

GT120 Page 473 Connecting to GT120 Series

KP1000, KP2000 Page 474 Connecting to KP1000, KP2000

AL3000, AH3000 Page 474 Connecting to AL3000, AH3000

SE3000 Page 475 Connecting to SE3000

JU Page 476 Connecting to JU

KE3000 Page 477 Connecting to KE3000

LE5000 Page 478 Connecting to LE5000

Converter SC8-10 Page 479 Connecting to converter SC8-10

Item Set value Protocol rtU: MODBUS RTU

Function Com: Upper communication

Station No.*1 1 to 99

Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps

Character*2

(Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) 5: 8bit, None, 1bit 6: 8bit, None, 2bit 7: 8bit, Even, 1bit 8: 8bit, Even, 2bit 9: 8bit, Odd, 1bit 10: 8bit, Odd, 2bit

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting 471

47

Connecting to LT400, LT830 Series

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set thefollowing Key Lock setting LT400: Lock4 LT830: Lock3

Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Connecting to DZ1000, DZ2000 Series

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting to Lock 2.

Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Item Set value Protocol rtU: MODBUS RTU

Function Com: Upper communication

Station No.*1 1 to 99

Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps

Character*2

(Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) 8N1: 8bit, None, 1bit 8N2: 8bit, None, 2bit 8E1: 8bit, Even, 1bit 8E2: 8bit, Even, 2bit 8O1: 8bit, Odd, 1bit 8O2: 8bit, Odd, 2bit

Item Set value Protocol rtU: MODBUS RTU

Function Com: Upper communication

Station No.*1 1 to 31

Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit 8bits (fixed)

Stop bit 1bit (fixed)

Parity bit None (fixed)

2 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting

11

Connecting to DB1000, DB2000 Series

Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Connecting to GT120 Series

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting to Lock 3.

Communication settings Release the controller lock function in advance and set the following communication settings. After completing the communication settings, set the Key Lock setting to Lock 3.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Item Set value Protocol MODBUS (RTU)

Function Com: Upper communication

Station No.*1 01 to 99

Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Character 7BIT/EVEN/STOP1 7BIT/EVEN/STOP2 7BIT/ODD/STOP1 7BIT/ODD/STOP2 8BIT/NON/STOP1 8BIT/NON/STOP2 8BIT/EVEN/STOP1 8BIT/EVEN/STOP2 8BIT/ODD/STOP1 8BIT/ODD/STOP2

Item Set value Communication protocol comr: MODBUS RTU

Station No.*1 1 to 95

Transmission speed*2 96: 9600bps 192: 19200bps

Data bit 8bits (fixed)

Stop bit*2 1bit, 2bits

Parity bit*2 nonE: None EVEn: Even odd: Odd

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting 473

47

Connecting to KP1000, KP2000

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting.

Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Connecting to AL3000, AH3000

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting.

Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Item Set value Protocol MODBUS (RTU)

Function COM

Station No.*1 1 to 99

Transmission speed*2 2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps

Character*2

(Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) 8BIT/NON/STOP1 8BIT/NON/STOP2 8BIT/EVEN/STOP1 8BIT/EVEN/STOP2 8BIT/ODD/STOP1 8BIT/ODD/STOP2

Item Set value Protocol MODBUS

Transmission code rtu

Communication type RS232C, RS-422A, RS-485

Station No.*1 1 to 31

Transmission speed*2 2400bps, 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

Character*2

(Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) [8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit [8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit [8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit [8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit [8O1]: 8bit, Odd, 1bit [8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit

4 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting

11

Connecting to SE3000

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting.

Communication settings Make the communication settings using the engineering software package (PASS)

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *3 Station No. and Transmission speed can also be set by switch SW1.

Setting by Switch (SW1) Station No. and Transmission speed can be set.

Station No.

Item Set value Protocol MODBUS RTU

Station No.*1*3 1 to 31

Transmission speed*2*3 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit 8bits (fixed)

Parity bit*2 Even, Odd, Non

Stop bit*2 1bit, 2bits

Transmission code Binary (fixed)

Error check CRC-16 (fixed)

SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4 SW1-5 Station No. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 2

ON ON OFF OFF OFF 3

: :

ON OFF ON ON ON 29

OFF ON ON ON ON 30

ON ON ON ON ON 31

1 2

3

O N

4 5

6 7

8

SW1

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting 475

47

Transmission speed

Setting by Switch (SW2)

Connecting to JU

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting.

Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

SW1-6 SW1-7 communication port Transmission speed OFF OFF Upper communication 9600bps

OFF ON Upper communication 19200bps

ON OFF ENG -

ON ON User setting inhibited

SW2 Front side (Terminal side) Rear side (DIN rail side)

RS232C RS422A/485

Item Set value Protocol rtU

Station No.*1 1 to 99

Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps

Character*2

(Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) [8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit [8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit [8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit [8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit [8O1]: 8bit, Odd, 1bit [8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit

DIN rail side

Upside

422A /485

232C

Terminal side

6 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting

11

Connecting to KE3000

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting.

Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the switches SW2 and SW3 of the module.

Setting by SW2

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings. *2 When the transmission code is MODBUS RTU, the setting of the transmission character structure is fixed.

Setting by SW3 Set the station No. as follows.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units.

Item Set value SW2-2 SW2-3 Transmission code*2 MODBUS RTU OFF -

Transmission speed*1 9600bps - OFF

19200bps - ON

Transmission character structure*2 8bits, None, 1bit (fixed) - -

SW3-4 SW3-5 SW3-6 SW3-7 SW3-8 Station No.*1

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 1

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 2

ON ON OFF OFF OFF 3

: :

ON OFF ON ON ON 29

OFF ON ON ON ON 30

ON ON ON ON ON 31

Printed wiring board in main body Front panel

SW3 SW2

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting 477

47

Connecting to LE5000

Key Lock setting To write the Digital and the Analog parameters, set the Key Lock setting.

Communication settings Set the communication settings with controller key operation.

*1 Avoid duplication of the station No. with any of the other units. *2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings.

Item Set value RTU/ASCII RTU

Station No.*1 1 to 99

Transmission speed*2 9600bps, 19200bps

Character*2

(Bit length, Parity bit, Stop bit) [8N1]: 8bit, None, 1bit [8N2]: 8bit, None, 2bit [8E1]: 8bit, Even, 1bit [8E2]: 8bit, Even, 2bit [8O1]: 8bit, Odd, 1bit [8O2]: 8bit, Odd, 2bit

8 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting

11

Connecting to converter SC8-10

Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting switches.

*1 Adjust the settings with GOT and controller settings.

Settings by switch

Transmission speed setting

Communication type setting

Item Set value Transmission speed select switch*1 9600bps, 19200bps

Communication type switch RS-485, RS-422

Setting item Set value Switch No.

1 2 3 4 Transmission speed 9600bps OFF ON OFF OFF

19200bps OFF OFF ON OFF

Setting item RS-485/RS-422

Transmission speed select switch

Communication type switch

1 2 3 4

ON

RS-485 RS-422A

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting 479

48

Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps. The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order. There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive.

Direct specification When setting the device, specify the station number of the controller of which data is to be changed.

Indirect specification When setting the device, indirectly specify the station number of the controller of which data is to be changed using the 16-bit GOT internal data register (GD10 to GD25). When specifying the station No. from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3, the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No. specification will be the station No. of the controller.

Model name Specification range Refer to LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830 1 to 99 Page 471 Connecting to LT230, LT300 Series

Page 472 Connecting to LT400, LT830 Series

DZ1000, DZ2000 1 to 31 Page 472 Connecting to DZ1000, DZ2000 Series

DB1000, DB2000 1 to 99 Page 473 Connecting to DB1000, DB2000 Series

GT120 1 to 95 Page 473 Connecting to GT120 Series

KP1000, KP2000 1 to 99 Page 474 Connecting to KP1000, KP2000

AL3000, AH3000 1 to 31 Page 474 Connecting to AL3000, AH3000

SE3000 1 to 31 Page 475 Connecting to SE3000

JU 1 to 99 Page 476 Connecting to JU

KE3000 1 to 31 Page 477 Connecting to KE3000

LE5000 1 to 99 Page 478 Connecting to LE5000

Specification station NO. Compatible device Setting range 100 GD10 1 to 99: LT230, LT300, LT400, LT830, DB1000, DB2000, KP1000, KP2000, JU, LE5000

1 to 31: DZ1000, DZ2000, AL3000, AH3000, KE3000, SE3000 1 to 95: GT120 For the setting other than the above, error (dedicated device is out of range) will occur.

101 GD11

102 GD12

103 GD13

104 GD14

105 GD15

106 GD16

107 GD17

108 GD18

109 GD19

110 GD20

111 GD21

112 GD22

113 GD23

114 GD24

115 GD25

GOT

Station No.3

Station No.7

Station No.1

Station No.15

Station No.6

Examples of station number setting

0 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting

11

All station specification Target station differs depending on write-in operation or read-out operation. For write-in operation, all station will be a target. For read-out operation, only one station will be a target. All station specification is not available for KE3000. Do not use the all station specification for systems which include

KE3000.

11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.5 Controller Side Setting 481

48

11.6 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 663 CHINO equipment ([CHINO MODBUS device])

11.7 Precautions

Station number settings of temperature controller In the system configuration, the controller with the station number set with the host address must be included. For details of host address setting, refer to the following. Page 469 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

GOT clock control Since the controller does not have a clock function, the settings of [time adjusting] or [time broad cast] by GOT clock control will be disabled.

Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device.For example, the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment. For details of GOT internal device setting, refer to the following manual. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual

2 11 CHINO CONTROLLER 11.6 Settable Device Range

12

12 TOSHIBA PLC Page 483 Connectable Model List Page 484 Serial Connection Page 494 Ethernet Connection Page 500 Settable Device Range

12.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

Series Model name Clock Communication Type

Connectable GOT Refer to

PROSECT Series T2 (PU224) RS-422 Page 484 Connecting to PROSEC T seriesT3

T3H

T2E RS-232 RS-422T2N

PROSECV Series model 2000(S2) RS-422 Page 486 Connecting to PROSEC V seriesmodel 2000(S2T)

model 2000(S2E)

model 3000 (S3)

Unified Controller nv Series (Controller type1)

PU811 Ethernet Page 494 Connecting to Unified Controller nv series

Unified Controller nv Series (Controller type1 light)

PUM11 Ethernet Page 494 Connecting to Unified Controller nv seriesPUM12

PUM14

12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.1 Connectable Model List 483

48

12.2 Serial Connection Connecting to PROSEC T series

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*1 Model

T2 (PU224) T3 T3H

RS-422 GT09-C30R40501-15P(3m) GT09-C100R40501-15P(10m) GT09-C200R40501-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40501-15P(30m) or

RS422 connection diagram 1)

1km - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

T2E RS-232 GT09-C30R40102-9P(3m) or

RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 GT09-C30R40502-6C(3m) GT09-C100R40502-6C(10m) GT09-C200R40502-6C(20m) GT09-C300R40502-6C(30m) or

RS422 connection diagram 2)

1km - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V

Communication driver

GOTPROSEC T series

Connection cable

4 12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection

12

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

T2N RS-232 GT09-C30R20502-15P(3m) or

RS232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

RS-422 GT09-C30R40503-15P(3m) GT09-C100R40503-15P(10m) GT09-C200R40503-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40503-15P(30m) or

RS422 connection diagram 3)

1km - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*1 Model

12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection 485

48

Connecting to PROSEC V series

*1 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment

Model name Communication Type

Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*1 Model

model 2000 (S2) model 2000 (S2T) model 2000 (S2E)

RS-422 GT09-C30R40502-6C(3m) GT09-C100R40502-6C(10m) GT09-C200R40502-6C(20m) GT09-C300R40502-6C(30m) or

RS422 connection diagram 2)

1km - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS4-9S

model 3000 (S3) RS-422 GT09-C30R40501-15P(3m) GT09-C100R40501-15P(10m) GT09-C200R40501-15P(20m) GT09-C300R40501-15P(30m) or

RS422 connection diagram 1)

1km - (Built into GOT)

GT15-RS4-9S

TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V

Communication driver

GOTPROSEC V series

Connection cable

6 12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection

12

Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1)

RS232 connection diagram 2)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less. GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications TOSHIBA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the TOSHIBA PLC. For details, refer to the TOSHIBA PLC user's manual.

GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

3

2

4

5

6

7

8

9

SG

TXD

RXD

-

SG

5V

RTS

-

5V

GOT side TOSHIBA PLC side

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

5

12

7

8

15

6

14

13

-

TXD

RXD

SG

SG

SG

RTS

CTS

-

12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection 487

48

RS-422 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1)

RS422 connection diagram 2)

RS422 connection diagram 3)

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

3

11

2

10

13

1

5

4

7

12

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

TXA

TXB

RXA

RXB

RTSB

FG

RTSA

CTSA

SG

CTSB

TOSHIBA PLC side

R

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

TXA

TXB

RXA

RXB

SG

TERM

TOSHIBA PLC side

GOT side

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

3

11

2

10

8

2

7

1

6

3

8

4

9

5

-

TXA

TXB

RXA

RXB

SG

TOSHIBA PLC side

R

8 12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection

12

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-422 cable must be 1km or less. GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications TOSHIBA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the TOSHIBA PLC. For details, refer to the TOSHIBA PLC user's manual.

Setting terminating resistors GOT side 1) For GT27, GT25(Except GT2505-V), GT23 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". 2) For GT2505-V Set the terminating resistor selector to "330". For details of terminating resistor settings, refer to the following. Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT TOSHIBA PLC side When connecting an TOSHIBA PLC to a GOT, a terminating resistor must be set to the TOSHIBA PLC. For the setting of the terminating resistor, refer to the following manual. TOSHIBA PLC user's Manual T2 (PU224), T2N, T3, T3H, model 3000 (S3) Connect the terminating resistor (1/2W-120) across RXA and RXB. T2E, model 2000 (S2, S2T) Short across the RXA and TERM terminals.

12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection 489

49

GOT Side Settings

Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [TOSHIBA] [Controller Type]: [TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V] [I/F]: Interface to be used [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 491 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

0 12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection

12

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the

connected equipment. (Default: 9600bps)

4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps, 115200bps

Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment. (Default: 7bits)

7bit, 8bit

Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications. (Default: 2bit)

1bit, 2bit

Parity Specify whether or not to perform a parity check, and how it is performed during communication. (Default: Even)

None, Even, Odd

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs. (Default: 0time)

0 to 5times

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec)

1 to 30sec

Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 300 (ms)

12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection 491

49

PLC Side Setting

TOSHIBA PLC For details of the TOSHIBA PLC, refer to the following manual. TOSHIBA PLC user's Manual

Connecting to T2 (PU224), T2E or T2N Switch setting Set the switches accordingly. Operation mode setting switch

DIP switch on module PCB (T2N only)

*1 Can be used as RS-422.

Transmission parameter setting Enter the transmission parameters.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. *2 Fixed to 9600bps for T2E only. *3 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 490 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Model name Refer to PLC CPU T2 (PU224), T2E, T2N Page 492 Connecting to T2 (PU224), T2E or T2N

T3, T3H Page 493 Connecting to T3 or T3H

model 2000 (S2, S2T, S2E), model 3000 (S3) Page 493 Connecting to model 2000 (S2, S2T, S2E), model 3000 (S3)

Switch No. Settings Setting details 4 OFF (fixed) Computer link

5 OFF (fixed)

Switch No. Set value

For RS-232 communication For RS-422 communication DIP switch: No. 1 ON (RS-232C) OFF (RS-485*1)

Item Set value Transmission speed*1*2*3 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit 7bit

Stop bit 2bit

Parity bit Even

Station No. 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

OFF ON

2 12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection

12

Connecting to T3 or T3H Enter the transmission parameters.

*1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. *2 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 490 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Connecting to model 2000 (S2, S2T, S2E), model 3000 (S3) Enter the transmission parameters.

*1 Can be used as RS-422. *2 Indicates only the transmission speeds that can be set on the GOT side. *3 The transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side.

For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side, refer to the following. Page 490 Setting communication interface (Communication settings)

Item Set value Transmission speed*1*2 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit 7bit

Stop bit 2bit

Parity bit Even

Station No. 1

Item Set value Transmission method RS485*1

RS485 COM1

Timeout time 5sec

Transmission speed*2*3 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps

Data bit 7bit

Stop bit 2bit

Parity bit Even

Station No. 1

12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.2 Serial Connection 493

49

12.3 Ethernet Connection Connecting to Unified Controller nv series

*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard. To connect the target device and hub, use a cable according to the target controller configuration.

*2 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.

*3 Product manufactured by TOSHIBA Corporation. For details of the product, contact TOSHIBA Corporation. *4 There is no restriction for the number of GOTs. However, if the number of GOTs increases, the communication becomes high-loaded,

and it may affect the communication performance. *5 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device. *6 Use a CPU with firmware version V01.90 or later.

Use an nV-Tool with version V4.14.5 or later.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Ethernet

module*3 Cable model*1 Maximum

segment length*2

Option device*5 Model

PU811 EN811 Twisted pair cable*1

10BASE-T Shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP): Category 3, 4, and 5 100BASE-TX

Shielded twisted pair cable (STP): Category 5 and 5e

100m - (Built in the GOT) When PLC:GOT is N: 1 The number of PLCs for 1 GOT 32 or less When PLC:GOT is 1: N The number of GOTs for 1 PLCNo limit number*4GT25-J71E71-100

PUM11*6

PUM12*6

PUM14*6

- - (Built in the GOT)

GT25-J71E71-100

Ethernet (TOSHIBA nv), Gateway

Communication driver

PLC Ethernet module Hub

Connection cable Connection cable

GOT

4 12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.3 Ethernet Connection

12

GOT side settings

Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT.

1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the menu.

2. In the [Controller Setting] window, select the channel No. to be used from the list menu.

3. Set the following items. [Manufacturer]: [TOSHIBA] [Controller Type]: [TOSHIBA Unified Controller nv] [I/F]: [Ethernet:Multi] When using the Ethernet communication unit (GT25-J71E71-100), also select [Ethernet:Multi]. [Detail Setting]: Configure the settings according to the usage environment. Page 496 Communication detail settings

4. When you have completed the settings, click the [OK] button.

The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in [I/F Communication Setting]. For details, refer to the following. Page 48 I/F communication setting

2.

3.

Click!

12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.3 Ethernet Connection 495

49

Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment.

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 497 Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*2 When assigning the same driver to the multiple channels, in the communication drivers set as the second and following, the default value of [GOT Communication Port No.] becomes the earliest number in the vacant numbers of No. 6000 and later.

GOT Ethernet Setting The GOT can be connected to a different network by configuring the following setting.

GOT IP address setting Set the following communication port setting. Standard port (When using GT25-W, port 1) Extension port (When using GT25-W, port 2)

GOT Ethernet common setting Set the following setting which is common to the standard port and the extension port, or port 1 and port 2. [Default Gateway] [Peripheral S/W Communication Port No.] [Transparent Port No.]

IP filter setting By configuring the IP filter setting, the access from the specific IP address can be permitted or shut off. For the detailed settings, refer to the following manual. Page 44 GOT Ethernet Setting

Item Description Range GOT Net No. Set the network No. of the GOT.

(Default: 1) 1 to 239

GOT Station*1 Set the station No. of the GOT. (Default: 1)

1 to 254

GOT Communication Port No. Set the GOT port No. for the connection with the Ethernet module. (Default: 5022*2)

1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534 (Except for 5011 to 5013 and 49153 to 49170)

Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs. When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (Default: 3times)

0 to 5times

Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU. (Default: 3sec)

3 to 255sec

Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out. (Default: 3sec) 1 to 90sec

Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network/destination PLC. (Default: 0ms)

0 to 10000 (ms)

6 12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.3 Ethernet Connection

12

Connected Ethernet Controller Setting

*1 Set different values for [GOT Station] of [Detail Setting] and [Station] of [Connected Ethernet Controller Setting]. Page 496 Communication detail settings

Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication setting] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility, refer to the following manual. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility, the latest setting is effective.

Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed.

It refers to a station that can be connected without setting a station number. (The host is indicated with an asterisk (*).)

-

Net No. Set the network No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

1 to 239

Station*1 Set the station No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1)

1 to 254

Unit Type TOSHIBA (fixed) TOSHIBA (fixed)

IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 172.16.64.1)

PLC side IP address

Port No. Set the port No. of the connected Ethernet module. (Default: 1024)

1024 to 65534

Communication format UDP (fixed) UDP (fixed)

12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.3 Ethernet Connection 497

49

PLC side setting

TOSHIBA PLC For details of TOSHIBA PLCs, refer to the following manual. TOSHIBA PLC user's Manual

Setting of EN811

Station No. setting switch The station No. setting switches are hexadecimal rotary switches that determine the station No. on the Ethernet network. Set the station address (1 to 254) that has been assigned upon system configuration in a HEX code. Assign an address with a different value to each of the nodes in the system.

Switch name Setting details Setting range STN-H Upper address : 0 to F (Hex.) 01 to FE (Hex.)

STN-L Lower address : 0 to F (Hex.)

Operation mode setting switch

Station No. setting switch

8 12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.3 Ethernet Connection

12

Operation mode setting switch Operation mode

IP address type

Class B 172.16.64.XX XX indicates the value of the station No. setting switches. Subnet mask : 255.255.192.0 Class B 192.168.0.XX XX indicates the value of the station No. setting switches. Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 Tool setting It can be set freely from the engineering tool, and the value has precedence over the value of the station No. setting switches.

Setting of PUM11, PUM12, and PUM14 Configure the communication setting of the PLC from the engineering tool nV-Tool V4.14.5 or later. Set [Computer Link Write Mode] to [Asynchronization].

Precautions

Delay of device communication Note that if a non-existent station, or a station which power is turned OFF is monitored, the communication of normal stations is also delayed.

Redundant system When configuring a redundant system, the "Multicast address setting" for the configured PLC pair (System A: Primary, System B: Secondary) is required.

Switch No. Settings 1 OFF ON OFF

2 OFF OFF ON

3 OFF OFF OFF

Operation mode Normal For maintenance

Switch No. Settings 4 Not in use

5

Switch No. Settings 6 OFF OFF OFF ON

7 OFF ON OFF ON

8 OFF OFF ON ON

Operation mode Class B 172.16.64.XX

Reserved Class C 192.168.0.XX

Tool setting

12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.3 Ethernet Connection 499

50

12.4 Settable Device Range For the device setting dialog and range of devices usable in the GOT, refer to the following. Page 666 TOSHIBA equipment ([TOSHIBA PROSEC T/V]) Page 671 TOSHIBA equipment ([TOSHIBA Unified Controller nv])

0 12 TOSHIBA PLC 12.4 Settable Device Range

13

13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC Page 501 Connectable Model List Page 502 System Configuration Page 504 Connection Diagram Page 510 GOT Side Settings Page 512 PLC Side Setting Page 513 Settable Device Range

13.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models.

*1 For GS21, only GS21-W-N supports the RS-485 connection.

Series Model name Clock Communication Type Connectable GOT Refer to TCmini Series TC3-01 RS-232

*1

Page 502 Connecting to TC3, TC5, TC6, TC8TC3-02

TC6-00

TC8-00

TC5-02 RS-485

TC5-03

Robot controller TS2000 RS-232 Page 503 Connecting to TS2000, TS2100TS2100

13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC 13.1 Connectable Model List 501

50

13.2 System Configuration Connecting to TC3, TC5, TC6, TC8

*1 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. For details of the product, contact

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED. *3 GT25-W is not compatible to the option devices other than FA-LTBGT2R4CBL. *4 GT2505-V does not support the option device. *5 Only available to GS21-W-N for GS21.

PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*3*4 Model

TC3,TC6,TC8 RS-232 Page 504 RS232 connection diagram 1)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 PLC

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*1

Page 504 RS232 connection diagram 3)

15m - (Built into GOT)

TC5 RS-485 Page 506 RS485 connection diagram 1)

400m - (Built into GOT)

*5

Page 507 RS485 connection diagram 2)

- (Built into GOT)

Page 508 RS485 connection diagram 3)

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL05(0.5m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL10(1m)*2

FA-LTBGT2R4CBL20(2m)*2

SHIBAURA MACHINE TCmini

Communication driver

GOTTC3, TC5, TC6, TC8

Connection cable

2 13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC 13.2 System Configuration

13

Connecting to TS2000, TS2100

*1 When a GT10-C02H-6PT9P unit of the sub version A or B is used, do not ground the case of the D-sub (9-pin) connector. *2 GT25-W, GT2505-V does not support the option device.

Robot controller Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel name Communication

Type Cable model Connection diagram number

Max. distance

Option device*2 Model

TS2000 TS2100 (POD port)

RS-232 Page 504 RS232 connection diagram 2)

15m - (Built into GOT) 1 GOT for 1 robot controller

GT15-RS2-9P

GT10-C02H-6PT9P*1

Page 505 RS232 connection diagram 4)

15m - (Built into GOT)

SHIBAURA MACHINE TCmini

Communication driver

GOT TS2000 TS2100

Connection cable

13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC 13.2 System Configuration 503

50

13.3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC.

RS-232 cable

Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1)

RS232 connection diagram 2)

RS232 connection diagram 3)

GOT side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

CI

TXD

RXD

DSR

SG

DTR

CTS

RTS

CD

GOT side

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC side

1

3

2

6

5

4

8

7

9

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

ER(DTR)

SG

DR(DSR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

-

N.C.

TXD

RXD

N.C.

SG

DTR

CTS

RTS

N.C.

GOT side (terminal block)

SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC side

3

2

4

6

5

7

1

8

9

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RXD

TXD

DSR

DTR

SG

CTS

CI

RTS

CD

4 13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC 13.3 Connection Diagram

13

RS232 connection diagram 4)

Precautions when preparing a cable Cable length The length of the RS-232 cable must be 15m or less.

GOT side connector For the GOT side connector, refer to the following. Page 58 GOT connector specifications

Connector for the SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC Use a connector applicable to the SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC. For the details, refer to the manual of the SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC.

GOT side (terminal block)

SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC side

2

3

6

4

5

8

1

7

9

SD

RD

ER

DR

SG

RS

CS

NC

NC

RXD

TXD

N.C.

DTR

SG

CTS

N.C.

RTS

N.C.

13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC 13.3 Connection Diagram 505

50

RS-485 cable

Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1)

*1 Pin No. of PLC side differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For the PLC side terminating resistor, refer to the following. PLC user's Manual to be used

*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal. For GT27, GT25 except GT2505-V, and GT23, set the terminating resistor to Enable. For GT2505-V, GT21, and GS21-W-N, set the terminating resistor to 110 . Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

Signal name Model of PLC

TC5-02 TC5-03

CN24A CN24B CN14 CN18

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. A 1 1 3 3

B 2 2 4 4

GND 3 3 5 5

GOT side (D-sub 9-pin)*3

SDA SDB RDA RDB

SG RSA RSB CSA CSB

1

6

2

7

5

3

8

4

9

PLC side*1*2

A

B

GND

6 13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC 13.3 Connection Diagram

13

RS485 connection diagram 2)

*1 Pin No. of PLC side differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For the PLC side terminating resistor, refer to the following. PLC user's Manual to be used

*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "110". Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

*4 The signals RSA, RSB, CSA, and CSB are not provided for GT2104-PMBD, GT2103-PMBD.

Signal name Model of PLC

TC5-02 TC5-03

CN24A CN24B CN14 CN18

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. A 1 1 3 3

B 2 2 4 4

GND 3 3 5 5

GOT side (terminal block)*3

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

*4

*4

*4

*4

PLC side*1*2

A

B

GND

13 SHIBAURA MACHINE PLC 13.3 Connection Diagram 507

50

RS485 connection diagram 3)

*1 Pin No. of PLC side differs depending on the model. Refer to the following table.

*2 For the PLC side terminating resistor, refer to the following. PLC user's Manual to be used

*3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "110". Page 62 Terminating resistors of GOT

Signal name Model of PLC

TC5-02 TC5-03

CN24A CN24B CN14 CN18

Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. Pin No. A 1 1 3 3

B 2 2 4 4

GND 3 3 5 5

GOT side (20-pin)*3

SG NC NC NC

SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2

NC RSA

NC RSB

NC CSA

NC CSB

SDA1

SDB1

RDA1

RDB1

6

8

10

12

2

1

3